RETIE en Ingles

GENERAL ANNEX OF TREI RESOLUTION 90708 OF AUGUST 30, 2013 WITH AMENDMENTS
GENERAL ANNEX
TECHNICAL REGULATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS (TREI)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 7
CHAPTER 1 ............................................................................................................................... 8
GENERAL PROVISIONS .............................................................................................................. 8
SECTION 1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................................ 8
SECTION 2. FIELD OF APPLICATION ............................................................................................ 8
2.1 INSTALLATIONS.......................................................................................................... 8
2.2 PEOPLE ...................................................................................................................... 9
2.3 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................... 10
2.4 EXCEPTIONS............................................................................................................. 15
SECTION 3. DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................... 16
SECTION 4. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS..................................................................... 31
SECTION 5. UNITS SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 32
SECTION 6. SYMBOLISM AND SIGNALLING .......................................................................... 33
6.1 ELECTRIC SYMBOLS .................................................................................................. 33
6.2 SAFETY SIGNALLING ................................................................................................. 34
6.3 COLOR CODING FOR CONDUCTORS........................................................................... 36
SECTION 7. COMMUNICATIONS FOR COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORKS ...................... 37
SECTION 8. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAM ................................................................. 38
CHAPTER 2 ............................................................................................................................. 40
ESSENTIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 40
SECTION 9. ANALYSIS OF RISKS OF ELECTRICAL ORIGIN ....................................................... 40
9.1 ELECTROPATHOLOGY ............................................................................................... 40
9.2 EVALUATION OF RISK LEVEL ..................................................................................... 42
9.3 MOST COMMON RISK FACTORS OF ELECTRICAL NATURE........................................... 44
9.4 MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN HIGH RISK SITUATIONS.................................................. 45
9.5 NOTIFICATION OF ACCIDENTS................................................................................... 45
SECTION 10. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ............................. 46
10.1 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .................................................................... 46
10.2 INTERVENTION OF PEOPLE WITH PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS ........................... 48
10.3 PRODUCTS USED IN THE ELECTRICAL INSTALATIONS ................................................. 50
10.4 SPACES FOR EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE .................... 51
10.5 CONFORMITY WITH THIS REGULATION..................................................................... 52
10.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.............................. 52
10.7 ACCEPTED TECHNICAL LOSSES .................................................................................. 52
SECTION 11. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY.............................................................. 53
SECTION 12. CLASSIFICATION OF VOLTAGE LEVELS ............................................................ 53
SECTION 13. SAFETY DISTANCES........................................................................................ 54
13.1 MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES IN AREAS WITH CONSTRUCTIONS .............................. 55
1
13.2 MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES FOR DIFFERENT PLACES AND SITUATIONS .................. 56
13.3 MINIMUM DISTANCES BETWEEN CONDUCTORS ON THE SAME STRUCTURE .............. 58
13.4 MINIMUM DISTANCES FOR WORKS ON OR NEAR ENERGIZED PIECES......................... 59
SECTION 14. ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS............................................................................ 61
14.1 ELECTRIC FIELD......................................................................................................... 61
14.2 MAGNETIC FIELD...................................................................................................... 61
14.3 LIMIT VALUES OF EXPOSURE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS...................................... 62
14.4 CALCULATION AND MEASUREMENT OF ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS .......................... 62
SECTION 15. GROUNDING SYSTEM.................................................................................... 63
15.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE GROUNDING SYSTEM........................................... 63
15.2 DESIGN OF THE GROUNDING SYSTEM....................................................................... 65
15.3 MATERIALS OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS...................................................................... 65
15.4 GROUNDING RESISTANCE REFERENCE VALUES.......................................................... 68
15.5 MEASURINGS FOR GROUNDING SYSTEMS ................................................................ 69
15.6 MAINTENANCE OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS ................................................................ 70
15.7 TEMPORARY GROUNDING ....................................................................................... 71
SECTION 16. LIGHTNING PROTECTION ............................................................................... 72
16.1 RISK ASSESSMENT WITH REGARDS TO LIGHTNING .................................................... 72
16.2 DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF A LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ................... 72
16.3 COMPONENTS OF A LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM .............................................. 73
16.4 RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACTIONS IN CASE OF LIGHTNING ........................................ 75
SECTION 17. LIGHTING...................................................................................................... 76
17.1 SAFETY LIGHTING..................................................................................................... 76
17.2 PERIODIC TESTS ON EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS ............................................... 77
SECTION 18. WORKS ON DE-ENERGIZED MAINS................................................................. 77
18.1 GOLDEN RULES ........................................................................................................ 77
18.2 MANEUVERS............................................................................................................ 78
18.3 VERIFICATION ON THE JOBSITE................................................................................. 78
18.4 WORKS AT HEIGHT................................................................................................... 79
18.5 WORKS NEAR ENERGIZED OVERHEAD CIRCUITS ........................................................ 79
18.6 CHECKLIST FOR WORK UNDER HIGH RISK CONDITIONS ............................................. 79
SECTION 19. WORKS ON ENERGIZED MAINSS OR LIVE LINES .............................................. 80
19.1 WORK ORGANIZATION............................................................................................. 80
19.2 EXECUTION PROCEDURES......................................................................................... 81
CHAPTER 3 ............................................................................................................................. 83
PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 83
SECTION 20. PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................... 83
20.1 ELECTRICAL INSULATORS.......................................................................................... 84
20.2 WIRES AND CABLES FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE ........................................................... 86
20.3 CABLE TRAYS ........................................................................................................... 93
20.4 VAULTS, FIRE DOORS, FIRE DAMPERS, AND FIRE SEALS ............................................ 94
20.4.1 VAULTS ............................................................................................................ 94
2
20.4.2 FIRE DOORS...................................................................................................... 95

20.4.3 VENTILATION DAMPERS.................................................................................... 96
20.4.4 FIRE SEALS........................................................................................................ 96
20.5 BOXES AND CONDULETS (ENCLOSURE) ..................................................................... 96
20.6 RACEWAYS .............................................................................................................. 97
20.6.1 TUBES OR PIPING.............................................................................................. 98
20.6.2 METALLIC AND NONMETALLIC SURFACE ELECTRICAL GUTTERS (RACEWAYS) .... 100
20.6.3 PREFABRICATED RACEWAYS OR BUS DUCTS .................................................... 101
20.6.4 OTHER RACEWAYS ......................................................................................... 103
20.7 BATTERY CHARGERS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES .......................................................... 103
20.8 ELECTRIC FENCES.................................................................................................... 104
20.9 INSULATING TAPES ................................................................................................ 106
20.10 PLUGS AND OUTLETS ............................................................................................. 107
20.11 LOW AND MEDIUM VOLTAGE CAPACITORS .......................................................... 109
20.12 CONDUCTORS, TERMINALS, AND SPLICES FOR ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS ................. 110
20.13 CONTACTORS.......................................................................................................... 110
20.14 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) .......................................................................... 111
20.15 ELECTRICAL SHOWERS AND TANKLESS WATER HEATERS ......................................... 113
20.16 SWITCHING AND ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FOR LOW AND MEDIUM VOLTAGE........ 114
20.16.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR DISTRIBUTION MAINS............................................... 114
20.16.2 LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC BREAKERS.......................................................... 114
20.16.3 MANUAL LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHES .................................................................. 116
20.16.4 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHES, RECLOSERS AND DISCONNECTORS.................. 118
20.16.5 PUSH BUTTONS ............................................................................................. 118
20.17 STRUCTURES, POLES, AND CROSSHEADS FOR DISTRIBUTION MAINS ....................... 118
20.18 EXTENSION CORDS AND POWER STRIPS.................................................................. 121
20.19 FUSES................................................................................................................... 122
20.20 FITTINGS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND DISTRIBUTION MAINS ............................ 122
20.21 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND GENERATORS .................................................................... 123
20.22 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC PANELS. ............................................................................. 125
20.23 ELECTRIC PANELS AND CELLS ................................................................................. 125
20.23.1 LOW VOLTAGE BOARDS.................................................................................... 126
20.23.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CELLS ............................................................................... 128
20.23.3 CERTIFICATION OF SWITCHBOARDS AND CELLS............................................... 129
20.23.4 INSTALLATION OF CELLS AND SWITCHBOARDS ............................................... 130
20.24 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES.......................................................................... 131
20.25 TRANSFORMERS .................................................................................................... 131
20.26 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ............................................................... 133
20.27 REGULATED VOLTAGE UNITS (VOLTAGE REGULATORS) .......................................... 133
20.28 PRODUCTS USED IN SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ........................................................ 134
20.29 LAMP HOLDERS OR BULB SOCKETS ........................................................................ 134
CHAPTER 4 ........................................................................................................................... 136
3
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE GENERATION PROCESS .................................................................. 136

SECTION 21. GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................................................................................... 136
21.1 BUILDINGS............................................................................................................. 136
21.2 SAFETY DISTANCES................................................................................................. 138
21.3 GROUNDING.......................................................................................................... 138
21.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD VALUES.......................................................................... 138
21.5 SUBSTATIONS ASSOCIATED TO GENERATION CENTRALS.......................................... 138
21.6 OTHER STRUCTURES ASSOCIATED TO THE GENERATION CENTRAL ........................... 138
21.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF GENERATION CENTRALS ................................. 138
CHAPTER 5 ........................................................................................................................... 139
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE TRANSMISSION PROCESS ............................................................... 139
SECTION 22. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES .................................... 139
22.1 DESIGNS ................................................................................................................ 139
22.2 AREAS OF EASEMENT ............................................................................................. 140
22.3 FOUNDATIONS....................................................................................................... 142
22.4 GROUNDING.......................................................................................................... 142
22.5 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS IN STRUCTURES OR SUPPORTS OF TRANSMISSION LINES
142
22.6 FITTINGS................................................................................................................ 143
22.7 INSULATORS AND CONDUCTORS INSULATION ........................................................ 143
22.8 MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES .................................................................................. 144
22.9 CONDUCTORS AND RETURN CABLES....................................................................... 144
22.10 AIR NAVIGATION SIGNALS...................................................................................... 145
22.11 USE OF NEW TECHNOLOGIES .................................................................................. 145
22.12 UNDERGROUND LINES ........................................................................................... 145
22.13 SAFETY INFORMATION FOR PEOPLE NEAR THE LINE ................................................ 146
CHAPTER 6 ........................................................................................................................... 147
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE TRANSFORMATION PROCESS (SUBSTATIONS)................................. 147
SECTION 23. GENERAL ASPECTS OF SUBSTATIONS ............................................................. 147
23.1 SUBSTATIONS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 147
23.2 SAFETY DISTANCES IN OUTDOOR SUBSTATIONS...................................................... 149
23.3 SAFETY DISTANCES IN INDOOR SUBSTATIONS ......................................................... 151
23.4 OPERATIONS, COMMAND, AND CONTROL ROOMS ................................................. 151
SECTION 24. SPECIFIC SUBSTATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 152
24.1 HIGH AND EXTRA HIGH VOLTAGE SUBSTATIONS ..................................................... 152
24.2 MEDIUM TENSION INDOOR SUBSTATIONS OR LOCATED INSIDE BUILDINGS............. 152
24.3 POLE MOUNTED SUBSTATIONS.............................................................................. 153
24.4 PAD MOUNTED OR YARD SUBSTATIONS ................................................................ 154
24.5 CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTATIONS FOR END-USE INSTALLATIONS ............................. 154
24.6 SUBSTATIONS MAINTENANCE ................................................................................ 154
CHAPTER 7 ........................................................................................................................... 155
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DISTRIBUTION PROCESS................................................................. 155
4
SECTION 25. GENERAL PROVISIONS................................................................................. 155

25.1 SCOPE OF THE DISTRIBUTION PROCESS................................................................... 155
25.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS............................................... 155
25.3 GROUNDING OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ............................................................... 156
25.4 SUPPORT STRUCTURES........................................................................................... 156
25.5 FITTINGS................................................................................................................ 157
25.6 INSULATION........................................................................................................... 158
25.7 CONDUCTORS, RETURN CABLES, AND HOLDING CABLES.......................................... 158
25.8 MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 161
SECTION 26. SAFETY INFORMATION FOR THE USER AND GENERAL PUBLIC ............................. 161
26.1 SAFETY BROCHURE ................................................................................................ 161
26.2 PERIODIC INFORMATION........................................................................................ 161
CHAPTER 8 ........................................................................................................................... 163
REQUIREMENTS FOR END-USE INSTALLATIONS...................................................................... 163
SECTION 27. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR END-USE INSTALLATIONS............................... 163
27.1 APPLICATION OF TECHNICAL STANDARDS............................................................... 163
27.2 EARTHING SCHEMES (ES)........................................................................................ 164
27.3 SERVICE LINES........................................................................................................ 165
27.4 PROTECTION OF END-USE INSTALLATIONS................................................................. 166
27.5 MAINTENANCE AND PRESERVATION OF END-USE INSTALLATIONS .......................... 167
27.6 CLASSIFICATION OF END-USE INSTALLATIONS ......................................................... 167
SECTION 28. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ACCORDING TO TYPE OF INSTALLATION................ 168
28.1 BASIC INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................ 168
28.2 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS................................................................................. 169
28.3 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS......................................................................................... 169
SECTION 29. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN MINES ......................................................... 179
29.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 179
29.2 GROUNDING SYSTEM IN MINING INSTALLATIONS. .................................................. 180
29.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 181
29.4 LIGHTING AND SIGNALLING.................................................................................... 182
SECTION 30. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGROUND MINES. ...................................... 182
30.1 CLASSIFICATION OF AREAS IN UNDERGROUND MINES............................................ 182
30.2 USE OF APPROPRIATE EQUIPMENT......................................................................... 182
30.3 USE OF APPROPRIATE ELECTRIC CABLES.................................................................. 183
CHAPTER 9 ........................................................................................................................... 185
PROHIBITIONS ...................................................................................................................... 185
SECTION 31. PROHIBITIONS......................................................................................... 185
31.1 PERSISTENT COMPOUNDS...................................................................................... 185
31.2 RADIOACTIVE LIGHTNING RODS ............................................................................. 185
31.3 REUSED MATERIALS IN END-USE INSTALLATIONS.................................................... 185
31.4 USE OF GROUNDING AS UNIQUE RETURN CONDUCTOR .......................................... 185
CHAPTER 10.......................................................................................................................... 186
5
PROOF OF CONFORMITY ....................................................................................................... 186

SECTION 32. MECHANISMS FOR ASSESSMENT OF CONFORMITY ......................................... 186
32.1 ACCREDITATION AND CONFORMITY ASSESSMENT BODIES ...................................... 186
SECTION 33. CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE .................................................. 189
33.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTIFICATION OF PRODUCTS................................. 189
33.2 CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS OF ACCEPTED PRODUCTS ................................................. 190
33.3 FOLLOW-UP OF THE CERTIFICATION........................................................................ 192
33.4 EXCEPTIONAL FORMS OF PRODUCT CERTIFICATION. ............................................... 192
33.5 REGULATIONS FOR THE PROCEEDINGS OF PRODUCT CERTIFICATION ....................... 194
SECTION 34. DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLIANCE OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS............. 194
34.1 GENERAL ASPECTS OF THE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION ....................................... 194
34.2 STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE................................................................................. 195
34.3 INSPECTION WITH CERTIFICATION PURPOSES ......................................................... 195
34.4 INSTALLATIONS THAT REQUIRE INSPECTION OPINION............................................. 198
34.5 COMPONENTS OF THE INSPECTION OPINION .......................................................... 200
34.6 VALIDITY OF THE INSPECTION OPINIONS ................................................................ 201
34.7 VALIDITY OF CERTIFICATES AND OPINIONS ISSUED UNDER OTHER RESOLUTIONS AND
UPDATE OF THE ACCREDITATIONS ..................................................................................... 201
34.8 EXCEPTIONS OF THE INSPECTION OPINION ............................................................. 202
34.9 STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE FORMS..................................................................... 202
34.10 INSPECTION OPINION FORMS................................................................................. 203
SECTION 35. REVISION OF THE INSTALLATIONS ............................................................ 209
CHAPTER 11.......................................................................................................................... 210
SURVEILLANCE, CONTROL, AND SANCTIONS SCHEME............................................................. 210
SECTION 36. SURVEILLANCE AND CONTROL ENTITIES ................................................... 210
SECTION 37. SANCTIONS SCHEME................................................................................ 211
CHAPTER 12.......................................................................................................................... 212
TRANSIENT PROVISIONS ....................................................................................................... 212
SECTION 38. TRANSIENT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 212
38.1 CERTIFICATES OF COMPETENCES FOR INDIVIDUALS. ............................................... 212
38.2 CERTIFICATES OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE ............................................................... 212
38.3 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLIANCE OF INSTALLATIONS .......................................... 212
38.4 UPDATING OF THE REGULATIONS OF GRID OPERATORS, TRANSMITTERS, AND
GENERATORS.................................................................................................................... 213
CHAPTER 13.......................................................................................................................... 214
REVISION AND UPDATE......................................................................................................... 214
SECTION 39. INTERPRETATION, REVISION, AND UPDATE OF THE REGULATION ............. 214
6
General Annex of Technical Regulations of Electrical Installations TREI
INTRODUCTION
In accordance with article 2 of the National Constitution, the authorities in the Republic shall
protect the life, honor, and property of all nationals wherever they may be, and of aliens in their
jurisdiction. In this sense the Ministry of Mining and Energy as the ultimate authority in issues
related to energy adopts the technical regulations intended to ensure the protection of the life of
persons against risks that may come from goods and services related to the sectors it oversees.
Knowledge of the physical laws that rule electricity in the last two centuries has allowed great
technological progress and a high dependence on this form of energy. Similarly, this scientific and
technological development has allowed to see how human, animal, or vegetable li fe has energetic
processes associated mostly to electric manifestations, whose tension and current values are so
small that make them easily alterable when the organism is subject to the interaction of electric
power of greater magnitudes such as the ones applied usually in domestic, industrial, or
commercial processes. Therefore, this regulation establishes the requirements that all materials,
pieces of equipment and installations shall meet, as well as the compulsion to assess electric risks
and take the necessary precautions in order to avoid that such risks are materialized into incidents
or accidents. Knowing and following such requirements will be the best choice to take advantage
of electricity without it causing harm.
The following general principles that orient risks management are considered: equality,
protection, social solidarity, self-preservation, participation, cultural diversity, public or social
interest, caution, environmental sustainability, gradualness, coordination, concurrence,
subsidiarity, and timely information. We hope that all inhabitants of the national territory support
management of electric risks and act under the aforementioned principles, both in the personal
and in the social aspects, applying them to the goods used in electri cal installations and in
procedures pertaining to design, construction, operation, and maintenance services of those
installations.
The present scheme of world commerce does not allow unnecessary restrictions to the market of
goods and services, and only those which safeguard common legitimate interests of the country
may be accepted provided that they are made through technical regulations subject previously to
public discussion, to international notification, and its publication. With such conditions, It is
mandatory to comply with the technical regulations within the country that issues them.
The Technical Regulations of Electrical Installations TREI establishes the requirements that
ensure the legitimate goals of protection against electric risks. To do this, the essential
foundations that define the scope of application and basic characteristics of electrical installations
have been compiled, as well as some requirements that may have incidence in the r elations
among people interacting with electrical installations or among the service and the users of
electricity.
It is expected that when applying such tenets with ethics, awareness, and discipline by all people
involved, the users of goods and services related to electricity as well as the people performing
them are exempt from electric risks.
For the purposes of this regulation, the words must and have to, as verbs and their conjugations
shall be understood as be obliged to.
The Ministry of Mining and Energy appreciates the participation of Colombian professionals in the
field of electro-technology, companies in the electricity sub-sector, guilds related to it, and the
academic institutions for their valuable contributions in order to complement and improve the
TREI, especially engineer Favio Casas Ospina and his work team for their commitment and
dedication to this project.
7
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 1. PURPOSE
The fundamental purpose of this regulation is to establish the measures in order to ensure safety
of people, of life both in animal and vegetable forms, and preservation of the environment by
preventing, minimizing, or eliminating risks of electric nature without prejudice to the compliance
of civil, mechanical, and equipment manufacturing regulations.
Additionally, it outlines the demands and specifications that ensure safety of electrical installations
based on their good operation, reliability, quality, and proper use of products and equipment; that
is to say, it sets the minimum safety parameters for electrical installations.
Similarly, it is a technical-legal instrument for Colombia which allows to guarantee that
installations, equipment and products used in the generation, transmission, transformation,
distribution, and use of electric power comply with the following objectives without creating
unnecessary obstacles to trade or free-enterprise:
Protection of human life and health.

Protection of animal and vegetable life.
Preservation of the environment
Prevention of practices that may induce error to the user.
To comply with these legitimate goals, this regulation was based on the following specific
objectives:
a. To set the conditions in order to avoid accidents by direct or indirect contact with
energized parts or electric arcs.
b. To set the conditions in order to prevent fires and explosions caused by electricity.
c. To set the conditions in order to avoid burning of trees caused by closeness to mains.
d. To set the conditions to avoid death of people and animals caused by electric fences.
e. To set the conditions to avoid damages due to overload and overvoltage.
f. To adopt the symbols to be used by professionals in electrical technology.
g. To minimize deficiencies in electrical installations.
h. To establish clearly the responsibilities to be complied by designers, builders, technical
auditors, operators, inspectors, owners, and users of electrical installations, besides the
manufacturers, importers, distributors of materials or equipment, and legal entities
related to the generation, transforming, transport, distribution, and commercialization of
electricity; inspection bodies, certification bodies, testing and assays laboratories.
i. To unify the essential safety requirements for the most used electrical products, in order
to ensure the best reliability in their operation.
j. To prevent actions that may induce error to the users, such as the use or diffusion of
incorrect or false indications, or omission in the compliance with the requirements of this
regulation.
k. To demand reliability and compatibility of products and electrical equipment.
l. To demand requirements in order to contribute to the reasonable and efficient use of
energy, thus protecting the environment and ensuring electric supply.
SECTION 2. FIELD OF APPLICATION

This regulation applies to electrical installations, products used in them, and people intervening
them, under the following terms:
2.1 INSTALLATIONS
For the purposes of this regulation, the term electrical installations refers to electrical circuits with
their components, such as conductors, equipment, machines, and devices that make up an
electrical system and that are used for the generation, transmission, transforming, distribution, or
final use of electric power, either public or private; that are within the limits of voltage and
frequency established herein, that is to say, nominal voltage greater or equal than 24V in direct
8
current (DC) or more than 25V in alternate current (AC) with nominal service frequency lower than
1000 Hz.
The requirements of this Regulation apply to electrical installations constructed after the
Regulation has become effective. They also apply to the expansions and renovations. For
installations constructed after the 1 st of May, 2005, the owner or holder thereof shall apply the
provisions of the TREI in force on the date of construction; and for those prior to the 1 st of May,
2005, ensure that they do not represent high risk for health or life of people and animals, or that
they do not harm the environment, otherwise, corrections to eliminate or mitigate the ris k must
be made. 1
The technical requirements and prescriptions of this regulation will be of mandatory compliance in
Colombia, for all electrical installations used in the generation, transport, transforming,
distribution, and final use of electricity, including those feeding equipment for
telecommunications signals, home appliances, vehicles, machines, tools, and other pieces of
equipment. In case that the former conditions are altered by force majeure or public disturbance,
the owner or holder of the installation must seek to restore safety conditions in the shortest time
possible.
Installations must be constructed in such a way that hazardous energized pieces are not accessible
to non-qualified persons, and accessible energized pieces must not be hazardous, both in normal
operation and in case of failure.
2.1.1 Conformity of the installation.
In order to determine the compliance of electrical installations with the TREI, besides the
requirements under Chapter 10 herein, the following guidelines must be followed:
a. Every installation subject to the TREI must prove its compliance by means of the
Statement of Compliance signed by whoever executes directly the construction,
renovation, or expansion of the electrical installation. In the cases where Full Certification
is required, it shall be understood as the Statement of Compliance accompanied by the
Inspection Report issued by the inspection body accredited by ONAC, validating such
statement.
b. The Grid Operator, the energy supplier or whoever provides the service in the area must
neither energize the installation nor provide the energy service if the owner or holder of
the installation does not prove compliance with the TREI. Similar treatment will be given
to installations that, although having the certification at the time of conducting the
technical visit for their energizing, provide evidences of non compliances with this
regulation that may have high risk or imminent hazard on health or life of people or the
safety of the installation itself and neighboring buildings. Shall any event or accident occur
after commissioning the electrical installation, the causes must be investigated and people
responsible for the abnormality must be sanctioned by the competent surveillance and
control bodies.
c. In the event that an installation is energized and it does not show compliance with this
regulation, the company that provides the service shall be liable for the effects derived
from that fact. Consequently, the Superintendence of Public Utilities may impose
sanctions, once the corresponding investigations are conducted, in accordance with article
81, Act 142 of 1994.
d. People responsible for expansions or renovations that do not comply with the
requirements set forth in the TREI, exposing other peoples health or life to high risk or
imminent hazard, shall also be investigated and sanctioned by the competent surveillance
and control body. Similarly, the accredited bodies which issued the certification of the
installation without compliance of the requirements shall be investigated and sanctioned.
2.2 PEOPLE
This Regulation shall be observed and complied by all individuals or legal entities, domestic or
foreign, contractors or operators that generate, transform, or distribute electric power, and in
1
Paragraph amended by Resolution 90907, October 25, 2013.
9
general by those who use, design, supervise, construct, inspect, operate, or maintain electrical
installations in Colombia; as well as by manufacturers, importers, and suppliers of products subject
to the TREI and by conformance assessment bodies.
2.3 PRODUCTS
Products listed on table 2.1 below, being the ones mostly used in electrical installations and being
directly related to the purpose and scope of application of the Technical Regulation of Electrical
Installations TREI - must comply with the requirements set forth in this Regulation and prove
compliance thereof by means of a Product Compliance Certificate.
Item Product
Glass, ceramic and other materials electrical insulators for use on lines, mains, substations, and
1
electric bus bars with voltage exceeding 100V.
2 Aluminum or copper wires, with or without isolation, for electric service.
3 Cable trays for electric service.
4 Aluminum or copper cables, with or without isolation, for electric service.
5 Steel core aluminum cables for electric service.
6 Galvanized steel cables for use in electrical installations (return cables, templates, ground cable)
7 Electric circuits junction boxes and conduits.
8 Metallic and nonmetallic ducts and conduits for electric service.
9 Bus ducts or bus conduits.
10 Battery chargers for electric vehicles.
11 Cells for use in mid tension substations.
12 Electrical insulating tape.
13 Low tension electrical plugs.
14 Controllers or initiators for electrical fences.
15 Electrical contactors for currents exceeding 15 A.
16 Capacitors and capacitor banks with nominal capacity exceeding 3 KVAR.
17 Connectors, terminals, and splices for electrical circuits conductors.
18 Jumper struts for use in structures supporting mains (metallic, wooden, polyester fiber, concrete).
19 Protection devices against surge for less than 1000V.
20 Protection devices against surge for more than 1000V and less than 66KV (tension limiter)
21 Protection devices against surge for more than 1000V and less than 66KV (wave buffers).
22 Electrical showers or tankless electrical water heaters.
Copper grounding electrodes, alloys with more than 80% copper, stainless steel, copper coated
23
steel, galvanized coated steel, or any type of material used as grounding electrode.
24 Electrical pumps with tension exceeding 25V in alternate current or 48V in direct current.
25 Stand-alone equipment for emergency lighting.
Transmission lines structures and distribution mains, including turrets and metal profiles exclusive
26
for that service.
27 Electrical extensions for voltage less than 600V.
28 Fuses and fuse holders for electrical installations.
Alternate or direct current generators, with power equal or greater than 1KVA, including
29
generating sets and small generation plants.
30 Fittings for power transmission lines and electrical distribution mains.
31 Automatic switches or circuit breakers for voltage less than 1000V.
32 Manual low voltage switches or circuit breakers, including knife switches.
33 Medium voltage breakers.
Electrical motors for nominal voltages exceeding 25V and power equal or greater than 375 W of
34 direct or alternate current, single phase or multiple phase, including those incorporated in pieces
of equipment such as electrical pumps and gearboxes.
35 Electrical power strips for voltage less than 600 V.
Photovoltaic solar panels for use in electrical installations of residential, commercial or public
36
buildings.
37 Sockets.
38 Concrete, metallic, wooden, or other material poles used for power mains and lines.
Products for special electrical installations for areas classified as hazardous (classified areas), for
39 installations in medical attention sites, for installations in mobile homes and recreational vehicles,
and for installations in mines.
Products for special equipment such as elevators, forklifts, electrical escalators, electro -mechanical
40 walkways, cranes, hoists, x-ray equipment, electrically controlled irrigation machines, swimming
pools, hot-tubs and similar sources, and for firefighting systems.
41 Products for electrical installations in places with high concentration of people.
42 Fire doors for use in electrical substations vaults.
43 Temporary grounding.
Electrical pushbuttons used as manual operation for connection or disconnection of e lectrical
44
circuits.
10
Electric switchboards and panels, enclosures or cabinets for boards with voltage less or equal than
45
1000V.
46 Medium voltage cells.
47 Power outlets for general service or applications in special installations for low voltage.
48 Automatic transfers.
49 Thermal and electronic relays for protection against overloads.
50 Medium voltage reclosers and disconnectors.
51 Transformers with capacity greater or equal than 3 KVA.
52 Iron or iron allow tubes for electrical installations (metallic conduits).
53 Non-metallic tubes for electrical installations (non-metallic conduits).
54 Uninterruptible power supply units (UPS).
55 Regulated voltage units (voltage regulators) of power greater than 500 W.
2
Table 2.1. Products subject to TREI
Notice: This regulation applies to products with the commercial names listed on Table 2.1 and
those that although using different names have the same service. Trade custom tariffs will not
determine the application of this regulation since they may classify products not subject to the
TREI, besides being susceptible to modification by the competent authority.
For the purposes of control and surveillance, Table 2.2 below shows some custom tariffs and the
marginal notes that precise the conditions in which a product, being subject to TREI, may be
excluded of its compliance due to its destination for applications different than the scope and for
such reason they do not require to prove compliance with the TREI. When exclusions are used,
these shall be proved before the control entity by the means set forth in the current legislation.
MARGINAL NOTE FOR APPLYING OR
CUSTOM TARIFF DESCRIPTION AS PER TARIFF EXCLUDING PRODUCT FROM
COMPLIANCE WITH TREI
Applies only to tubes for electrical
3917210000 Ethylene polymer rigid tubes.
installations (Conduits).
3917220000 Propylene polymer rigid tubes.
3917230000 Vinyl chloride polymer rigid tubes
3917291000 Other plastics, vulcanized fiber rigid tubes.
3917299000 All other rigid tubes in other plastics.
Applies only for electrical installations
3925900000 Non-metallic gutters
gutters.
Plastic self-adhesive plates, sheets, tapes,
Applies only and exclusively to electrical
3919100000 strips, and other plane shapes, including
insulating tape.
rolls of 20 cm or less in width.
Applies only and exclusively to markers
Other plastic manufactures and
used on transmission lines as air
3926909090 manufactures in other materials from
navigation signals and cable trays for
custom tariffs 39.01 to 39.14
electrical service.
Applies only to grounding electrodes
7222119000 Stainless steel bars and profiles
(grounding rods).
Other hollow tubes and profiles, without
welding (seamless), iron or steel made, Applies only to metallic tubes for
7304310000
without alloys, of circular section, cold- electrical installations (conduits).
stretched or laminated.
Applies only to metallic tubes for
7304390000 welding (seamless), iron or steel made,
electrical installations (conduits).
without alloys, of circular section.
7304510000
welding (seamless), iron or steel made, Applies only to metallic tubes and piping
7304590000
without alloys, of circular section, cold- for electrical installations (conduits)
7304900000
stretched or laminated, and the others.
7305190000
The other hollow tubes and profiles,
7304590000 without welding (seamless), circular
section, of other alloyed steels.
7306309900 Other tubes welded longitudinally
2
Table 2.1 amended by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
11
Other hollow tubes and profiles of square Applies only for metal gutters for
7306610000
or rectangular section. electrical installations.
7307920000 Metal tubes fittings, such as threaded or Applies only to electrical tubes (conduits)
7307990000 non-threaded bends and unions. fittings.
Cast steel or cast iron towers and lattice Applies only to towers, poles, and other
7308200000 masts, except for prefabricated metal structures for transport or
constructions from tariff 94.06 distribution of electrical power.
7314390000 Other welded mains in cross points. Applies only to metal cable trays.
Applies only to galvanized fittings used on
Other forged or stamped iron or steel
electrical lines and mains, and galvanized
7326190000 manufactures without any other kind of
profiles for power transmission lines
work.
towers or distribution mains.
Applies only to grounding electrodes,
7326901000 coated with copper or zinc, stainless steel
Iron or steel bars.
7326909000 or other material for protection against
corrosion
Refined copper or copper alloys bars and Applies only to grounding electrodes and
7407100000
profiles. bars for electric service.
Applies only for grounding electrodes,
7407210000 Copper-zinc (tin) based bars and profiles. with coating in copper or copper-zinc
alloys, and bars for electric service.
Refined copper wire with the largest Applies only to non-insulated wire for
7408110000 dimension of cross-section exceeding 6 electric service, excluding rolled wire
mm. without drawing.
Applies only to non-insulated wire for use
in electric conductors, but does not apply
to copper wire without drawing or when
they are manufactured or imported to be
incorporated as constitutive part of
7408190000 The other refined copper wires.
automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
appliances, electro-medical equipment,
elements for telecommunications signals,
radio systems, and other tools and
machines.
Applies only to cables and wires used in
conductors of electrical installations.
Does not apply when they are imported
or manufactured to be incorporated as
Copper wires, threads, and similar items,
7413000000 constitutive part of automobiles, ships,
without insulation for electricity.
aircrafts, home appliances, electro-
medical equipment, elements for
telecommunications signals, radio
systems, and other tools and machines.
7604101000
Aluminum bars without alloy or alloyed. Applies only to bars for electric service.
7604291000
Aluminum wires with largest dimension of
7605110000
cross-section greater than 7 mm 10 and Applies only to wires for electric service
7605190000
the others.
Aluminum cables, wires, and similar items,
7614100000 constitutive part of automobiles, ships,
without insulation for electricity.
7614900000 Other aluminum cables, wires, and similar
constitutive part of automobiles, ships,
items, without insulation for electricity.
Applies to electrical motors and other
Electric motor-driven pumps (electrical elements of connection, protection, and
8413
pumps) for pumping liquids. electric control fitted on pumps for
liquids.
12
Motors of less than 375 W are excluded

and generators of power less than 100
watts, and electrical motors and
generators imported or manufactured
exclusively to be incorporated as
constitutive part of automobiles, ships,
Electric motors and generators, except for
8501 aircrafts, home appliances, electro-
generating sets.
systems, and other tools and machines
provided that such machines or tools are
not considered as special electrical
installations under NTC 2050.
Generating sets and electrical rotating Excludes generating sets and electric
8502 converters of both compression and spark rotating converters of power lower than
ignition. 1 kVA.
Only applies to distribution transformers
of power greater than or equal to 5 kVA.
Does not apply when they are
manufactured or imported to be
Liquid dielectric transformers of power automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
8504211000
lower than 10 kVA. appliances, electro-medical equipment,
machines provided that such tools or
machines are not considered as special
electrical installations under NTC 2050.
Other liquid dielectric transformers, of incorporated as constitutive part of
8504219000 power exceeding 10 kVA but lower or automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
equal than 650 kVA. appliances, electro-medical equipment,
radio systems.
Liquid dielectric transformers, of power incorporated as constitutive part of
8504221000 exceeding 650 kVA but lower or equal to automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
1000 kVA. appliances, electro-medical equipment,
radio systems.
Other liquid dielectric transformers, of incorporated as constitutive part of
8504229000 power exceeding 1000 kVA but lower or automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
equal to 10000 kVA. appliances, electro-medical equipment,
radio systems.
Does not apply to distribution
transformers of power less than 5 kVA.
Other electric transformers of power
8504321000 exceeding 1 kVA but lower or equal than
10 kVA
Other electric transformers of power automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
8504329000 exceeding 10 kVA but lower or equal than appliances, electro-medical equipment,
16 kVA. elements for telecommunications signals,
13
electrical installations under NTC 2050

Other electric transformers of power incorporated as constitutive part of
8504330000 exceeding 16 kVA but lower or equal than automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
500 kVA. appliances, electro-medical equipment,
radio systems.
Other electric transformers of power incorporated as constitutive part of
8504341000 exceeding 500 kVA but lower or equal automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
than 1600 kVA appliances, electro-medical equipment,
radio systems.
Other electric transformers of power
8504342000 automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
exceeding 1600 kVA.
radio systems.
Applies only to UPS or Uninterrupted
8504401000 Stabilized feed units (UPS) and other static Power Supply, voltage regulators, and
8504409000 converters. devices of electric vehicles battery
chargers.
Electric water heaters, instantaneous Applies only to tankless water heaters
8516100000
water heaters, immersion heaters. and electrical showers.
Devices for cutting and isolating,
8535100000
protection, derivation, splicing, or
8535210000 Applies only to fuses, breakers with fuse,
connection of medium voltage electric
8535290000 circuit breakers for distribution mains,
circuits such as breakers, switches, circuit
8535300000 insulators, breakers or switches, closers,
breakers, lightning arresters (DPS), voltage
8535401000 overvoltage protection devices, junction
limiter, surge suppressors, power plugs,
8535409000 boxes for systems ranging from 1000 to
junction boxes, and other connectors,
8535901000 57000 V (medium voltage).
fuses, breakers, and insulators for
8535909000
voltages greater than 1000 V.
8536102000 Applies only to fuses, breakers with fuse,
8536109000 manual and automatic breakers, plugs
8536202000 and power plugs, sockets, overvoltage
8536209000 protection devices, junction boxes, and
8536301900 other connectors for systems with
Devices for cutting and isolating,
8536309000 voltage lower than 1000 V (low voltage),
protection, derivation, splicing, or
8536411000 contactors, fuses for voltage greater than
connection of medium voltage electric
8536419000 100 V and current greater that 15A.
circuits such as breakers, switches, relays,
8536491100 Does not apply when they are
circuit breakers, surge suppressors, plugs
8536491900 manufactured or imported to be
and power plugs, sockets, junction boxes,
8536499000 incorporated as constitutive part of
and other connectors, fuses, breakers,
8536501900 automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
and insulators for voltages greater than
8536509000 appliances, electro-medical equipment,
1000 V.
8536610000 elements for telecommunications signals,
8536690000 radio systems, and other tools and
8536901000 machines provided that such tools or
8536902000 machines are not considered as special
8536909000 electrical installations under NTC 2050
Boards, panels, consoles, cabinets, and
other supports equipped with several
devices from tariffs 85.35 or 85.36, for
control or distribution of electricity,
8537200000 including those that incorporate Applies to medium voltage cells.
instruments or devices from chapter 90,
as well as numeric control devices, except
for switching devices from tariff 85.17. For
voltage greater than 1000 V.
Applies only to boards or cabinets
Boards, cabinets, consoles and other incorporating PLC. Does not apply when
supports for programmable logic they are manufactured or imported to be
8537101000
controllers (PLC) for voltage lower than incorporated as constitutive part of
1000 V. automobiles, ships, aircrafts, home
14

Applies to low voltage boards; does not
Other boards, panels, consoles, cabinets, apply when they are manufactured or
and other supports equipped with several imported to be incorporated as
devices from tariffs 85.35 or 85.36, for constitutive part of automobiles, ships,
control or distribution of electricity, aircrafts, home appliances, electro-
8537109000 including those that incorporate medical equipment, elements for
instruments or devices from chapter 90, telecommunications signals, radio
as well as numeric control devices, except systems, and other tools and machines
for switching devices from tariff 85.17. For provided that such tools or machines are
voltage greater than 1000 V. not considered as special electrical
installations under NTC 2050.
Applies only to cabinets, consoles, and in
general enclosures that work as
protection and support for electrical
devices or as junction boxes, meter
boxes, and in general boxes used as
electrical enclosures. Does not apply
Boards, panels, consoles, cabinets, and
when they are manufactured or imported
8538100000 other supports without including devices
to be incorporated as constitutive part of
8538900000 and other pieces intended to support
devices without including them.
Applies only to pulse generators or
8543701000 Electric fence energizers.
electric fence controllers.
Applies only to insulated electric
8544422000 Wires, cables, and other insulated electric
conductors including assembled ones,
8544429000 conductors for voltage lower or equal
extensions, power strips, and electrical
8544491000 than 1000 V, with or without connection
conduits with incorporated bars (bus
8544499000 pieces.
bars).
8544601000 Cables and other electric insulated Applies only to insulated electric cables
8544609000 conductors for voltage exceeding 1000 V. for mid, high, and extra high voltage.
Applies only to electric insulators used on
8546100000 Glass electric insulators bus bars, transmission lines, substations,
or electric power distribution mains.
8546200000 Ceramic electric insulators bus bars, transmission lines, substations,
8546901000 Silicon electric insulators bus bars, transmission lines, substations,
8546909000 Electric insulators, other materials bus bars, transmission lines, substations,
Table 2.2. Some Custom Tariffs
Notice: Not inclusion of the custom tariff applicable to any product subject to the TREI in table 2.2
may not be a valid excuse for non compliance with the regulation.
2.3.1 Product conformity
Products used in electrical installations subject to the TREI which are listed on Table 2.1 shall prove
conformity with the TREI by means of a CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE issued by an
accredited certification body, as established in Chapter 10.
2.4 EXCEPTIONS
The following installations and products are exempted from the compliance with this regulation
and consequently from proving conformity:
a. Installations pertaining to vehicles (automobiles, trains, boats, ships, aircrafts), provided
that they are not intended for housing, commerce, or recreational vehicles.
15
b. Installations pertaining to the following equipment: electro-medical, radio signals,

television signals, telecommunications signals, sound signals, and controls systems signals.
c. Installations that use less than 24 volts (also known as very low voltage) provided that
they are not intended to supply electrical needs of buildings or places where people
concentrate; that their currents may not cause high risk or imminent hazard of fire,
explosion for arcs, or short-circuits.
d. Installations pertaining to home appliances, machines, and tools provided that the
equipment, machine, or system is not classified as special installation under NTC 2050 First
Update, or under this Regulation.
Paragraph: In a term not exceeding five years from the effective date of this Annex, a partial
exception from the compliance of the TREI will be allowed for those domestic installations that
during the Grid Operators users legalization program proves that said users do n ot have the
economic conditions to ensure that the legalized installation complies with all the requirements set
forth in the TREI. Under these circumstances, the legalization of such installation may be made
provided that the missing requirements do not put the users of said installation or third parties in
high risk or imminent hazard, and that the following requirements are met:
1. Minimum safety distances to energized pieces.
2. Have a grounding system.
3. Have available overload protection in each circuit, which must not exceed the conductors
load capacity.
4. Conductors must be duly insulated and have the appropriate calibers so that the
installations operation does not generate heat capable of causing fires.
5. Have enclosures that guarantee that energized pieces are not easily exposed to direct
contact of people.
Additionally, a competent professional from the Grids Operator, jointly with the user to be
legalized, must sign a document where a commitment is established by the user to fit the
installation to the compliance with this Regulation in a term not exceeding five years; non
compliance with this commitment may be grounds to terminate the uniform conditions contract
and to suspend provision of the service.
2.4.2 Exceptions in products
Products that despite being classified on Table 2.1 herein are excepted from the scope of this
regulation when they are intended exclusively to:
a. Installations set forth in item 2.4.1 above.
b. Raw materials or components for the manufacture, assembly, or repair of machines,

devices, pieces of equipment, or other products, unless they are special pieces of
equipment requiring that their components have product certification.
c. Products used as samples for certification or research.
d. Non-commercial samples, used in trade fairs or demonstrative events.
e. Products for assembly or contract manufacturing.
f. Products for exclusive use as spare parts of equipment and machines, provided that the
precise destination of the product is specified.
SECTION 3. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this regulation, the following general definitions are applied as well as the
ones of NTC 2050 First Update. For clarity and concordance with the purpose of the TREI, some
16
definitions may diverge from the ones established in regulations with other objectives. When a
term does not appear, it is recommended to consult the IEC series 50 or IEEE 100 standards.
ACCESSIBLE: In the reach of a person without using any mechanism and without physical barriers.
ACCIDENT: Undesired event, including neglect and failures of equipment, which cause death,
personal injury, damage to property, or environmental deterioration.
SERVICE LINE: Derivation from the corresponding utility local grid that reaches up to the cut
entrance of the construction. In residential buildings or condominiums, the service line gets up to
the general cut entrance. In those cases where the cutting device is upstream the meter, for the
purposes of this regulation, the service line shall be understood as the set of conductors and
fittings between the electric connection point to the general use system (STN, STR, or SDL) and the
outward terminals of the metering equipment.
ACCREDITATION: Procedure by which the technical competence and suitability are recog nized for
certification and inspection bodies as well as for assay and metrology laboratories.
UNSAFE ACTION: Violation of an already defined safety standard.
RISKS MANAGEMENT: Systematic application of administrative policies, procedures, and work
practices in order to mitigate, minimize, or control risks.
INSULATOR: Item with minimum electrical conductivity designed in such a way that it allows to
provide rigid or flexible support to conductors or electric equipment and isolate them electrically
from other conductors or grounding.
BASIC ELECTRIC INSULATION: Insulation applied to live parts in order to prevent electrical contact.
FUNCTIONAL INSULATION: The one that is necessary for the normal operation of a device and the
protection against direct contacts.
REINFORCED INSULATION: Single insulation system applied to hazardous live parts and provides a
grade of protection against electrical contact; it is equivalent to double insulation.
SUPPLEMENTARY INSULATION: Independent insulation applied additionally to basic insulation
with the aim of providing protection against electrical contact in case of failure of the basic
insulation.
ELECTRICAL INSULATOR: Material with low electrical conductivity which may be taken as non -
conductor or insulator.
WIRE: Metal wire or filament, either drawn or laminated, used to conduct electric current.
HARD WIRE: Wire that has been cold-drawn until its final size, in such a way that it reaches
maximum tensile strength possible.
SOFT WIRE: Wire that has been drawn or laminated until its final size, and then it is annealed in
order to increase elongation.
HIGH CONCENTRATION OF PEOPLE OR OCCUPANCY FOR PUBLIC GATHERINGS: Concentration of
50 or more people in order to carry out activities such as work, meetings, having food, drinks or
entertainment, waiting for transport, places of worship, education, health, or amusement. In the
application of this definition, densities of persons shall be considered as well as the evacuation
systems of critical areas yet not the totality of people that the building or place considered as
reference contains; therefore the minimum or set number for high concentration of people may
be lower, for which it is recommended to apply the NFPA 101 Standard (Human Safety Code).3
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT: Totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing in a given
site.
THREAT: Latent hazard that a physical event either of natural origin or caused, or induced by
human action in an accidental manner, appears with sufficient severity to cause los s of lives,
injuries, or other impacts on health, as well as damages and losses of goods, infrastructure, means
of living, provision of services, and environmental resources.
3
Definition modified by means of Resolution 40942 of April 24, 2015.
17
RISKS ANALYSIS: Set of techniques to identify, classify, and evaluate risk factors. It is the study of
noxious or prejudicial consequences associated to actual or potential exposure.
SUPPORT: Generic name given to the conductors and lines insulators or air lines supporting
device. They may be poles, towers, or other type of structure.
ELECTRIC ARC: Light beam produced by the flux of electric current through an insulating medium,
which produces radiation and hot gases.
SAFETY SIGN: Warning for prevention or action, easily visible, used with the aim of informing,
demanding, restricting, or prohibiting.
MARKER: Fixed air navigation signal which allows day or night vision of a phase conductor or the
guard cable.
STORAGE BATTERY: Piece of equipment that contains one or more rechargeable electrochemical
cells.
BIL: Basic Insulation Level against lightning impulses.
VAULT: Enclosure inside a building, reinforced to resist fire, with access only for qualified
personnel on or below ground level which houses dry power transformers for indoors use,
insulated in mineral oil, of more than 112.5 kVA or nominal voltage exceeding 35 kV. It has
controlled openings (for access and ventilation) and sealed openings (for entry and exit of conduits
and conductors).
CABLE: Set of wires without insulation among them, braided by means of concentric layers.
SHIELDED CABLE: Cable with a conductive wrapping around the insulation which serves as
electromechanical protection. It is the same armored cable.
PORTABLE POWER CABLE: Extra flexible cable used to connect mobile or stationary mining
equipment to an electric power source.
CALIBRATION: Diagnostic on the operation conditions of a metering equipment and the necessary
adjustments in order to ensure accuracy and precision of measurements generated with such
equipment.
QUALITY: The totality of characteristics of an item that confer aptitude to satisfy explicit and
implicit needs. It is a set of features or attributes such as availability, price, reliability, durability,
safety, continuity, consistency, support, and perception.
LOAD: Electrical power required for the operation of one or more electric pieces of equipment or
the power transported by a circuit.
NORMALIZED LOAD: In reference to electrical fences, it is the load that comprises a non -inductive
resistance of 500 ohms + 2.5 ohms and a variable resistance which is adjusted to maximize the
pulse energy in the resistance.
CHARGEABILITY: Technical limit given in current capacity for energy transport lines, transformers,
etc.
CURRENT CAPACITY: Maximum current that a conductor or piece of equipment can transport
continuously under use conditions without exceeding the nominal service temperature.
NOMINAL CAPACITY: The set of electrical and mechanical features assigned by the designer to a
piece of equipment or electrical system in order to define its operation under specific conditions.
In a system, the nominal capacity is determined by the nominal capacity of the limiting element.
INSTALLED CAPACITY OR INSTALLED POWER: Also known as connected load. It is the sum in kVA
of the loads, both continuous and non-continuous, foreseen for an end-use installation. It is also
the nominal power of generation central, substation, transmission line, or circuit in the
distribution mains.
INSTALLABLE CAPACITY OR INSTALLABLE POWER: Installable capacity is deemed to be the capacity
in kVA that may support the service line connected to the mains nominal voltage without
18
increasing temperature above 60C for installations wit current capacity less than 100 A, or 75C if
the current capacity is greater.
GENERATION CENTRAL OR PLANT: Set of electrical-mechanical equipment duly installed and
energy resources intended to produce electrical power regardless of the procedure employed or
primary energy source used.
ELECTRICAL FENCE: Barrier to prevent the passage of people or animals, forming a circuit of one
or several conductors supported with insulators in conditions such that neither animals nor people
receive hazardous discharges.
CERTIFICATION: Procedure by which an entity issues in written or with a seal of conformity that a
product, a process, or a service complies with a technical regulation or manufacture standard(s).
FULL CERTIFICATION: Certification process of the compliance with requirements established in the
TREI for an electrical installation which consists of the statement of compliance signed by a
competent professional responsible for the construction of the installation accompanied by the
endorsement of compliance through an inspection opinion, prior performance of the verification
inspection carried out by inspector(s) of a duly accredited inspection body.
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY: Document issued in accordance with the rules of a certification
system. The document allows reasonable reliance that a product, process, or service conforms to a
technical regulation, a standard, a technical specification, or other specific regulatory document.
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT : Closed loop formed by a set of elements, devices, and electric equipment fed
by the same energy source and with the same protection against overvoltage and over-current.
Internal wiring of equipment is not taken as circuits. They may be of differential mode (by active
conductors) or common mode (by active and grounding conductors).
PLUG: Device that establishes an electric connection, by means of insertion in an outlet, between
the conductors of a flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the outlet.
TECHNICAL STANDARDIZATION COMMITTEE: Group of people with different interests on a subject
who meet regularly and voluntarily in order to identify needs, analyze documents, and prepare
technical standards.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY: The capability of a piece of equipment or system to operate
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without being affected nor affecting other pieces
of equipment by radiated or conduced electromagnetic energy.
LOCK OUT: Locking a breaker by means of a padlock or a tag.
UNSAFE CONDITION: Potentially risky circumstance that is present in the work environment.
ACTIVE CONDUCTOR: Piece intended to the transmission of electricity in its normal operation
condition, therefore subject to tension in normal service.
ENERGIZED CONDUCTOR: Any conductor which is not grounded.
NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR: Active conductor intentionally connected to the neutral point of a
transformer or installation which contributes to close a circuit of current.
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR: Also called grounding electrode connector; it is the one that connects
an electric system or circuit intentionally to a grounding strap.
EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING: Electric connection between two or more points in such a way that
any passing current does not generate a sensible difference of potential between both points.
RELIABILITY: Capability of a device, piece of equipment, or system to comply with a required
function under certain conditions and a given time. It corresponds to dependability.
CONFORMITY: Compliance of a product, process, or service with regards to one or several
requirements or prescriptions.
CONSENSUS: General agreement characterized by not having sustained opposition to essential
issues from any party involved in the process. It considers the opinions of all of the parties and
reconciles divergent positions within the framework of the common good and general interest.
19
RECORDING: Set of operations intended to open, lock out, and formalize the intervention on a
circuit.
DIRECT CONTACT: Contact of people or animals with active conductors or energized pieces of an
electrical installation.
ELECTRIC CONTACT: Action of linking two elements in order to close a circuit. A contact may be by
rubbing, roller, liquid, or pressure.
INDIRECT CONTACT: Contact of people or animals with elements or conductive pieces that are not
energized normally but they may be energized due to failure conditions in the insulations.
POLLUTION: Artificial release of substances or energy to t he environment which may cause
adverse effects on human beings, other living organisms, equipment, or the environment.
CONTRACTOR: Individual or legal person who responds to the owner of a work in order to carry
out activities of consulting, technical auditing, design, supervision, construction, operation,
maintenance, or other activities related to electrical installations and associated equipment
covered by this Regulation.
QUALITY CONTROL: Regulation process by which the actual quality of a product or service is
measured and controlled.
ELECTRIC FENCE CONTROLLER: Device designed to supply high voltage pulses periodically to a
fence connected to it.
ELECTRIC CURRENT: Movement of electric charges between two points that are not on the same
potential since one of them has excess protons with regards to the other.
CONTACT CURRENT: current that circulates through the human body when subject to a contact
tension.
CORROSION: Attack on a material and the progressive destruction thereof by means of chemical,
electrochemical, or bacterial action.
SHORT-CIRCUIT: Very low resistance link between two or more points of different potential in the
same circuit.
ELECTRICAL ROOM: Room or space in a building exclusively dedicated to electrical equipment and
devices such as transformers, cells, switchboards, UPS, protections, meters, conduits, and media
for control systems, among others. Some buildings because of their size must have a main
electrical room and other ancillary rooms.
DAMAGE: Material consequence of an accident.
DISASTER: Catastrophic sudden situation which affects a large number of people.
DISRUPTIVE DISCHARGE: Insulation failure under electric stress due to excess on certain voltage
level that causes a current to circulate. Applies to breakage of dielectric material in solids, liquids,
or gases and the combination thereof.
NEGLECT: Forgetfulness or inattention with regards to any rule of work.
INSPECTION OPINION: Document issued by the Inspection Body by which there is evidence of
compliance or non compliance of the requirements set forth in the TREI applicable to an electrical
installation. When the opinion proves compliance with the regulation it is considered a
certification of inspection.
DIELECTRIC: See insulator.
AVAILABILITY: Certainty that a piece of equipment or system is operable in a given time. Quality
to operate normally.
DEAD MAN CONTROL DEVICE: Device designed to stop a piece of equipment when the operator
releases it with a hand or foot.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE: Device designed to limit transient overvoltage and to conduct
impulse currents. It contains at least one non-lineal element.
20
VOLTAGE SWITCHING TYPE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE: An SPD that has high impedance when a
surge is not present but which suddenly changes its impedance to a low value in response to
transient voltage. Some examples of these devices are spark gaps, gas tubes, thyristors, and triacs.
VOLTAGE LIMITING TYPE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE: An SPD that has high impedance when a
surge is not present but is reduced gradually with the increase of current and transient voltage.
Some examples of these devices are varistors and suppression diodes.
DISTANCE TO CHASSIS GROUND: Minimum distance under specified conditions between a piece
under tension and all the structure that has the same potential of grounding.
DISTANCE TO SOIL: Minimum distance under conditions already specified between a conductor
under tension and the terrain.
SAFETY DISTANCE: Minimum distance around an electrical equipment or energized conductors,
necessary to ensure there will not be an accident by closeness of people, animals, structures,
buildings, or other pieces of equipment.
ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION: Transfer of electric power to the consumers within a specific
area.
DOUBLE INSULATION: Insulation comprised of a basic insulation and a supplementary one.
BUILDING OR CONSTRUCTION: Fixed structure made with resistant materials for human housing
or other uses.
HIGH-RISE BUILDING: Building that exceeds 28 meters height, measured from the level where a
fire truck may have access, as per the Seismic-Resistance Code.
ELECTRIDITY: (1) The set of disciplines that study electric phenomena. (2) A source o f energy
obtained from the product of electric power consumed times the service period.
STATIC ELECTRICITY: (1) A form of electric energy. (2) The study of electric charges at rest.
ELECTRIC: item that has or operates with electricity.
ELECTRIFY: Produce or communicate electricity in a body.
ELECTROCUTION: Passage of electric current through the human body whose consequence is
death.
GROUNDING ELECTRODE: Conductor or set of earthed conductors that help establish a bonding to
the soil.
ELECTRONICS: Part of electricity which manages the fundamental techniques in the use of electron
beams in the void, in gases, or in semiconductors.
ELECTROTECHNOLOGY: Study of technical applications of electricity.
EMERGENCY: Situation that arises from an accidental event which requires to suspend all work in
order to address it.
SPLICE: Electrical connection intended to join two parts of conductors in order to ensure electrical
and mechanical continuity.
COMPANY: Economic unit represented as an integral system with human, information, financial,
and technical resources that produces goods or services and generates profit.
ASSAY: Set of tests and controls to which a product is subject in order to ensure it complies with
standards and can perform the required function.
MOBILE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT: Equipment designed to be energized while it moves.
MOVABLE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT: Equipment fed by a trailing cable, designed to be moved only
when it is de-energized.
LIFE SUPPORT ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT: Electric equipment whose continuous operation is
indispensable to maintain the life of a patient.
21
EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING: It is the process, practice, or action to bond conductive pieces of the
installations, equipment, or systems to each other or to a grounding system by means of a low
impedance, so that the difference of potential is minimal among the interconnected points.
ERROR: Misguided or wrong action or status, prone to cause breakdown or accident.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: Document that establishes a product or service minimum technical
characteristics.
STRUCTURE: Everything that may be constructed or built, fixed or mobile, in the air, on the
ground, underground, or in water.
CONFORMITY ASSESSMENT: Procedure used directly or indirectly to determine that the pertinent
requirements or prescriptions of technical regulations or standards.
EVENT: A manifestation or situation caused by natural, technical, or social phenomena that may
cause an emergency.
EXPLOSION: Rapid and violent expansion of a gaseous mass which generates a pressure wave that
may affect its surroundings.
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE: Any exposure of workers to a risk or pollutant occurred during the
work day.
EXOSED: when the term is applied to energized parts, it means they can be touched inadvertently
by a person directly or by means of a conductive element, or that allows to approach closer than
the minimum safety distance. Similarly, it applies to the pieces that are not properly separate d,
insulated, or protected against damages (either generating or receiving them).
EXTENSION: Set comprised of power outlet, cables, and plugs, without exposed conductors and
splices, used in a provisional basis.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER: Stand-alone device that contains an agent used to put down fires by
suppressing oxygen.
ONE OF A KIND MANUFACTURE: It is understood as the manufacture of a single product or the
products necessary for a machine or special piece of equipment, without repeating the
manufacture of such product for other applications using the same designs.4
RISK FACTOR: Environmental or human condition whose presence or modification may produce
an accident or occupational disease.
FAILURE: Degradation of components. Intentional or unintentional alteration of the capability of a
system, component, or person to comply with a required function.
PHASE: Designation of a conductor, a group of conductors, a terminal, a winding, or any other
element of a multiphase system that is to be energized during normal service.
VENTRICULAR FIBRILLATION: Spontaneous and uncontrolled contraction of the heart muscle
fibers.
SAG: Maximum vertical distance on a span between the conductor and the horizontal straight line
that joins the two anchorage points.
FREQUENCY: Number of periods per second of a wave. It is measured in Hertz or cycles per
second.
DEAD FRONT: Part of an equipment without exposed active pieces, accessible to people.
FIRE: Combination of combustion material, oxygen, and heat. Combustion that takes place under
controlled conditions.
CLASS C FIRE: Fire originated in energized electric equipment.
ENERGY SOURCE: All piece of equipment or system that provides electric power.
4
Definition included by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
22
BACKUP SOURCE: One or more power supply systems (generator sets, storage batteries, UPS,
replacement circuit) whose objective is to provide power during the interruption of normal
electrical service.
FUSE: component whose function is to open, by the fusion of one or more of its components, the
circuit in which it is inserted.
ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION: Process by which electric power is obtained from some other
form of energy.
GENERATOR: Individual or legal entity which produces electric power, which has at least one
generating central or unit. It also means the electric power generation equipment including the
generator sets.
RISK MANAGEMENT: It is the social process of planning, execution, monitoring, and assessment of
policies and permanent actions for knowledge of risk and the promotion of better awareness of it
in order to prevent or avoid its generation, to reduce or control it when it already exists, and to be
prepared to manage disaster situations as well as for the later recovery, understand ing this as
rehabilitation and reconstruction. These actions have the explicit purpose of contributing to
safety, well-being, quality of life of people, and sustainable development.
ILLUMINANCE: It is the total luminous flux incident on a surface. Its un it, the lux, is equal to the
luminous flux of one lumen incident homogenously on a surface with an area of one square meter.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT: Action or activity that produces an alteration, either favorable or
unfavorable in the environment or in any of its components.
INABILITY: Lack of skill to develop a task.
BLAZE: Any incontrollable fire.
INDUCTION: Phenomenon in which an energized body transmits by means of its electric or

magnetic field energy to other body, despite being separated by a dielectric.
FLAMMABLE: Material that may ignite and burn rapidly.
IMMUNITY: The capability of a piece of equipment or system to operate correctly without
degrading in the presence of an electromagnetic disturbance.
INSPECTION: Set of activities such as measuring, examining, testing, or comparing with
established requirements one or several characteristics of a product or electrical installation in
order to determine its conformity.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION: Set of electrical devices, conductors, and associated circuits intended
for a particular end: generation, transmission, transforming, conversion, distribution, or final use
of electric power. For the purposes of this Regulation, the latter shall be considered a finished
product.
HOME ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION: Electrical installation of final use in housing units, small
businesses, small industries, or small shops, as well as in offices where an individual stays
overnight or during one work day or more time. In some excerpts of the Regulation it is
summarized as home installation or similar, referring to this same definition.5
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION EXPANSION: The one that implies request for increase of installed
capacity or the setup of additional devices, pieces of equipment, conductors, and other
components.
NEW ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION: Every installation constructed after May 1 st, 2005, effective date
of Resolution 180398 of April 7, 2004 under which the TREI was issued.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION RENOVATION: The replacement of devices, pieces of equipment,
conductors, and other components of the electrical installation.
5
Definition included by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
23
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: Set of phenomena associated to electromagnetic

disturbances that may produce degradation in the conditions and operation features of a piece of
equipment or system.
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER: Device designed to automatically open the circuit when a
predetermined over-current occurs.
GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER: Differential interrupter activated by leakage currents whose
function is to interrupt the current to the load when a determined value is exceeded for the
carrying capacity of people.
GENERAL USE INTERRUPTER: Device to open and close, or to switch the connection of a circuit,
designed to be operated manually. It performs control functions, not protection ones.
METROLOGY LABORATORY: Laboratory which has the necessary competence and qualifications to
determine the fitness or operation of metering equipment.
TESTS AND ASSAYS LABORATORY: Domestic, foreign or international laboratory which has the
necessary competence and qualifications to carry out in general manner the determination of
characteristics, fitness or operation of materials or products.
INJURY: Physiological harm suffered by a person.
SAFE APPROACH LIMIT: It is the minimum distance, from the most accessible energized point in a
piece of equipment up to which non qualified personnel may stand without risk of exposure to
electric arc.
RESTRICTED APPROACH LIMIT: It is the minimum distance up to which a competent professional
may stand without carrying personal protective elements certified against risk for electric arc.
TECHNICAL APPROACH LIMIT: It is the minimum distance in which only competent personnel
carrying certified personal protective elements against electric arc perform works in the direct
influence zone of the energized parts of a device.
COMPACT LINE: An electrical line whose dimensions, height and width of structure, and width of
easements are reduced with regards to conventional lines, thanks to an optimized design and
construction.
ELECTRICAL LINE: Set composed of conductors, insulators, structures, and fittings intended for the
transport of electric power.
TRANSMISSION LINE: A system of conductors and its fittings for the transport of electric power
from a generating plant or from one substation to another. An equivalent theoretical circuit that
represents an energy or communications line.
DEAD LINE: Term applied to a line without voltage or de-energized.
LIVE LINE: Term applied to a line with voltage or energized.
HUMID PLACE OR PREMISES: Interior or exterior places partially protected, subject to a moderate
grade of humidity, whose environmental conditions manifest momentarily or permanently.
WET PLACE OR PREMISES: installation exposed to saturation of water or other liquids either
temporarily or during long periods of time. Outdoor electrical installations must be considered as
wet premises, as well as the area for care of patients which is subject normally to exposure of
liquids while the patients are present. Routine cleaning procedures or accidental spill of liquids are
not included.
HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) PLACE: That area where gases or flammable gases are present or may
be present, as well as combustible powders or easily ignited volatile particles (lint).
MANEUVER: Set of procedures in order to operate an main in safe manner.
MAINTENANCE: Set of actions or procedures in order to preserve or reestablish an asset to such
condition that it allows to ensure maximum reliability.
MACHINE: Set of mechanisms activated by a form of energy in order to transform it into another
more appropriate to a given effect.
24
GROUND: Set of metal parts of an equipment which under normal conditions are insulated from
the active parts and is taken as reference for signals and voltages of an electronic circuit. They can
be either connected or not to earth.
MATERIAL: Any substance, consumable, piece, or spare part that is transformed with its first use
or is incorporated to an asset as part thereof.
INSULATING MATERIAL: Material that prevents the propagation of some physical phenomenon
(electric insulator: dielectric material employed to prevent the passage of electric currents.
Thermal insulator: material that prevents the passage of heat).
ELECTROGEOMETRIC METHOD: procedure that allows to establish what is the coverage volume of
protection against lightning of a structure for a given current, according to the position and height
of the structure considered as lightning arrester.
METROLOGY: Science of measuring. It includes theoretical and practical aspects.
MODEL: Mathematical procedure that allows to simulate the evolution of variables and properties
of a system during the development of a physical or chemical phenomenon. Abstract
representation of a system.
INSULATION MONITOR: Device or set of devices that monitors the balanced or unbalanced
impedance of each phase in an insulated grounding circuit, equipped with a test circuit that
activates an alarm when the leakage current exceeds the reference value without tripping the
circuit.
GROUND CONDUCTOR MONITOR: Action of verifying the continuity of t he installations ground
conductor.
APPARENT DEATH OR CLINICAL DEATH: Condition that appears when a person ceases to breathe
or the heart does not pump blood anymore.
DEAD: Lifeless being. Also applied to a device buried in the floor, whose purpose is to serve as a
fixed anchorage point.
ELECTRICAL NECROSIS: Type of burn with death of tissues.
RISK LEVEL: Equivalent to degree of risk. It is the result of the joint assessment of the probability
of occurrence of accidents, the severity of their effects, and the vulnerability of the medium.
NODE: Part of a circuit in which one or more elements have a common bonding.
NOMINAL: Term applied to an operation characteristic; it indicates the design limits of such
characteristics for which it has the best operating conditions. Limits are always associated to a
technical standard.
SAFETY STANDARD: Every action intended to avoid an accident.
TECHNICAL STANDARD: Document approved by a well-known institution which envisages for a
common and repeated use, the rules, guidelines, or characteristics for the products or processes
and associated production methods, services or processes whose observance is not mandatory.
HARMONIZED TECHNICAL STANDARD: Document approved by Standardization bodies of different
countries which establishes on the same purpose the interchangeability of products, processes,
and services, or the mutual agreement about assays results, or about information provided in
accordance with those standards.
COLOMBIAN TECHNICAL STANDARD (NTC, Spanish acronym): Technical standard approved or
adopted as such by the national Standardization body.
FOREIGN TECHNICAL STANDARD: Standard taken in a country as direct or indirect reference, but
that was issued by another country.
INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL STANDARD: Document issued by an international Standardization
organization which is available to the public.
NORMALIZE: Establish an order in a specific activity.
25
LEGITIMATE OBJECTIVES: Among others, the guarantee and safety of human, animal, and
vegetable life and health, their environment, and the prevention of practices that may induce the
consumers to err including issues related to the identification of goods and services, considering
among other aspects when it corresponds to fundamental factors associated to weather,
geography, technology, infrastructure, or scientific justification.
GRID OPERATOR: Public utilities company in charge of planning, expansion and investments,
operation and maintenance of the whole or part of a Regional Transmission System or a Local
Distribution System.
ACCREDITATION BODY: Entity which accredits and supervises certification and inspection bodies,
test, assays, and metrology laboratories which are part of the National Quality Subsystem.
CERTIFICATION BODY: Unbiased entity of public or private nature, domestic, foreign or
international, which has the necessary competence and reliability to manage a certification system
consulting the general interests.
INSPECTION BODY: Entity that executes activities intended to measure, test, or compare against a
reference pattern or document a process, a product, an installation, or an organization and weight
the results against some specified requirements.
NATIONAL STANDARDIZATION BODY: Entity recognized by the national government whose main
function is the preparation, adoption, and publication of national technical standards and the
adoption of standards prepared by other entities.
LIGHTNING ROD: Corrosion-resistant metallic element whose function is to intercept lightning
that may strike directly on the installation to protect. Technically it is known as lightning arrestor.
PATTERN: Materialized measure, measuring device, or measuring system intended to define,
perform, preserve, or reproduce a unit or one or several known values of a magnitude in order to
transmit them for comparison to other metering instruments.
PCB: Polychlorinated biphenyl. Chlorobiphenyls with molecular formula C12H10-nCln where n is
greater than 1. Commonly known as Askarel.
HAZARD: Uncontrolled condition that has the potential of causing injuries to people, damages to
facilities, or harm to the environment.
IMMNINENT DANGER: For the purposes of interpretation and application of the TREI, high hazard
shall be equivalent to imminent danger, understood as the condition of the environment or
irregular practice whose expected frequency and severity of effects may compromise the human
body physiologically in a severe manner (burns, impacts, cardiac arrest, respiratory arrest,
fibrillation, or loss of functions), or affect the environment of the electrical installation
(contamination, fire, or explosion). In general it may occur due to:
Deficiencies in the electrical installation.

Undue practices of electro technology.
SMALL BUSINESS OR INDUSTRY: For the purposes of this regulation, a small business shall be
understood as the one that has an installable capacity less than 10 kVA and an area not exceeding
50 m2, and small industry is the one with an installable capacity of less than 20 kVA.
WARNED PERSON: Person sufficiently informed and supervised by qualified persons who allow
preventing the risks that may generate by developing an activity related to electricity.
QUALIFIED PERSON: Individual that proves its background (training and learning) in electro
technology and risks associated to electricity.
AUTHORIZED PERSON: Qualified professional, authorized by the owner or holder of the
installation to carry out certain works with electrical risk, based on his/her knowledge, who does
not have physical or mental disabilities than may put his health or others at risk.
LEGAL PERSON: According to article 633 of the Civil Code, a legal person is a fictional person
capable of exercising rights and to contract civil obligations, and be represented judicially and
26
extra judicially. It is a subject susceptible to acquire and exercise rights and to accept and comply
with obligations either on its own or through a representative.
NATURAL PERSON: According to article 74 of the Colombian Civil Code, a natural person is any
individual of the human species, whichever age, gender, race, or social condition.
ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCE: Any electromagnetic phenomenon that may degrade the
performance characteristics of a piece of equipment or system.
CONDUCTIVE FLOORING: Arrangement of conductive material that serves as electric connection
medium between people and objects in order to prevent the accumulation of electrostatic
charges.
ELECTRIC DRAWING: Graphic representation of the design features and specifications for the
construction or assembly of equipment and electrical works.
PRECAUTION: Prudent attitude in order to avoid or prevent damages that may occur when
executing an action.
PREVENTION: Predictive assessment of risks and their consequences. Prior knowledge to control
risks. Actions to eliminate the probability of an accident.
FORECAST: Anticipation and adoption of measures in the likely occurrence of an event based on
observed indications and experience.
FIRST AID: Al immediate and appropriate yet provisional care given to someone in an acci dent or
suddenly ill in order to preserve his/her life.
TRANSFORMATION PROCESS: Process in which the parameters of electrical power are modified by
the equipment in a substation.
PRODUCT: Any good or service. Any good, either in natural status or manufac tured, even if it has
been incorporated in another product.
MANUFACTURER: Whoever design, produces, manufactures, assembles, or imports products in a
habitual manner, either directly or indirectly. Besides, it is also considered a manufacturer
whoever designs, produces, manufactures, assembles, or imports products subject to a technical
regulation or sanitary or phytosanitary measure.
PROFESSION: Employment, ability or occupation that a person has and exercises with a right to
retribution.
QUALIFIED PROFESSIONAL: Natural person (technician, technologist, or engineer trained in the
field of electro technology) who besides of complying with the requirements of qualified person
has a current professional registration, and under the legal regulations, is authorized or accredited
for the exercise of the profession and has acquired knowledge and skills to develop activities in
this field.
FIRE DOOR: A door that complies with the requirements of stability, tightness, non -emission of
flammable gases, and thermal insulation when subject to a fire or blaze during certain period of
time.
PORT: Communication interface point between a piece of equipment and its environment.
EARTHING: Group of equipotential conductors in electrical contact with the soil or a metal ground
of common reference which distributes failure electric currents in the soil or ground. It comprises
electrodes, connections, and buried cables.
HOT SPOT: Connection point which is working at a temperature above normal, generating energy
losses and sometimes risk of fire.
NEUTRAL POINT: Node or common point of a multiphase electrical system in a star connection
with the grounded mid-point of a single-phase system.
BURN: Set of tissue disorders caused by prolonged contact with flames or materials with elevated
temperatures.
27
LIGHTNING: The atmospheric discharge commonly known as lightning is a physical phenomenon

characterized by a transfer of electrical charge from a cloud to ground, from ground to a cloud,
between two clouds, within a cloud, of from a cloud to the ionosphere.
RECEIVER: Any piece of equipment or machine that uses electricity for a particular purpose.
DISTRIBUTION MAINS: Set of circuits and substations with their associated equipment intended
for the service of users in a municipality.
TRANSMISSION MAINS: Set of high and extra high voltage lines with their associated eq uipment,
including international interconnections.
EQUIPOTENTIAL MAINS: Set of conductors of the grounding system which are not in contact with
the ground or terrain, which connect electrical systems, pieces of equipment or installations with
the grounding.
INTERNAL OR FINAL USE MAINS: Set of conductors, conduits, and pieces of equipment (fittings,
devices, and artifacts) that take electrical energy from the Grid Operators limit to the final use
points.
TECHNICAL REGULATION: Document that establishes the characteristics of a product, service, or
the production processes or methods including applicable administrative provisions, whose
observance is mandatory.
REQUIREMENT: Precept, condition, or prescription that must be met; that is to say, its compliance
is mandatory.
SAFEGUARD: Means of protection that prevents or makes difficult access of people or their limbs
to a hazardous area.
GROUND RESISTANCE: The relation between the potential of the grounding system to be
measured with regards to a remote earth and the current that flows between these points.
TREI: Acronym for Technical Regulation of Electrical Installations adopted by Colombia.
RISK: Probability that a certain loss occurs in an activity, in a given time.
ELECTROCUTION RISK: Possibility of circulation of a deadly electrical current through a living
being.
SECTION SWITCH: Device intended to make a visible cut in an electrical circuit. It is designed to be
handled after the circuit has been opened by other means.
SAFETY: Condition of a product in which under normal use conditions and considering the
duration, information provided under this code and if applicable the commissioning, installation,
and maintenance, does not pose unreasonable risks to the health or integrity of the consumers. In
case that the product does not meet the safety requirements established in the technical
regulations or sanitary measures, it shall be deemed unsafe. (2) Condition or status of acceptable
risk.
SIGNALLING: Set of actions and means provided in order to reflect safety warnings in an
installation.
SERVICE: The performance of works made professionally or in public manner, whether for
payment or not, provided that the direct purpose is not the manufacturing of goods.
PUBLIC SERVICE: Organized activity which satisfies a collective need on a regular and continuous
basis in accordance with a special legal regime, either provided by the State directly or by private
entities.
DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL POWER UTILITY: Transport of electrical power from the regional
transmission mains up to the end-users home, including its connection and metering.
SYMBOL: Image or sign that describes a unit, magnitude or determined situation, which is used as
a conventional form of collective understanding.
SYSTEM: Set of interrelated and interacting components to carry out a joint task. It admits certain
input elements and produces certain output elements in an organized process.
28
EMERGENCY SYSTEM: A power and control system intended to provide backup energy to a limited
number of vital functions with the aim or ensuring safety and protection of human life.
ISOLATED POWER SYSTEM (IT): A system with neutral point isolated from earth or connected to it
through an impedance. It has a transformer and an insulatio n monitor. It is used especially in
medical attention centers, mines, ships, vehicles, railroads, and electric power plants.
GROUNDING SYSTEM: Set of continuous conductive elements of a specific electrical system
without interruptions that connect electrical equipment to the soil or to a metal ground. It
comprises the ground connection and the equipotential grid of cables that normally do not
conduce current.
PROTECTION GROUNDING SYSTEM: Set of connection, enclosure, conduits, cables, and plug that
are coupled to an electric equipment in order to avoid electrocutions by accidental contact with
energized metal pieces.
SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM: The one that belongs to the current circuit; it works both for
normal operation conditions and fail mode conditions.
TEMPORARY GROUNDING SYSTEM: Personal protective grounding equipment for personnel
working on de-energized grids.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS): System designed to provide electricity in automatic
manner when the normal power source does not provide electricity.
OVERLOAD: Operation of an element exceeding its nominal capacity.
OVERVOLTAGE: Abnormal voltage existing between two points of an electrical installation,
exceeding the maximum normal operation tension of a device, piece of equipment or system.
SUBSTATION: Set of installations, electrical equipment, and complementary works intended to the
transfer of electrical power by means of power transforming.
SUSCEPTIBILITY: Sensitivity of a device, piece of equipment or system to operate without
degrading in the presence of an electromagnetic disturbance.
SWITCHBOARD: Metallic or non-metallic enclosure where elements are housed such as breaking,
measuring, control and protection devices as well as bus bars. For the purpose of this regulation, it
is equivalent to panel, cabinet or board.
TECHNIQUE: Set of procedures and resources derived from practical applications of one or more
scientific disciplines.
VOLTAGE: The difference of electric potential between two conductors that make elect rons flow
through a resistance. Voltage is a magnitude whose unit is the Volt.
LINE-TO-EARTH VOLTAGE: For grounded circuits, the voltage between a given conductor and the
conductor of the grounded circuit or to earth; for circuits not grounded, the greate r voltage
between a given conductor and another conductor of the circuit.
TOUCH VOLTAGE: Difference of potential that occurs during a failure between a grounded
metallic structure and an point on the surface of terrain at a distance of one meter. This
horizontal distance is equivalent to an arms stretch.
STEP VOLTAGE: Difference of potential that occurs during a failure between a two points on the
surface of terrain separated by the distance of one step (approximately one meter).
SERVICE VOLTAGE: Voltage value under normal conditions, in a given instant, and in a node of the
system. It may be estimated, expected, or measured.
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE FOR A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT: Maximum voltage for which a piece of
equipment is specified without exceeding the safety margin, with regards to its insulation or other
characteristics.
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF A SYSTEM: Maximum voltage value at a point of an electrical system
during a period of time, under normal operation conditions.
29
NOMINAL VOLTAGE: Conventional value of voltage with which a system, installation or piece of
equipment is designated and for which its operation and insulation have been projected. For the
case of three-phase systems, the voltage among the phases is considered as such.
TRANSFERRED VOLTAGE: It is a special case of touch voltage where a potential is conducted to a
remote point with regards to the substation or grounding.
TETANIZATION: Muscle rigidity caused by the passage of an electrical current.
EARTH (or GROUND): For electrical systems, it is a term that generalizes everything related to
grounding. In electrical issues, it is associated to ground, terrain, earth, chassis, frame, carcass,
structure, or water piping. The term chassis ground should only be used for those cases where it
is not the earth, such as in airplanes, ships, and automobiles.
REDUNDANT EARTHING: Special connection of grounding connectors for power outlets and fixed
electrical equipment in areas of patient care, which connect both the metallic piping and the
insulated grounding conductor in order to ensure the protection of patients against leakage
currents.
POWER OUTLET: Device with female contacts designed for fixed installation in a structure or part
of equipment whose purpose is to establish an electrical connection with the plug.
TOXICITY: Poisonous effect produced by a period of exposure to gases, fume s, or vapors which
may lead to physiological damage or death.
WORK: Vital, social, and rational activity of human beings oriented towards a purpose and a
means for full realization.
WORKS ON VOLTAGE: Work methods in which an operator enters in contact with energized
elements or goes into an area of direct influence of the electromagnetic field, either with one part
of his body or with tools, equipment, or devices being handled.
TRANSFORMATION: Process by which the voltage and current parameters of mains are modified
by means of one or more transformers which secondary windings are employed in feeding other
substations or transforming centers (includes protection and sectionalizing equipment).
TRANSMISSION: Process by which transfer of large blocks of energy is made from the generation
centrals to the consumption areas.
THRESHOLD: Level of a signal or concentration of a contaminant, commonly accepted as harmless
for human beings.
PERCEPTION THRESHOLD: Minimum value of current from which it is perce ived by 99.5% of
human beings. It is estimated in 1.1 milliamps in alternate current at 60 Hz for men.
REACTION THRESHOLD: Minimum value of current that causes involuntary muscle contraction.
LET-GO THRESHOLD OR LIMIT CURRENT: It is the maximum value of electric current through the
body of a person at which 99.5% of people can release themselves. It is considered as the
maximum safe current and it is estimated in 10 mA for men, in alternate current.
URGENCY: Need of work that arises out of scheduling and is allowed to be carried out when the
ongoing tasks are concluded.
USER: Natural or legal person who benefits from the provision of a public utility, either as owner
of the estate where it is provided, or as direct receiver of the service. The latter is often refer to as
consumer. (2) Every natural or legal person that, as final user, acquires or enjoys a certain product
of whatever nature for fulfillment of a need, whether it is private, domestic, or industrial when it is
not linked intrinsically to its business activity.
SPAN: Horizontal distance between two adjacent supports of a line or grid.
PATIENT CARE VICINITY: A space, within a location intended for the examination and treatment
of patients, extending 1.80 m beyond the normal location of the bed, chair, table, or other device
that supports the patient and vertically to 2.30 m) above the floor.
SERVICE LIFE: time during which a good complies with the function for which it was conceived.
30
VULNERABILITY: Physical, economical, social, environmental, or institutional susceptibility or

fragility that a community has of being affected or of suffering adverse effects i n case that a
hazardous physical event occurs. In electric issues, it is the inability or incapacity of a device, piece
of equipment, or system to operate without degrading in presence of an electromagnetic
disturbance or a change of conditions.
EASEMENT ZONE: Strip of land that is left without obstacles along an electrical power distribution
or transport line, as safety margin for the construction, operation, and maintenance of such line,
as well as having a safe interaction with the surroundings.
SECTION 4. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

For the purposes of this regulation and further information, a list of the abbreviations and
acronyms most commonly used in the Electric Sector is shown below.
STANDARDIZATION BODY
AREA ACRONYM / STANDARD
NAME
ABBREVIATION
Asociacin Espaola de Normalizacin y
SPAIN AENOR UNE
Certificacin
FRANCE AFNOR Association Francaise de Normalisation NF
USA ANSI American National Standards Institute ANSI
ENGLAND BSI British Standards Institution BS
SOUTH Consejo de Armonizacin de Normas Electrotcnicas
CAN
AMERICA Nacionales de Amrica
Comit Europen de Standardization Electro-
EUROPE CENELEC technique
EN
THE AMERICAS COPANT Comisin Panamericana de Normas Tcnicas COPANT
Instituto Colombiano de Normas Tcnicas y
COLOMBIA ICONTEC Certificacin
NTC
INTERNATIONAL IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEC
INTERNATIONAL ISO International Organization for Standardization ISO
Unin Internacional de Telecomunicaciones-
INTERNATIONAL UIT - ITU International Telecommunication Union
UIT
GERMANY DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung
Table 4.1. Standardization Bodies
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS OF COMMON USE

AAC All Aluminum Conductor
AAAC All Aluminum Alloy Conductor
ACSR Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating companies
ASTM American Association for Testing and Materials
AT High Voltage (Spanish acronym)
BT Low Voltage (Spanish acronym)
CEI Comitato Electrotecnico Italiano
CIGRE Conseil International des Grands Rseaux Electriques
CREG (Spanish acronym for Energy and Gas Regulatory Commission)
DPS Spanish acronym for Surge Protective Device
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards
GPR Ground Potential Rise
IACS International Annealed copper Standard
ICNIRP International Commission of Non Ionizing Radiation Protection
ICS International Classification for Standards
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IQNET International Certification Network
MT Medium voltage (Spanish Acronym)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NTC Spanish acronym for Colombian Technical Standard
WTO World Trade Organization
31
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

SDL Local distribution system
SIC Superintendence of Industry and Commerce
SPT Grounding system
SSPD Superintendence of Domestic Utilities
STN National Transmission System
STR Regional Transmission System
TBT Technical Barriers to Trade Agreement
TW Thermoplastic Wet
THW Thermoplastic heat Wet
THHN Thermoplastic High Heat Nylon
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
XLPE Cross Linked Polyethylene
AC Alternate current
DC Direct current
cmil Circular mil
rms Root mean square
t.c. Current transformer
t.t Voltage transformer
Table 4.2. Acronyms and abbreviations of common use.
SECTION 5. UNITS SYSTEM

The International System of Units (SI) must be applied in the installations subject to this
regulation, as approved by Resolution 1823 of 1991 from the Superintendence of Industry and
Commerce. Consequently, the following symbols and names of both magnitudes and units shall be
used in electrical installations.
NAME OF MAGNITUDE SYMBOL OF NAME OF UNIT SYMBOL OF SI
MAGNITUDE UNIT
Admittance Y siemens S
Capacitance C farad F
Electrical charge Q coulomb C
Conductance G siemens S
Conductivity siemens per meter S/m
Electric current I ampere A
2
Current density J ampere per square meter A/m
2
Electric flow density D coulomb per square meter C/m
Magnetic flow density B tesla T
Active energy KWh kilowatt per hour kWh
Power factor FP one 1
Frequency F hertz Hz
Angular frequency radian per second rad/s
Electromotive force E volt V
Illuminance Eu lux lx
Impedance Z ohm
Inductance L henry H
Intensity of electric field E volt per meter V/m
Intensity of field H ampere per meter A/m
Luminous intensity Iv candela cd
Relative permeability r one 1
Relative permittivity r one 1
Active power P watt W
Apparent power Ps volt-ampere VA
Reactive power PQ reactive volt-ampere VAr
Reactance X ohm
Resistance R ohm
Resistivity ohm meter m
Electric potential V volt V
Table 5.1 Symbols of magnitudes and units used in electro technology.
The following rules must be considered for the use of symbols and units:
a. Magnitude must not be confused with unit.

b. The symbol of the unit shall be the same both for singular and plural.
32
c. When the plural of a unit name is to be spelt or pronounced, the rules of grammar shall
apply.
d. Each unit and each prefix have only one symbol and it shall not be changed. Abbreviation s
will not be used.
e. Symbols of units are denoted in lower-case letters, with the exception of ohm ( ) which
has the capital letter omega of the Greek alphabet. Those derived from peoples names
are written in capital letters.
f. The full name of the units must be written in lower-case letters except at the beginning of
a sentence, after a period or full stop, or with the exception of degrees Celsius.
g. Units may only be designated by their full names or by their corresponding symbols
recognized internationally.
h. There is no space left between a prefix and a symbol.
i. The product of symbols is indicated by means of a point (.)
j. No punctuation marks shall be used after the symbols of units, their multiples or
submultiples, except for a grammatical punctuation rule, leaving a space of separation
between the symbol and the punctuation mark.
SECTION 6. SYMBOLISM AND SIGNALLING
6.1 ELECTRIC SYMBOLS

Graphic symbols shown in table 6.1 below are of mandatory application. They are taken from the
unified standards IEC 60617, ANSY Y32, CSA 199 and IEEE 315, which are closely related to
electrical safety. When other symbols are required, they may be taken from the aforementioned
standards.
33
Table 6.1. Main graphic symbols

When for technical reasons installations may not follow these symbols, a written justification must
be signed by the professional who under the law is responsible for the design. Said document shall
be accompanied by the inspection opinion recorded in the installation.
6.1.1 ELECTRICAL RISK SYMBOL
Where needed, the electrical risk symbol for safety signaling must preserve the dimension ratios
as per the table below, adopted from IEC 60417-1. Tolerances of + 10% of values indicated may be
allowed.
Table 6.2. Dimension ratios of the electrical risk symbol Figure 6.1. Electrical risk symbol
6.2 SAFETY SIGNALLING

6.2.1 PURPOSE.
The purpose of safety signals is to convey messages for prevention, prohibition, or information
in a clear and precise form, easily to understand for everybody in an area where electrical
works are being performed or in operation areas of machines, pieces of equipment, or
installations that entail a potential hazard. Safety signals do not eliminate themselves the
hazard but they provide warnings or guidelines which allow to apply the necessary measures
for prevention of accidents.
For the purposes of this Regulation, the signaling requirements listed below are of mandatory
application and the installation owner shall be responsible for their use. The requirements are
taken from the IEC 60617, NTC 1461, ISO 3461, ANSI Z535 and ISO 3864-2 standards. They shall
be written in Spanish language and they must be located on visible places which allow to meet
their purpose.
The use of risk signals adopted in this regulation shall be of mandatory compliance, unless a
regulation of higher legal hierarchy demands something different. In such case, the companies
shall provide the reason for not using them.
34
6.2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF SAFETY SIGNS
Safety signs are categorized by their type into warning or precaution, prohibition, obligation,
information, rescue or relief. The signs must apply the geometric forms and the colors shown on
table 6.3 below.
Dimensions of signs must allow to see and grasp the message at reasonable distances from the
element or area subject to risk. The following ratios must be used in order to compensate the
differences among triangular, round, rectangular, or square shapes and to ensure that all of the
symbols seem relatively similar in size when seen from a certain distance:
Base of equilateral triangle: 100%
Circle diameter: 80%
Square or rectangle height: 75%
Rectangle width: 120%
Type of Geometric Color

safety signal form Pictogram Background Edge Band
Warning or
Triangular Black Yellow Black -
precaution
Prohibition Round Black White Red Red
White
Obligation Round White Blue -
blue
Firefighting Rectangular
White Red - -
information or square
Rescue or Rectangular White
White Green -
relief or square Green
Table 6.3. Classification and colors for safety signs

The following are the typical dimensions of the triangle base: 25, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, and 900
mm.
Table 6.4 shows some of the main safety signs, their corresponding use, and description of the
pictogram.
USE PICTOGRAM DESCRIPTION SIGNAL
First aid kit Greek cross 1. Green or
black.
2. White
3. green
Meaning: First
aid station
Flammable materials Flame
or high temperatures
Toxic materials Skull with two shin bones

crossed
Corrosive materials Decayed hand
Radioactive materials A conventional clover-like shape
Electrical risk Lightning or arc
Mandatory use of foot Boots with symbol of electrical

protection risk
Entrance forbidden Walking human figure, with a

transversal line over imposed
35
Mandatory use of Head of a person wearing

head protection helmet
Mandatory use of eye Head of person wearing goggles

protection
Mandatory use of Head of person wearing

hearing protection earmuffs
Mandatory use of Glove

hand protection
Table 6.4 Main safety signs.
6.3 COLOR CODING FOR CONDUCTORS

Color codes for insulated power conductors as set forth in tables 6.5 and 6.6 below must be
followed with the aim of avoiding accidents due to the wrong interpretation of the voltage level
and type of system used, as applicable. In order to determine this requirement, the color that
shall be considered as valid is the one pertaining to the exterior finishing of the conductor or a
clear marking with paint, tape, or adhesive labels of the respective color on the visible parts. This
requirement also applies to bare conductors which act as bus bars in indoor installations and not
for conductors other than the service line used outdoors.
AC system 1 1 3 3 3- 3Y 3Y 3 3 3Y
Nominal More More
240/208
tension 120 240/120 208/120 240 380/220 480/277 480-440 than 100 than 100
/120
(volts) V V
Active 1-phase 2-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
3-phase 3-phase
conductor 2-wire 3-wire 4-wire 3-wire 4-wire 4-wire 4-wire 3-wire
Phase Phase Yellow Black Black Brown Brown Brown Purple Yellow
Phase color or color or Blue Blue Orange Black Orange Orange Brown Purple
black 1 black red Red Blue yellow Yellow Yellow Red Red
Does Does Does Does
White
Neutral White White White not White White not not not
or gray
apply apply apply apply
Does
Protection Bare or Bare or Bare or Bare or Bare or Bare or Bare or Bare or Bare or
not
grounding green green green green green green green green green
apply
Green Green Green Green Green
Does Does Does Does Does
Insulated or or or or or
not not not not not
earth green- green- green- green- green-
apply apply apply apply apply
yellow yellow yellow yellow yellow
Table 6.5 Color coding for AC conductors
DC System With mid conductor Without mid conductor

TN-S TN-C & T-T TN-S TN-C & T-T
Positive conductor Red Red Red Red
Negative conductor Blue Blue white white
Mid conductor white white Does not Does not
apply apply
Grounding protection Green or green- Does not Green or green- Does not
yellow apply yellow apply
6
Table 6.6 Color coding for DC conductors.
In systems with voltage exceeding 380 V, besides the colors, a label with a warning about the
corresponding voltage level must be affixed to switchboards and conductors accessible points.
In single-phase circuits derived from three-phase systems, the phase conductor must be labeled
with the color assigned to the phase in the three-phase system. Similar treatment must be given
to single phase systems derived from 2-phase ones. If the service line is single-phase derived from
a three-phase system, one phase can also be identified with black.
6
Table 6.6 amended by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
36
In all cases the neutral conductor must be either white or marked with white color in all visible
parts, and the grounding protection shall be green or marked with a green strip. Neither white nor
green shall be used for the phases.
Switchboards from overseas to be used in Colombia shall also be labeled in accordance with the
colors set forth in the TREI.
In metering systems, the connection of transformers wiring both for potential and current must
match the color of the associated phase.
SECTION 7. COMMUNICATIONS FOR COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORKS
Each maneuver or work performed on a line, grid, or energized piece of equipment, likely to be
energized, must be coordinated with the person(s) in charge of their energizing.
Any worker who receives a verbal message with regards to maneuvers for connection or
disconnection of lines or equipment must repeat it immediately to the sender and obtain his
approval. An authorized worker who sends a verbal message must be sure of the identity of his
interlocutor.
Every public utilities company shall have a communications system with approved protocols which
ensure the greatest safety and reliability. In case that the company does not have a safe
communications system for the execution of maneuvers via radio, it must adopt the Q Code.
For the purposes of this regulation and because of the use of radio communications for all kinds of
maneuvers and works coordination, the following service abbreviations are adopted, taken from
the telegraph code or Q Code used since 1912.
ABBREVIATION MEANING ABBREVIATION MEANING
QAB Ask for authorization QRU Do you have any message for
me?
QAP Remain on hearing QRV Prepared for
QAQ Is there any danger? QRX When are you calling back?
QAY Advise when you pass by QSA Strength of signal (1 to 5)
(place)
QBC Meteorological report QSG Messages to be sent
QCB Is causing delay QSI Report to
QCS My reception was interrupted QSL Confirm reception
QDB Send message to QSM Repeat last message
QEF Arrive to parking area QSN Have you listened?
QEN Hold your position QSO I need to communicate
with
QGL May I enter the (area) ? QSR Repeat call
QGM May I leave from? QSY Change to another frequency
QOD Can you communicate with QSR Repeat call
me in?
QOE Have you received the safety QSX Listen to
signal?
QOF QUALITY OF MY SIGNALS QSY CHANGE TO ANOTHER
FREQUENCY
QOT DELAY TIME FOR QTA CANCEL THE MESSAGE
COMMUNICATION
QRA WHO IS CALLING QTH LOCATION OR PLACE
QRB APPROXIMATE DISTANCE QTN DEPARTURE TIME
BETWEEN STATIONS
QRD PLACE YOU ARE BOUND FOR? QTR EXACT TIME
QRE ARRIVAL TIME QTU TIME WHEN YOU ARE ON
THE AIR
QRF RETURN TO A PLACE QTX STATION AVAILABLE TO
COMMUNICATE
QRG EXACT FREQUENCY QTZ ARE YOU CONTINUING THE
SEARCH?
37
QRI HOW IS THE TONE OF MY QUA HAVE YOU NEWS OF?

TRANSMISSION
QRK HOW DO YOU RECEIVE ME? QUB INFORMATION REQUESTED
QRL ARE YOU BUSY? QUD URGENCY SIGNAL
QRM DO YOU HAVE QUE CAN YOU SPEAK IN
INTERFERENCE? (LANGUAGE)?
QRO INCREASE TRANSMITTER QUN MY POSITION IS
POWER
QRP DECREASE TRANSMITTER QUO SHALL I SEARCH FOR?
POWER
QRQ SHALL I SEND FASTER? CQ GENERAL CALL
QRRR EMERGENCY CALL MN MINUTES
QRS SHALL I SEND SLOWER? RPT PLEASE REPEAT
QRT SHALL I STOP SENDING? TKS THANKS
Table 7.1. Q Code
SECTION 8. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAM

For the purposes of this regulation, every company or individual who develops activities related to
the construction, operation, and maintenance of electrical power installations must comply with
the occupational health requirements as set forth in the current Colombian laws and regulations,
particularly resolution number 1348 issued by the Ministry of Social Protection in 2009, or
whichever modifies, adds, or substitutes said resolution. Some of those requirements are
summarized below.
a. Every public, private, contractor and subcontractor employer is under obligation to
organize and ensure the operation of an Occupational Health Program. Compliance
thereof shall be monitored by the competent authority.
b. The Occupational Health Program consists of the planning, organization, execution, and
evaluation of activities with regards to Preventive Medicine, Labor Medicine, Industr ial
Hygiene, and Industrial Safety.
c. Each company must have its own program. In case that a program is developed jointly
with another company, it is understood that each one shall have its specific program, but
may share jointly the resources necessary for its development.
d. Prepare an overview of risks in order to get information around them on the companys
jobsites which enables their location and assessment.
e. Preventive and occupational medicine subprograms have as main purpose the promotion,
prevention and control of the workers health, thus protecting him from occupational risk
factors.
f. Establish and execute the modifications in processes or operations, substitution of

hazardous raw materials, enclosure or isolation of processes, operations or othe r
measures in order to control the risk agents at the origin source or in the environment.
g. Demarcate or limit the work areas, storage zones, and roads, and mark emergency exits,
shelters, and hazardous areas on the machines and the facilities.
h. Setup and develop an emergency plan considering the following aspects:
Preventive aspect
Passive or structural aspect
Active aspect or emergencies control.
Additional to this measures, preventive maintenance programs for machines, equipment, tools,
facilities, lighting, and mains must be drawn up and implemented . Similarly, mains and
38
installations must be inspected periodically, as well as the machinery, pieces of equipment, and
tools used, and in general all of those items that generate risks of electric nature.
39
CHAPTER 2
ESSENTIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The requirements set forth in this chapter are of mandatory application at all voltage levels and in
all processes, and they must be met in accordance with the particular situation in the electrical
installations subject to this regulation.
SECTION 9. ANALYSIS OF RISKS OF ELECTRICAL ORIGIN
In general the use and dependence from electrical power, both on the industry and domestic
applications, has brought the occurrence of accidents due to contact with energized elements or
fires which have augmented due to the increase in the number of installations, mainly for
distribution and ultimate use of electricity. This section of the TREI has as main objective to create
awareness about the risks present in any place where electricity is used or where there are
energized elements.
The final result of the passage of an electrical current through the human body may be predicted
with a high percentage of certainty if certain known risk conditions are taken and there is an
assessment of the grade of influence of all factors converging in an electrical accident. Therefore,
personnel intervening an installation must apply the necessary measures related to the
characteristics of the activity, process or situation so that a risk of electrical origin is not
strengthened.
9.1 ELECTROPATHOLOGY
This discipline studies the effects of potentially hazardous electrical current which may cause
injuries in the body, as well as the type of accidents it provokes. The consequences of the passage
of body through the human body may range from simple discomfort to death, depending on the
type of contact. However, it must be taken into account that, in general, death is not sudden.
Therefore, the TREI has compiled the following basic concepts so people take them into
consideration:
Accidents of electrical origin may be produced by direct contacts (bipolar or phase -to-
phase, phase to neutral, phase to earth), indirect contacts (induction, contact with
energized ground chassis, step voltage, touch voltage, transferred voltage), lightning
strikes, fulguration, explosion, fire, over-current, and overvoltage.
Human beings exposed to electrical risk are classified into Type A and Type B
individuals. Type A is every person who carries electric conductors that end up in invasive
processes in the heart. For this type of patient, it is considered that the maximum safe
current is 80 A. Type B individuals are the ones that are in contact with electrical
equipment and do not carry direct conductors into the heart.
Some studies, mainly by Dalziel, have established levels of current breaking for protection
devices that avoid death by electrocution. (See table 9.1)
TRIP CURRENT 6 mA (rms) 10 mA (rms) 20 mA (rms) 30 mA (rms)

Men 100% 98.5% 7.5% 0%
Women 99.5% 60% 0% 0%
Children 92.5% 7.5% 0% 0%
Biegelmeier established the relation between l 2t (specific energy) and physiological

effects. (See table 9.2)
40
SPECIFIC ENERGY l2t PHYSIOLOGICAL PERCEPTIONS AND REACTIONS

(A2s x 10-6)
4 to 8 Mild sensation in fingers and feet tendons.
10 to 30 Slight muscle rigidity in fingers, wrists, and elbows.
15 to 45 Muscle rigidity in fingers, wrists, elbows, and shoulders. Sensations in
legs.
50 to 80 Muscle rigidity and pain in arms and legs.
70 to 120 Muscle rigidity, pain and burning sensation in arms, shoulders and legs.
Table 9.2 Relation between specific energy and physiological effects
Since tolerance thresholds on human beings such as passage of current (1.1 mA), let-go
reaction (10 mA), and muscle rigidity or fibrillation (25 mA) are very l ow values, exceeding
such values may cause accidents such as death or loss of some limb or body function.
The graph below, taken from NTC 4120, referring to IEC 60749-2 details the effects zones
of alternate current from 15 Hz to 100 Hz.
Figure 9.1 Time/current zones for effects of alternate currents from 15 Hz to 100 Hz.
When a current circulates through the body, three effects always appear to a greater or
lesser extent: nervous, chemical, and calorific.
In each case of electrical discharge, a series of variable factors intervene with random
effect; however, the major ones are: intensity of the current, resistance of the human
body, trajectory, duration of the contact, voltage applied, and frequency of the current.
The passage of current through the body may cause a physiopathology state of shock
which has circulatory and respiratory effects simultaneously.
Ventricular fibrillation consists in the erratic movement of the heart which does not follow
its normal rhythm and ceases to pump blood to other organs.
The ventricular fibrillation threshold depends on both physiological and electrical
parameters, therefore the C1 curve has been taken as a limit for the design of protection
equipment. The threshold values of current in less than 0.2 seconds are o nly applied
during the vulnerable period of the cardiac cycle.
Electrification is a term used to describe accidents with passage of non lethal current.
Electrocution occurs in accidents with passage of current with deadly consequences.
Death may be apparent, immediate, or posterior.
Muscle tetanization is the annulment of the muscle control capability, uncontrolled rigidity
of muscles as consequence of the passage of an electrical current.
Asphyxia occurs when the passage of the current affects the nervou s center which
regulates the respiratory function, thus causing respiratory arrest. It is almost always due
to contraction of the diaphragm.
Burns or electrical necrosis are produced by energy released when the current is passing
(heating due to the Joule effect) or by thermal radiation of an electric arc.
Kidney blockage or paralyzing of the kidneys metabolic action is produced by the toxic
effects of burns or myoglobinuria.
Other side effects may occur such as fractures, conjunctivitis, contractions, bruises,
increase of blood pressure, arrhythmias, respiratory failures, dull pains, temporary heart
arrest, etc.
The human body is a good conductor of electricity. For the purposes of calculations,
resistance has been standardized to 1000 . It is measured experimentally between both
41
hands immersed in saline solution holding two electrodes and a copper plate on which the
person stands. In deeper studies, the human body has been analyzed as impedances (Z)
which vary under diverse conditions (see Figure 9.2). Organs such as the skin, muscles,
etc., have an impedance composed of resistive and capacitive elements.
The conditions with regards to the

grade of humidity and associated
safety voltage are:
- Perfectly dry skin (exceptional):
80 V
- Moist skin (normal) in dry
environment: 50 V
- Wet skin (more normal) in very
humid environments: 24 V
- Skin immersed in water (special
cases): 12 V
Figure 9.2 Impedance of the human

body
Notice: The high dependence of the body impedance on the content of water on the skin mandates
to take greater precautions such as the use of power outlets or breakers with ground-fault
protection and the use of very low voltage in electrical installations on wet areas, such as
bathrooms, kitchen counters, terraces, flooded areas, and swimming pools.
9.2 EVALUATION OF RISK LEVEL

Elevated expenses in which the State and people or entities affected incur when there is an
accident of electrical origin were taken into account for the preparation of this regulation such
expenses exceed significantly the investments that would have been required in order to minimize
or eliminate the risk.
For the purposes of this regulation, it will be understood that an electrical installation has
IMMINENT HAZARD or HIGH RISK when it lacks the protection measures against conditions in
which the health or life of people is compromised, such as: absence of electricity, electric arc,
direct or indirect contact with energized pieces, lightning, overvoltage, overloads, short-circuits,
step, contact and transferred voltages that exceed allowable limits.
9.2.1 Risk assessment matrix
With the aim of evaluating the level or grade of an electric-type risk, the following matrix may be
applied for the decision making process (Table 9.3). The methodology to follow in a particular case
is like this:
a. Define the risk factor to be assessed or categorized.
b. Define whether the risk is potential or actual.
c. Determine the consequences for people, economic, environmental, and image of the
company. Estimate depending on the particular case being analyzed.
d. Find the cross point corresponding to the consequence (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and the frequency
determined (a, b, c, d, e); that will be the risk assessment for each type.
e. Repeat the process for the next type until all possible losses are covered.
f. Take the most critical case out of the four cross points, which will be the risk category or
level.
g. Make de decisions or take actions as indicated on Table 9.4.
42
Table 9.3 Risk Assessment Matrix
COLOR RISK LEVEL DECISIONS TO MAKE AND CONTROL TO EXECUTE THE WORKS
Inadmissible to work. Potential sources need to Find alternative procedures if it is decided
be eliminated, do re-engineering or minimize to do the job. Top management
risk, and assess it in group again until reducing it. participates and approves the Job Safe
Very high
Analysis (JSA) and authorizes its
Requires special work permit. realization by means of a special permit to
work (SPW)
Minimize it. Find alternatives that entail lower The chief or inspector of the involved area
risk. Demonstrate how risk is to be controlled, approves the Job Safe Analysis (JSA) and
High isolate with barriers or distance, use PPE. the Work Permit (WP) submitted by the
leader in charge of the work.
Requires special work permit.
Accept it. Apply control systems (minimize, The work group leader fills out the Job
isolate, provide PPE, procedures, protocols, Safe Analysis (JSA) and the chief of area
Medium checklist, wear PPE). approves the Work Permit (WP) as per
established procedure.
Requires Work Permit
Assume it. Conduct routine administrative The work leader must verify:
control. Follow established procedures. Wear What could go wrong or fail?
PPE. What may cause something go
Low
wrong or fail?
Does not require special work permit. What can we do to avoid
something goes wrong or fails?
Very low Monitor possible changes Does not affect the sequence of activities.
Table 9.4 Decisions and actions in order to control the risk.
9.2.2 Criteria to determine high risk
In order to determine the existence of high risk, the situation must be assessed by a professional
qualified in electro technology, and be based on the following criteria:
a. That there are hazardous conditions fully identifiable, especially the lack of spec ific
preventive measures against risks of electrical nature: defective equipment, products, or
connections, insufficient load capacity of the electrical installation, violation of safety
distances, combustible or explosive materials in places where an electric arc may occur,
presence of rain, thunderstorms, and pollution.
b. That the hazard has an imminent nature, that is to say, that there are reasonable
indications that exposure to the risk factor may lead to an accident happening. This means
that death or a serious injury, a fire or an explosion may occur before the problem is
studied deeply in order to take the preventive measures.
43
c. That the seriousness is maximum, that is to say, that there is great likelihood of death,
severe injury, fire or explosion that may cause one part of the body or the whole body to
be injured in such a way that its use is disabled or limited in a permanent manner, or that
important assets of the facility or its surroundings are destroyed.
d. That there is a comparable history. The risk evaluator must refer to at least one situation
that has occurred under similar conditions.
9.3 MOST COMMON RISK FACTORS OF ELECTRICAL NATURE

As a general rule, all electrical installations have an implicit risk and because of the impossibility of
controlling all of the risks in a permanent manner, some factors were selected. These cause the
greatest number of accidents if not considered properly.
The preventive treatment of the problems derived from risks of electrical nature obligates to know
how to identify and assess irregular situations before an accident may occur. Therefore, it is
necessary to know clearly the concept of risk; from that knowledge, from the analysis of
intervening factors and particular circumstances, there will be objective criteria that allow to
detect the risk situation and assess its hazard level. Having identified the risk, the applicable
prevention measures need to be selected.
Table 9.5 illustrates some of the most common risk factors of electrical nature, their possible
causes, and some protection measures.
ELECTRIC ARCS
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Poor contacts, short-circuits, opening of loaded breakers, opening or

closing of disconnectors with load, opening of current transformers, opening of power
transformers with load without using arc extinguishing equipment, opening of current
transformers on secondaries with load, undue manipulation of metering equipment,
materials or tools forgotten inside cabinets, accumulation of rust or conductive particles,
neglect in maintenance works.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Use arc-resistant wrapping materials; keep a safety distance;

wear clothes according to the risk and UV-protective goggles.
ABSENCE OF ELECTRICITY (IN CERTAIN CASES)
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Blackout or service interruption, not having an uninterruptible power

system UPS, not having emergency power units, not having transfer. For example,
places where emergency power units are required such as hospitals and airports.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Have uninterruptible power systems available and emergency

power units with automatic transfer.
DIRECT CONTACT
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Negligence of technicians or lack of skills of non-technicians; violation

of minimum safety distances.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Establish safety distances; interposition of obstacles; insulation

or coating of active pieces; use of differential breakers; personal protective elements,
grounding, test absence of voltage, double insulation.
INDIRECT CONTACT
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Insulation failures, poor maintenance, lack of grounding conductor.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Separation of circuits, use of very low voltage, safety distances,
equipotential connections, grounding systems, differential breakers, preventive and
corrective maintenance.
SHORT-CIRCUIT
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Insulation failure, lack of experience of technicians, external

accidents, strong winds, moisture, defective equipment.
PROTECTION MEASURES: automatic breakers with maximum current trip devices or

fusible circuit breakers.
STATIC ELECTRICITY
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Constant bonding and separation of materials such as insulating,

conductors, solids, or gases with the presence of an insulating material.
PROTECTION MEASURES: grounding systems, equipotential connections, increase of
44
relative humidity, ionization of the environment, electric and radioactive eliminators,

conductive flooring.
DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Poor maintenance, poor installation, misuse, time of use,

inappropriate transport.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Predictive and preventive maintenance, construction of

facilities following technical standards, characterization of the electromagnetic
environment.
LIGHTNING
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Failures in the design, construction, operation, and maintenance of

the protection system.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Lightning arresters, lead-ins , grounding, equipotential circuits,

screenings, wiring topology. Besides, suspend high risk activities when there is personnel
outdoors.
OVERLOAD
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Exceed the nominal limits of equipment or conductors, installations

that do not comply with technical standards, loose connections, harmonics, not
controlling the power factor.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Use of automatic breakers with overcharge relays, a utomatic

switches associated to circuit breakers, well sized fuses, technical sizing of conductors
and equipment, compensation of reactive energy with capacitors bank.
TOUCH VOLTAGE
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Lightning, ground faults, insulation faults, violation of safety distances.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Low resistance grounding, access restriction, high resistivity of

flooring, use equipotential measures.
STEP VOLTAGE
POSSIBLE CAUSES: Lightning, ground faults, insulation faults, violation of restricted areas,
delay in the clearance of the fault.
PROTECTION MEASURES: Low resistance grounding, access restriction, high resistivity of

flooring, use equipotential measures.
Table 9.5 Most common risk factors of electrical nature
9.4 MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN HIGH RISK SITUATIONS

In circumstances where there is evidence of HIGH RISK or IMMINENT HAZARD for people, the
operation of the electrical installation must be stopped, except in airports, critical areas of medical
attention centers, or when the interruption may entail a greater risk, in which case other safety
measures must be taken in order to minimize the risk.
In these situations, the qualified person who is aware of the fact must report and request the
competent authority that provisional measures are adopted to mitigate the risk, providing
technical support available. The authority that has received the support must communicate in the
shortest time possible with the person responsible for the operation of the electrical installation,
so that the required adjustments are made and the installation is taken to regulatory conditions.
Shall these adjustments not be made, the control and surveillance body must be notified
immediately, and it shall take the relevant measures.
9.5 NOTIFICATION OF ACCIDENTS

In the cases of accidents of electrical nature, with or without interruption of the electric power
service, where death, severe injuries on people, or severe damages on properties due to fire or
explosion occur consequently, the person who is aware of the fact must notify it in the shortest
time possible to the competent authority or the service providing company.
Companies responsible for the provision of the electrical power public utility must comply with
what is set forth in subparagraph d), article 4 of Resolution 1348 of 2009 issued by the Ministry of
Social Protection with regards to the duty to investigate and report any accident or incident
occurred with their direct or contractor personnel on their mains. Additionally, they must report
every three months to the Unified Information System (SUI, Spanish acronym) any accidents of
electrical nature occurred in their mains and those with losses of lives in their users installations.
To do so, they must compile accidents reported directly to the company and the statistics of the
45
Forensic Medicine Institute or the authority that takes its functions in such jurisdic tion, following
the conditions set forth by the Superintendence of Public Domestic Utilities (SSPD) in its capacity
as manager of such system. The report must contain as minimum the name of the victim, type of
injury, cause of the accident, place and date, and the measures taken. This information shall be for
exclusive use of the control entities, the Ministry of Work, Ministry of Health and Social
Protection, and the Ministry of Mines and Energy. Failure to comply with this requirement,
concealment or alteration of information with regards to accidents of electrical nature, shall be
considered as a violation of the TREI.
SECTION 10. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

Every electrical installation subject to this regulation must comply with the following general
requirements:
10.1 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS7

Every electrical installation to which the TREI applies shall have a design made by a professional or
professionals legally competent to develop such activity. Design may be detailed or simplified,
according to the type of installation.
10.1.1 Detailed Design: Detailed designed must be executed by engineering professionals whose
specialty is related to the type of work to develop and the qualification granted by the
professional registration under the provisions of Acts 51 of 1986 and 842 of 2003. The parties
involved in the design must follow and observe the copyright and intellectual property
regulations with regards to the designs. The depth for treatment of the issues shall depend on
the complexity and risk level associated to the type of installation and it must consider the
items to which the following list applies:
a. Analysis and charts for initial and future loads, including power factor and harmonics
analysis.
b. Analysis of electrical insulation coordination.
c. Analysis of short-circuit and grounding fault.
d. Analysis of risk level from lightning and protection measures against lightning.
e. Analysis of risks of electrical nature and measures to mitigate them.
f. Analysis of voltage level required.
g. Calculation of electromagnetic fields to ensure that in spaces intended for routine

activities of people, the exposure limits set forth in table 14.1 are not exceeded.
h. Calculation of transformers including the effects of harmonics and power factor on the
load.
i. Calculation of the grounding system.
j. Economic estimation of conductors taking into account all losses factors, resulting loads,
and energy costs.
k. Verification of conductors considering the breakers trip time, the grids short-circuit
current, and the conductors current capacity in accordance with the standards IEC 60909,
IEE 242 chapter 9 or equivalent.
l. Mechanical calculation of equipment structures and anchorage elements.
7
Numeral 10.1 modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
46
m. Calculation and coordination of over-current protections. In low voltage it is permitted to

have coordination with the features of current limitation of devices as per IEC 60947-2
Annex A.
n. Calculations of conduits (tubes, ducts, gutters) and enclosures volume (boxes, boards,
Condulet fittings, etc.)
o. Calculations of energy losses taking into account the effects of harmonics and power
factor.
p. Regulation calculations.
q. Areas classification.
r. Preparation of one-line diagrams.
s. Preparation of drawings and electrical schematics for construction.
t. Construction specifications complementary to drawings, including the ones for materials

and equipment and their particular conditions.
u. Establish the required safety distances.
v. Technical justification of deviation from NTC 2050 when permitted, provided that safety of
people or the installation is not compromised.
w. Other studies required according to the type of installation for its proper and safe
operation, such as seismic, acoustic, mechanical, or thermal conditions.
Note 1: Depth with which the items are addressed shall depend on the type of installation, for
which the professional opinion of the design responsible must be applied.
Note 2: The designer shall refer expressly to those items which are not applicable according to
his opinion.
Note 3: For an analysis of risks of electrical nature, the designer must describe the potential or
existing risk factors in the installation and the recommendations to minimize them.
10.1.2 Simplified design: Simplified design can be made by an engineer or technologist from
the professional discipline according to the type of installation, related to the scope of the
professional registration. Similarly, the electric technician with competence qualification in
electric design issued under the provisions of Act 1264 of 2008 may make this type of design.
Simplified design applies for the following cases:

a) Electrical installations of one-family or two-family housing and small business or small
industries with installable capacity greater than 7 kVA and less or equal than 15 kVA,
voltage not exceeding 240 V, that do not have special environments or equipment, and
are not part of multi-family buildings or concurrent constructions subject to the same
construction license or permit holding more than four bills for power utility, and that the
following is specified:
Analysis of risks of electrical nature and measures to mitigate them.

Design of the grounding system.
Calculation and coordination of over-current protections.
Calculations of conduits (tubes, ducts, gutters) and enclosures volume.
Regulation calculations.
Preparation of one-line diagrams.
47
Preparation of drawings and electrical schematics for construction.

Establish the required safety distances.
b) Connection lines of rural overhead mains up to 50 kVA and 13.2 kV, for being of lesser
complexity. Simplified design must be based on specifications previously defined by the
grid operator and shall comply with the following:
Analysis of risks of electrical nature and measures to mitigate them.

Design of the grounding system.
Over-current and overvoltage protections.
Preparation of drawings and electrical schematics for construction.
Establish the required safety distances.
Define the maximum mechanical tension of conductors and templates.
Simplified design must be signed by the competent professional responsible for the construction
of the electrical installation or whoever supervises it, with his name, surnames, identific ation
document number, and professional license number in accordance with the legislation that
regulates the professional practice. Such design must be submitted to the owner of the
installation.
10.1.3 Cases of design replacement: For installations of domestic buildings or similar use,
classified as basic installations whose installable capacity is less than or equal to 7 kVA, which
are not part of buildings with more than four accounts, nor with special installations, the design
may be replaced by a construction schematic or drawing based on predefined specifications
which must be signed with name, identification document number, professional license
number, and signature of the technician, technologist, or engineer responsible for the
construction of the installation. It shall be submitted to the owner of the installation who shall
keep it for maintenance and further repairs of the installation, and a copy will be attached
together with the statement of compliance for the purposes of legalization of the i nstallation
before the grid operator.
The construction schematic or drawing substituting the design shall provide evidence of the
following aspects:
a. Compliance with the minimum safety distances to exposed pieces of mains, and that
transmission lines easements are not occupied.
b. The type and location of the grounding system, specifying the type of electrode, its
dimensions, as well as the caliber and type of ground connector.
c. Identification of the capacity and type of over-current protections in accordance with the
load and caliber of each circuits conductor.
d. A single-line diagram of the installation and the circuits load chart.
e. Location of the metering board, distribution board, piping type and diameter, number and
calibers of conductors, breakers, outlets, and other devices involved in the electrical
installation.
10.2 INTERVENTION OF PEOPLE WITH PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS

Construction, expansion or renovation of the whole electrical installation subject to the TREI must
be directed, supervised, and executed directly by qualified professionals who are enabled in
accordance to the legislation to practice such activity. They must comply with all the applicable
requirements of this regulation.
48
In accordance with the current legislation, competence to perform construction, modification,

repair, operation, and maintenance of electrical installations under direct responsibility shall
correspond to professional listed below, who shall be accountable for the resulting eff ects of their
involvement in the installation:
a. Electrical, electromechanical, distribution, and mains engineers in accordance with Acts
51 of 1982, 842 of 2003, and others that may add, modify, or substitute said Acts.
Electronic and Control engineers, and professionals of other specialized engineering areas
in activities related to electrical installations may only perform the part or component of
the electrical installation that corresponds to their discipline and technical and legal
qualification.
b. Technologists in electricity or electro mechanics, in accordance with Act 842 of 2003; and
with regards to their Professional Body, they shall be governed by Act 392 of 1997 in
accordance to what is established in Ruling C-570 of 2004.
c. Electric technicians in accordance with Acts 19 of 1990 and 1264 of 2008, in the scope
established by their professional license for the practice of their profession.
Paragraph 1. In activities where an engineer is supervising, he or she shall be the one to sign the
statement of compliance of the installation.
Paragraph 2. If the person who leads and/or performs the installation directly does not have a
professional license, the competent authority must be notified for illegal professional practice. The
Superintendence of Industry and Commerce shall also be advised of the fact for non compliance of
technical regulations.
When the person in charge of the construction although having a professional license is not
qualified in accordance with the laws that regulate the practice of his/her profession, the
corresponding professional association must be notified.
Paragraph 3. Activities related to the installation but which are not directly related to risks of
electrical nature such as digging trenches or excavations, civil works, stringing of conductors, lawn-
mowing and trimming of easements, piling of poles, crane operations, and in general the activities
performed by electrical helpers may be carried out by warned persons as defined in this regulation.
10.2.1 Responsibilities of the designers
Designs of electrical installations should encourage that all of the applicable requirements of the
TREI are met in the construction of the installation. Both the calculation records and the drawings
or diagrams must contain in a legible manner the name, s urnames, and professional license
number of the person or persons involved in the design who shall sign said documents, and with
their signature they acknowledge to comply with the requirements of the TREI; consequently, they
shall be liable for the effects derived of the application of the design.
The designer shall respond to the queries of the constructor and technical auditor, and make the
necessary adjustments if changes are required.
The designer, prior to the preparation of the design, shall ensure on the field that the minimum
safety distances and easement strips can be met, and he/she must provide evidence of this
condition in the calculation records, construction drawings, and photographs.
10.2.2 Responsibility of the constructors
Those responsible for the construction, expansion, or renovation of any structure or edification
where there is any kind of electrical installation subject to the TREI and the qualified professional
responsible for the direction or the direct construction of the electric al installation must comply
with the following requirements, and be registered in the Registry of Manufacturers and Importers
of Products (goods or services) subject to the compliance of technical regulations from SIC:
a. Ensure to hire qualified persons, technically and legally competent to perform such
activities.
49
b. Ensure that products and materials that comply with the requirements set forth in the
TREI and have the products certification.
c. Both the constructor of the work where the installation is located and the responsible for
the direction or the direct construction of the electrical installation must verify since the
beginning of the works that the resulting installation will meet the requirements of the
TREI when applying the design. If for duly justified reasons they consider that the design is
not appropriate, they must request the designer to do the adjustments and leave a record
of the request. If it is not possible that the designer makes the corrections, the qualified
professional responsible for the construction of the electrical installations will do the
adjustments, shall leave a record thereof, and shall be liable for the resulting effects;
under any circumstance it will be allowed that the adjustments deviate from the TREI. For
installations in which the engineering, construction or assembly are under the name of a
company, liabilities derived from these services shall be several among the parties.
d. The qualified professional responsible for the direction or direct construction of the
electrical installation must ensure that the installation meets all the applicable
requirements of this regulation and must prove it by means of the completion and
signature of the document called Statement of Compliance with the Technical Regulation
of Electrical installations TREI, under the terms of the form set forth in numeral 34.3.4
herein. The qualified person who signs the statement shall be liable for the effects
derived from the construction, expansion, or renovation of the installation during the
operation thereof.
e. The final drawings will be in accordance with the constructed installation. Such drawings
must be signed by the qualified professional responsible for the direction or direct
construction of the electrical installation.
Paragraph 1. In the event that non-compliances with the regulation are detected, attributable to
the person responsible for the construction, whoever detects them must notify the provider or RO
of the corresponding area so that it takes the m easures intended to avoid the occurrence of an
accident or incident of electrical nature.
Paragraph 2. Non compliance with this regulation in the electrical installation which entails
imminent hazard shall be the grounds for the suspension of the service by the Grid Operator.
10.3 PRODUCTS USED IN THE ELECTRICAL INSTALATIONS

Selection of the electrical products or materials and their installation must be in function of safety,
their use, and influence of the environment. Therefore, the following basic criteria must be taken
into account, besides the ones set forth in section 20 herein:
a. Certificate of Product Compliance in accordance with the TREI.
b. Materials compatibility: They must now cause deterioration on other materials, the
environment, or adjacent electrical installations.
c. Short-circuit current: Equipment must withstand the expected short-circuit currents

during the trip time of the protections, and the protections must clear the failure under
conditions that are not hazardous to people.
d. Work current and voltage: Ensure that the operation current and voltage do not e xceed
the nominal ones on the equipment, considering de-ratings, work temperature, and
altitude over the sea level at the operation point.
e. Spaces available for the operation and maintenance of the installation and equipment.
f. Frequency: Service frequency must be taken into account when it has an influence on the
characteristics of the materials.
50
g. External influences (environment, weather conditions, corrosion, altitude, etc.).
h. Other electrical or mechanical parameters that may influence the behavior of the product,
such as the power factor, type of current, electrical and thermal conductivity, etc.
i. Possibilities of mechanical anchorage and cooling of the equipment.
j. Power: that the service power is not exceeded.
k. Normal and extreme operation temperatures.
l. Dielectric assay voltage: Assigned voltage greater than or equal to expected overvoltage.
Note: The constructor of the electrical installation or whoever directs it, must ensure that the
products to install have the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE and that the product
corresponds with the one on the certificate. Those products with evidence of non compliance with
this regulation, even if they have the certificate, must be rejected and the fact must be denounced
to the Control and Surveillance entities. Those who reject without reason certified products which
fully comply with this regulation may also be denounced.
10.4 SPACES FOR EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE

Places where any electrical installation is constructed must have sufficient spaces (including
accesses) for the assembly, operation, and maintenance of equipment and other components in
such a way that safety in guaranteed both for people and the construction itself.
In compliance with the provisions of Act 388 of 1997, the land development plans must envision
the spaces for construction, operation, and maintenance of distribution mains and transmission
lines and substations, ensuring the width of easements and safety distances required for the level
of voltage and configuration of the installations. The municipal planning authorities and urban
planning offices must pay special attention at the time of granting construction permits so that the
compliance with minimum safety distances to energized elements of lines, substations, and mains
is guaranteed.
In electrical structures or rooms shared with other utilities such as television or
telecommunications, where in the opinion of the main operator the elements posing the highest
risk for the safety of people are electronic component, this operator must establish in his technical
regulation the minimum distances and conditions for the installation of the other elements.
Appropriate doors or spaces for the entry or exit of equipment must be available in mid and low
voltage substations and electric rooms, for the purposes of their initial assembly or later
replacement. The width of access doors for the work space must not be less than 90 cm and in
rooms where MV transformers are housed, the door wings must open outwards and have anti-
panic locks, regardless of the power and the pieces of equipment housed.
When exposed pieces are energized at less than 150 V on one side and connected to earth on the
other, the minimum work space must not be less than 1.9 m height (measured vertically from the
floor or platform) or the height of the equipment when it is highe r, and 0.75 m wide or the width
of the equipment if it is greater. In any case, depth of the work space opposite the equipment
must not be less than 0.9 m.
When exposed pieces are energized to voltages between 2500 V and 9000 V on one side and
connected to earth on the other, the minimum work space must not be less than 1.9 m height
(measured vertically from the floor or platform) or the height of the equipment when it is higher,
and 0.9 m wide or the width of the equipment if it is greater. In any case, depth of the work space
opposite the equipment must not be less than 1.5 m.
When there are pieces of equipment of a width exceeding 1.8 m and a nominal current equal to or
greater than 1200 amperes, there must be two (2) ways of access to the work space. In any case, it
51
must be ensured that the worker can evacuate the place. Only one access shall be permitted when
the width of the work space is at least double, as indicated in section 110-16 c) of NTC 2050.8
10.5 CONFORMITY WITH THIS REGULATION

Every electrical installation and every product subject to this regulation must comply with the
applicable requirements and be demonstrated by means of the corresponding certificate of
conformity as set forth in chapter 10 of this General Annex
10.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

The owner or holder of the electrical installation must verify that it does not pose high risk or
imminent hazard for the health or life of people, animals, or the environment in all electrical
installations, including the ones constructed prior to the effective date of the TREI (May 1st, 2005).
The owner or holder of the installation shall be responsible for keeping it in safe conditions,
therefore it must ensure that the provisions of this regulation are complied with, for which he
must get advice from qualified persons both for the operation and maintenance. If the unsafe
conditions of the electrical installation are caused by people or conditions not pertaining to the
operation or maintenance of the installation, the operator shall warn the likely affected about the
risk to which they have been exposed and it must take the measures to avoid the risk becomes an
imminent hazard for the health or life of people. Additionally, it must request the causer to
eliminate those conditions which make the installation unsafe, and if the former does not comply
timely, go to the competent authority so they enforce compliance.
Those who provide electrical power, once aware of imminent hazard, mus t take the relevant
measures to avoid the risk becoming an accident, including if applicable, de -energizing the
installation in which case records must be taken. If failure to apply corrective measures results in
an accident, the person or people who caused the unsafe condition and knowingly did not take the
necessary measures to prevent the risk, shall be investigated by competent authorities and must
be liable for the implications arising from such facts.
Installations which do not comply with the regulations in effect at the time of construction and
pose risks for the safety of people, the installation itself, buildings, and adjacent infrastructure,
must be upgraded under the requirements of the TREI.
If as a result of an inspections program, such as the one conducted on metering equipment, the
Grid Operator or the energy provider detects situations of imminent hazard, they must request
the owner or holder of the installation to make the necessary corrections in order to eliminate or
minimize the risk. The effective date of the regulation cannot be used as an excuse not to correct
deficiencies that catalog the installation as a high risk or imminent hazard for the health or life of
people.
In the event that the persons responsible for causing the conditi on that turn the installation into
an imminent hazard refuse to correct the deficiencies, any citizen may report the situation to the
entities of control and surveillance, or use the legal instruments for citizen participation before the
judicial authorities, by making a description of the issues that make the installation an element of
imminent hazard or high risk.
10.7 ACCEPTED TECHNICAL LOSSES

In the design of electrical installations, except for domestic installations of less than 15 kVA
installable load, an analysis of the most economic conductor on service line and feeders must be
conducted considering the value of energy losses during its useful life, taking into account the
estimated loads, occurrence times, additional losses for harmonics, and energy costs, projecting
the current value in the useful life of the installation. In installations of general use, the
requirements given by CREG with regards to technical losses must be considered or the applicable
technical regulation about efficient use of electrical power. The constructor of the installation
must address this design requirement and may not decrease the specifications of the conductor if
accepted levels of losses are exceeded with the modification.
8
Paragraph modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
52
SECTION 11. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) techniques must be applied when the operation levels of
devices, equipment or systems are more demanding than the ones required to comply with the
safety of people. EMC is the harmony present in an electromagnetic environment where receiving
pieces of equipment operate satisfactorily. Proper performance may be affected by the level of
electromagnetic disturbances present in the environment, by the susceptibility of the devices, and
by the amount of energy from the disturbance that may couple to the devices. When these three
elements foster the transfer of noxious energy, an electromagnetic interference is produced. It
may appear as a wrong operation, error, shutdown and restart of equipment or their destruction.
The components of electromagnetic compatibility are: issuer, coupling canal, and receiver. Figure
11.1 below shows the structure of electromagnetic compatibility, where
ED = Electromagnetic disturbance
C = coupling canal
EI = Electromagnetic interference
Figure 11.1 Structure of EMC
For the purposes of this regulation, the equipment and devices used on electrical installations
must operate properly in an electromagnetic environment without generating undesired
disturbances on the system or on other pieces of equipment, and have the capability to withstand
disturbances produced by other pieces of equipment or systems and continue operating in a
satisfactory manner.
From January 1st, 2016, all pieces of equipment subject to this regulation and the international
regulation on electromagnetic compatibility must be labeled with the electromagnetic class and
compatibility group, as per international standards or their equivalents.
SECTION 12. CLASSIFICATION OF VOLTAGE LEVELS

For the purposes of this regulation, the following voltage levels are standardized for alternate
current systems, which are adopted from NTC 1340:
a. Extra High Voltage (EHV): Corresponds to voltage exceeding 230 kV.
b. High voltage (HV): Voltage equal to or greater than 57.5 kV and less than or equal to 230 kV.
c. Medium voltage (MV): Nominal voltage exceeding 1000 V and less than 57.5 kV.
d. Low voltage (LV): Nominal voltage equal to or greater than 25 V and less or equal to 1000 V.
e. Very low voltage (VLV): Voltage less than 25 V.
53
Every electrical installation subject to TREI shall be associated to one of the aforementioned levels.
If there are circuits on the installation in which different voltages are used, the set of the system
shall be classified in the group corresponding to the value of the highest nominal voltage.
SECTION 13. SAFETY DISTANCES

For the purposes of this regulation and considering that the most effective technique with regards
to the electric risk will always be to keep a distance from energized pieces since air is an excellent
insulator, this section sets the minimum distances that must be kept among electrical lines or
mains and existing physical elements along their path (roads, buildings, soil intended for
plantations, grasslands or woods, etc.), with the aim of avoiding accidental contacts. Vertical and
horizontal distances shown on the tables below are given between phases for circuits with solidly
grounded neutral and other circuits in which there is a clearance time of ground fault in
accordance with this regulation.
Constructors, and in general those who submit projects to urban planning offices, territorial
planning departments, and other entities responsible for issuing construction permits or licenses
must express in written form that the projects requesting such proceedings fully comply with the
minimum safety distances set forth in the TREI.
It is the responsibility of the electrical installation designer to verify that this requirement is met in
the pre-construction stage. Conformity with the TREI cannot be given to installations which
violate these distances. The qualified professional responsible for the construction of the
installation or the inspector who breaks this provision, without prejudice of the penal or civil
actions, must be denounced and investigated disciplinarily by the corresponding professional
association.
The owner of an installation whom by modifying the constructions violates the minimum safety
distances shall be subject to the corresponding administrative investigation by entities of
surveillance and control for putting at risk of electrocution not only the dwellers of the
construction subject of violation, but also third parties, and neighboring buildings in risk of fire or
explosion.
Unless otherwise indicated, all safety distances must be measured from surface to surface. For
measuring safety distances, normally energized metallic fittings shall be considered as part of the
line conductors and the metallic foundations of the cable terminals or similar devices shall be
taken as part of the supporting structure. Accuracy in the measurement elements may not have an
error of more or less 0.5%.
For further clarification, the explanatory notes, figures, and tables below must be taken into
account.
Note 1: Safety distances on the tables below apply to bare conductors.
Note 2: In the case of voltages exceeding 57.5 kV among phases, the electric insulation distances
specified on the tables shall increase 3% per every 300 m that surpass 1000 meters above sea level.
Note 3: Vertical distances are always taken from the energized point closest to the place of
possible contact.
Note 4: Horizontal distance b is taken from the energized piece closest to the place of possible
contact, that is to say, by tracing a circle from the energized piece taking into account the actual
likelihood of vertical expansion that the building has and that at no time the mains would be above
the construction.
Note 5: If there is an installation with a voltage different than the ones provided in this regulation,
the requirement for the immediately higher voltage must be met.
Note 6: When buildings, stacks, antennas, tanks, or other elevated facilities do not require any type
of maintenance such as painting, cleaning, parts replacement, or people working near the
conductors, the horizontal distance b can be reduced by 0.6 m.
Note 7: A roof, a balcony, or an area is deemed to be easily accessible for pedestrians if it can be
reached in a casual manner through a door, ramp, window, stair, or ladder used permanently by a
54
person walking, or somebody who does not exert an extraordinary physical effort nor employs any
instrument or special device in order to access them. A permanently used ladder shall not be
considered a means of access if its lower step is 2.45 m or more from the ground level or other
fixed accessible surface.
Note 8: These distances shall not be applied if there are overhead lines with insulated cable and
screening; they will not apply either to insulated low voltage conductors.
Note 9: On close metallic roofs or in cases of conduction mains that go in parallel or that cross the
mid, high, and extra high voltage lines, it must be verified that induced voltages do not generate
hazard nor affect the operation of other mains.
Note 10: Where space available does not allow to meet the horizontal distances of tabl e 13.1 for
medium voltage mains, such as buildings with nearby facades or terraces, the gap can be reduced
up to 30% provided that the conductors, splices, and fittings have a cover that provides sufficient
dielectric strength to limit the likelihood of a grounding fault, such as the one of 3-layer coated
cables for compact mains. Additionally, they must have spacers and signaling that indicates the
presence of non-insulated cable. In urban areas with trees, it is recommended to use this
technology in order to reduce pruning.
Note 11: In general the conductors of the line with greater voltage must be higher than the ones of
lesser voltage.
13.1 MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES IN AREAS WITH CONSTRUCTIONS

Minimum safety distances that energized pieces must keep with regards to constructions are set
on table 13.1 herein. Figure 13.1 must be taken into account for their interpretation.
MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES IN AREAS WITH CONSTRUCTIONS
Nominal voltage among Distance
Description
phases (kV) (m)
Vertical distance a above roofs and projections, applicable 44 / 34.5 / 33 3.8
only to areas of very difficult access for people, provided that
the owner or holder of the electrical installation has absolute 13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 3.8
control over both the installation and the building (Figure
13.1). <1 0.45
66 / 57.5 2.5
Horizontal distance b to walls, balconies, ledges, windows,
44 / 34.5 / 33 2.3
and different areas, regardless of easiness of access to
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 2.3
people (Figure 13.1).
<1 1.7
Vertical distance c above or below balconies or roofs of 44 / 34.5 / 33 4.1
easy access for people and above roofs accessible to vehicles 13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 4.1
of maximum 2.45 m high. (Figure 13.1) <1 3.5
115 / 110 6.1
Vertical distance d to roads, streets, alleys, pedestrian 66 / 57.5 5.8
zones, areas subject to vehicle traffic. (Figure 13.1) for 44 / 34.5 / 33 5.6
vehicles of more than 2.45 m high. 13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 5.6
<1 5
Table 13.1 Minimum safety distances in areas with constructions
Similarly, in facilities constructed under the

provisions of the IEC 60364 Standard, for voltages
exceeding 1 kV, the distances of IEC 61936-1 must
be taken into account and applied.
The passage of conductors above constructions

(vertical distance a) is only permitted when the
holder of the electrical installation has absolute
control over both the electrical installation and the
modifications of the building or structure of the
plant. Understanding this as the management,
operation, and maintenance of both the building
and the electrical installation.
Under no circumstance the passage of mains

conductors or public utility lines shall be permitted Figure 13.1
above buildings with the presence of people. Safety distances in areas with constructions
55
Note: The construction of buildings below conductors is not permitted in public or general use
mains; in case of having such situation the RO shall request the competent authorities to take the
relevant measures. Construction of mains for public use above buildings shall not be permitted
either.
13.2 MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES FOR DIFFERENT PLACES AND SITUATIONS

The height of conductors with regards to the soil or road may not be less to the ones es tablished
on table 13.2 in transmission lines or distribution mains.
Figure 13.2 Distances d and d1 on intersections Figure 13.3 Distance e on railroad crossings
and roads lengths without electrification
Figure 13.4 Distance f and g for railroad crossings and rivers.
Note: In the case of line earth voltage exceeding 98 kV, distances of table 13.2 may be increased
or decrease the electrical field, considering that the largest vehicle or piece of equipment expected
below the line were grounded to limit to 5 mA rms the stationary state current due to electrostatic
effects. To calculate this condition, conductors must be de-energized and the sag at 50C.
56
Nominal voltage among Distance

Description
phases (kV) (m)
500 11.5
230 / 220 8.5
115 / 110 6.1
Minimum distance to soil d on intersections with roads, streets, alleys,
66 / 57.5 5.8
pedestrian zones, areas subject to vehicle traffic (Figure 13.2)
44 / 34.5 / 33 5.6
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 5.6
<1 5.0
Crossing of low voltage overhead lines on large avenues. <1 5.6
500 11.5
230 / 220 8.0
115 / 110 6.1
Minimum distance to soil d1 from lines that run along avenues, roads,
66 / 57.5 5.8
and streets (Figure 13.2).
44 / 34.5 / 33 5.6
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 5.6
<1 5.0
500 8.5
230 / 220 6.8
Minimum distance to soil d in areas of woods, bushes, cultivated areas,
115 / 110 6.1
grasslands, orchards, etc. Provided that there is control on the maximum
66 / 57.5 5.8
height that may reach the top of bushes or orchards located on easement
44 / 34.5 / 33 5.6
areas (Figure 13.2)
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 5.6
<1 5.0
500 11.1
In areas of woods and bushes where absolute control of the growth of 230 / 220 9.3
these plants is difficult, and their tops may cause hazardous closeness, 115 / 110 8.6
that the use of farming machine of great height is required or on railroads 66 / 57.5 8.3
crossings without electrification, these values must be applied as distance 44 / 34.5 / 33 8.1
9
e. (Figure 13.3) 13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 8.1
<1 7.5
500 4.8
230 / 220 3.0
115 / 110 2.3
Minimum vertical distance on the crossing f to feeding conductors to
66 / 57.5 2.0
electrified railroads, cableways, trams, and trolley buses (Figure 13.4).
44 / 34.5 / 33 1.8
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 1.8
<1 1.2
500 12.9
230 / 220 11.3
Minimum vertical distance with regards to maximum water level g on 115 / 110 10.6
crossings with rivers, navigable or floating canals appropriate for vessels 66 / 57.5 10.4
with height exceeding 2 m and less than 7 m (Figure 13.4). 44 / 34.5 / 33 10.2
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 10.2
<1 9.6
500 7.9
230 / 220 6.3
Minimum vertical distance with regards to maximum water level g on 115 / 110 5.6
crossings with rivers, navigable or floating canals not appropriate for 66 / 57.5 5.4
vessels with height exceeding 2 m. (Figure 13.4). 44 / 34.5 / 33 5.2
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 5.2
<1 4.6
500 14.6
230 / 220 12.8
Minimum vertical distance to soil on crossings on areas used as open
115 / 110 12
sports fields, without infrastructure on the easement area such as
66 / 57.5 12
bleachers, concession stands, or any other type of construction located
44 / 34.5 / 33 12
below the conductors.
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 12
<1 12
500 11.1
230 / 220 9.3
Minimum horizontal distance on crossing close to sports field including 115 / 110 7.0
infrastructure such as bleachers, concession stands, or any other type of 66 / 57.5 7.0
construction associated to the sports field. 44 / 34.5 / 33 7.0
13.8 / 13.2 / 11.4 / 7.6 7.0
<1 7.0
Table 13.2 Minimum safety distances for different situations
9
Paragraph corrected by means of Resolution 90907 of October 25, 2013
57
Minimum vertical distances on crossings or parallel lengths of different lines may not be less than
the ones established on table 13.3 below.
DISTANCES IN METERS
500 4.8 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.3 4.3 4.6 5.3 7.1
230 / 220 3.0 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.9 3.6
Nominal 115 / 110 2.3 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.2
voltage 66 2.0 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5
(kV) 57.5 1.9 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4
between 44 / 34.5 / 33 1.8 1.2 1.2 1.3
phases of 13.8 / 13.2 /
1.8 1.2 1.3
upper line 11.4 / 7.6
<1 1.2 0.6
Communications 0.6
13.8
44
13.2 115/ 230/
Communication <1 34.5 57.5 66 500
11.4 110 220
33
7.5
Nominal voltage (kV) among phases of the lower line
Table 13.3. Minimum vertical distances on spans with lines of different voltages
13.3 MINIMUM DISTANCES BETWEEN CONDUCTORS ON THE SAME STRUCTURE

Conductors over fixed supports must have horizontal and vertical distance between eac h other of
not less than the value required on tables 13.4 and 13.5 below.
When there are conductors of different circuits, the considered voltage must be the one of the
ground phase of the highest voltage circuit or the phase difference between the conduc tors
considered.
When suspension insulators are used and their movement is not limited, the safety horizontal line
between the conductors must be increased in such a way that the string of insulators may move in
a cross-sectional way until their maximum design balance angle without reducing the values
indicated on table 13.4. Displacement of the conductors must include the deflection of flexible
structures and fittings, when such deflection might reduce the safety horizontal distance between
the conductors.
TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND VOLTAGE BETWEEN SAFETY HORIZONTAL DISTANCES
CONDUCTORS CONSIDERED (cm)
Exposed communication conductors 15(1)
7.5(2)
Railroads feeders
0 to 750 V (4/0 AWG or greater caliber) 15
0 to 750 (caliber less than 4/0 AWG) 30
Between 750 V and 8.7 kV 30
Feeding conductors of the same circuit.
0 to 8.7 kV 30
From 8.7 to 50 kV 30 plus 1 cm per kV above 8.7 kV
More than 50 kV 71.5 plus 1 cm per kV above 50 kV
Table 13.4. Horizontal distance between conductors supported on the same structure.
Note 1: Does not apply for conductors transposition points.

Note 2: Permitted where spacers between pins have been used regularly, less than 15 cm. Does
not apply for conductors transposition points.
Note 3: For voltage exceeding 57.5 kV, the safety distance shall be increased by 3% per every 200
m in excess of 1000 m above the sea level. All of the safety distances for voltage greater than 50
kV shall be based on the maximum operation voltage.
58
CONDUCTORS AT GREATER HEIGHT

SUPPLY CONDUCTORS OUTDOORS
(VOLTAGE IN kV)
UP TO 1 kV BETWEEN 7.6 & 66 kV
Conductors and communication
cables located on the support of 0.4 plus 0.01 m per kV
0.4
power company or of above 7.6 kV.
communication companies
0.4 plus 0.01 m per kV
Up to 1 kV 0.4
CONDUCTORS AT above 7.6 kV.
LOWER HEIGHT Between 1 kV & 0.4 plus 0.01 m per kV
Supply Not permitted
7.6 kV above 7.6 kV.
conductors
Between 11.4 0.6 plus 0.01 m per kV
outdoors Not permitted
kV & 34.5 kV above 7.6 kV.
Between 44 kV 0.6 plus 0.01 m per kV
Not permitted
& 66 kV above 7.6 kV.
Table 13.5. Minimum vertical distance in meters between conductors on the same structure
Note 1: These distances are for circuits of the same operating company. For circuits of different
companies the distance shall be increased by 0.6 m.
Note 2: For tensions exceeding 66 kV, the vertical safety distance between conductors shall be
increased by the correction factor per height.
Note 3: If conductors of the same circuit of a compact mains with coated or semi insulated cables,
they should have a separation of not less than 18 cm for voltage less than 15 kV, nor less than 27
cm for voltage between 15 kV and 34.5 kV.
Paragraph: Compact lines technology may be used for one or several lines on the same structure
provided that safety distances defined in widely recognized international standards are met, such
as IEEE or recommendations of CIGRE for this sort of configuration.
13.4 MINIMUM DISTANCES FOR WORKS ON OR NEAR ENERGIZED PIECES

Energized pieces to which the worker might be exposed shall be put in a condition of electrically
safe job before working on or near them, unless there is evidence that de -energizing poses
additional risks.
Nowadays accidents by electrical arcs have increased, with origin in short-circuits, ground faults,
contact of tools with energized pieces, thermal shock, accumulation of dust, losses of insulation,
deposits of conductive material, or ionization of the environment. The arc generates thermal
radiation up to 2000 C, presents a sudden pressure increase up to 30 t/m 2 with noise levels
exceeding 120 dB, and it releases toxic metal vapors by disintegration of products. The distance to
which incident energy is equal to 5 J/cm 2 (1.2 cal/cm2) must be taken as protection limit against
electrical arc for systems greater than 50 volts.
For activities such as replacement of breakers or parts thereof, interventions on current
transformers, maintenance of bus bars, installation and removal of meters, opening capacitors,
macro measurements, voltage and current measuring, among others, safe procedures such as the
ones established on NFPA 70 E or IEC 60364 must be followed. In any case, the following
requirements must be met:
a. Perform a risk analysis where voltage, power of short-circuit, and the fault clearance time
are taken into account in order to define the categories of risk that determines the
protection element to be used. The arc analysis must be reviewed at intervals not
exceeding five years or when major modifications are made.
b. Fix labels where the risk level and required equipment are indicated.
c. Make proper signaling of the work area and areas adjacent to it.
d. Have appropriate training for live-line work, as the case may be.
e. Have an updated drawing, approved by a qualified professional.
f. Have a work order signed by the person authorizing the job.
59
g. Use personal protective equipment certified for the levels of voltage and incident energy
involved, which must not have a protection level lower than the established on Table 13.6
CATEGORY MINIMUM PROTECTION LEVEL

2
Cal/cm
0 Normal cotton clothes
1 4
2 8
3 25
4 40
Table 13.6. Minimum thermal protection level as per NFPA 70E
h. Unqualified persons must not exceed the safe approach limit. ROs shall address requests
of temporary coating or insulation for mid and low voltage mains made by the user when
it requires to intervene its facades. The user shall bear the cost thereof.
i. The restricted approach limit must be signaled either with a visible strip made with
reflective painting or other sign that provides temporary enclosure and facilitates to
unauthorized personnel the identification of the maximum permitted closeness.
j. Comply with the minimum distances to approach energized equipment, as set forth on
tables 13.7 or 13.8 and Figure 13.4 as applicable. They are adapted from NFPA 70 and IEEE
1584. These distances are barriers intended to prevent injuries to the workers, and the y
are basic for electric safety.
System nominal voltage Safe approach limit Restricted approach limit Technical approach limit
(phase phase) (m) (m). Includes involuntary (m)
Exposed Exposed movements
mobile fixed piece
piece
50 V 300 V 3.0 1.0 Avoid contact Avoid contact
301 V 750 V 3.0 1.0 0.30 0.025
751 V 15 kV 3.0 1.5 0.7 0.2
15.1 kV 36 kV 3.0 1.8 0.8 0.3
36.1 kV 46 kV 3.0 2.5 0.8 0.4
46.1 kV 72.5 kV 3.0 2.5 1.0 0.7
72.6 kV 121 kV 3.3 2.5 1.0 0.8
138 kV 145 kV 3.4 3.0 1.2 1.0
161 kV 169 kV 3.6 3.6 1.3 1.1
230 kV 242 kV 4.0 4.0 1.7 1.6
345 kV 362 kV 4.7 4.7 2.8 2.6
500 kV 550 kV 5.8 5.8 3.6 3.5
Table 13.7. Minimum distances for works on or near energized pieces in alternate current.
Nominal voltage Safe approach limit Restricted approach limit Technical approach limit
(m) (m). Includes involuntary (m)
Exposed Exposed movements
mobile fixed piece
piece
100 V 300 V 3.0 1.0 Avoid contact Avoid contact
301 V 1 kV 3.0 1.0 0.3 25 mm
1.1 kV 5 kV 3.0 1.5 0.5 0.1
5.1 kV 15 kV 3.0 1.5 0.7 0.2
15.1 kV 45 kV 3.0 2.5 0.8 0.4
45.1 kV 75 kV 3.0 2.5 1.0 0.7
75.1 kV 150 kV 3.3 3.0 1.2 1.0
150.1 kV 250 kV 3.6 3.6 1.6 1.5
250.1 kV 500 kV 6.0 6.0 3.5 3.3
500.1 kV 800 kV 8.0 8.0 5.0 5.0
Table 13.8. Minimum distances for works on or near energized pieces on direct current
60
Figure 13.4. Approach limits
SECTION 14. ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
This regulation establishes values of maximum intensity of electromagnetic field and magnetic flux
density at low frequency for areas where people may stay, regardless of the permanence time,
which are based on criteria from the World Health Organization (WHO) and the International
Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) (2009 revision).
Electromagnetic field is a modification of space due to the simultaneous interaction of electric and
magnetic forces produced by an electric field and a magnetic field that vary over time; therefore it
is known as variable electromagnetic field. It is produced by differences of potential and electrical
charges in movement, and it has the same frequency as the electrical current that produces it. It
has been proved that low frequencies (0 to 300 Hz) electromagnetic fields produce noxious effects
on living beings. Installations of the electrical system at 60 Hz produce electromagnetic fields at
this frequency, which allows to measure or estimate the electric field and magnetic field in an
independent manner.
14.1 ELECTRIC FIELD

It is an alteration of space that makes charged particles experience a force due to its charge, that is
to say, if in a certain region an electric charge experiences a force, then there is an electric field in
such region. This field is also known as electrostatic field since i ts intensity in one point does not
depend on time. The intensity of the electric field on one point depends on the voltage level of the
installation and the distance to it, thus to greater voltage, greater intensity of the electric field;
and to greater distance, less intensity of the electric field.
Intensity of the electric field is measured in (V/m) or (kV/m). This measure represents the
electrical effect on a charge present at some point in space.
14.2 MAGNETIC FIELD

It is an alteration of space that generates a force on moving electrical charges (currents)
proportional to their velocity and charge. It is also known as static magnetic field since its intensity
at one point does not depend on time. In theory, intensity of magnetic field should always be
measured, but in practice magnetic flux intensity is taken. It is represented with the letter B and
measured in teslas (the gauss is not taken as an official unit anymore), which have the following
equivalence: 1 tesla = 1 N/(A.m) = 1 V.s/m2 = 1 Wb/m2 = 10,000 gauss.
61
14.3 LIMIT VALUES OF EXPOSURE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS

For the case of installations subject to this regulation, people who are exposed to electromagnetic
fields due to their activities or the public in general must not be subject to fields that exceed the
values set forth on table 14.1 below.
INTENSITY OF ELECTRIC MAGNETIC FLUX
TYPE OF EXPOSURE
FIELD (kV/m) DENSITY (t)
Occupational exposure in an eight-hour
8.3 1000
work day
Exposure of general public up to eight
4.16 200
continuous hours
Table 14.1 Values of limits of exposure to electromagnetic fields.
Note: Population subject to occupational exposure consists of adults who are generally exposed to
electromagnetic fields under known conditions, who are trained to be aware of the potent ial risk
and to take the appropriate protection measures. On the other hand, the general public comprises
individuals of all ages and variable health conditions, and may include groups or individuals
particularly susceptible. In many cases they are not aware of their exposure to EMF.
14.4 CALCULATION AND MEASUREMENT OF ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS

Designs of lines or substations of voltage greater than 57.5 kV in areas where buildings are already
constructed in the vicinity, must include an analysis of electromagnetic field in places where there
will be presence of people.
Designs of buildings adjacent to the areas of easement must include calculation records of
electromagnetic fields that may occur in each floor. For this purpose, the owner or operator of the
line or substation must give the designer or owner of the project the maximum values of voltage
and current. Measurement shall always be made at one meter of height from the floor where the
person is located (jobsite) or domicile.
In the case of transmission lines, the electromagnetic field must be measured on the area of
easement, in a cross-cutting manner to the axis thereof; the exposure value for the general public
shall be taken as the maximum resulting from the area of easement.
For distribution and end-use mains, the exposure value for the general public must be measured
from the safety distances, where there is likelihood of prolonged permanence of people (up to 8
hours) or in areas of extensive circulation of people.
For jobsites, it must be measured on the place assigned by the company for the worker to comply
with his regular work schedule.
The equipment used for measurements must have a calibration certificate in force and effect, and
be subject to metrology control. The methods of IEEE 644 or IEEE 1243 can be used for the
measurement.
Paragraph 1: Electric field must be calculated in areas of easement of transmission lines with
voltage equal to or greater than 110 kV, and it must only be measured as a verification mechanism
on locations of building facades at the height of the conductors closest to the faade which is on
the limit of easement. 10
Paragraph 2: Magnetic flux density must be calculated for currents greater than 1000 A and it
must be measured on cable trays, bus bars, and other preassembled cables carrying these levels of
current and which are placed up to 30 cm from jobsites or places where people stay. Similarly, it
must be measured on transmission lines that exceed these currents at distances up to 1.5 m from
the conductor for maximum closeness of the general public and 30 cm for people who work on the
line. Under no circumstance the presence of people at distances lower than the aforementioned
shall be permitted. 11
10
Paragraph included by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
11
Paragraph included by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
62
SECTION 15. GROUNDING SYSTEM

Every electrical installation to which TREI applies, except where otherwise expressly indicated,
must have an GROUNDING System (ES) to avoid that people in contact with the installation, both
indoors and outdoors, are subject to step, touch, or transferred voltages that exceed the tolerance
thresholds of human beings when a fault occurs.
The demand of grounding systems for electrical installations covers the electrical system as such
and the supports or metal structures that in case of temporary overvoltage may trigger a
permanent fault at power frequency between the earthed structure and the mains.
The goals of an Grounding System (ES) are safety of people, protection of facilities, and
electromagnetic compatibility.
The functions of an grounding system are:
a. Ensure safety conditions for living beings.
b. Allow protection equipment to clear faults rapidly.
c. Serve as common reference to the electrical system.
d. Conduct and dissipate with sufficient capacity fault, electrostatic, and lightning currents.
e. Transmit RF signals in mid and long waves.
f. Carry out a low resistance connection to earth and reference points of the equipment.
It must be taken into account that the fundamental criterion to ensure safety for human beings is
the maximum electric power they can tolerate due to step, touch, or transferred voltages, and not
the value of grounding resistance taken in isolation. However, a low value of grounding resistance
is always desirable in order to decrease the GPR (Ground Potential Rise).
15.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE GROUNDING SYSTEM

The grounding system must comply with the following requirements:
Metallic elements which are not part of electrical installations may not be included as part
of the conductors of the grounding system. This requirement does not exclude the fact
that in many cases they must be connected to earth.
Major metallic elements that act as structural reinforcement of a building must have a
permanent electrical connection to the general grounding system.
Connections under the soil level (earthing) must be made with exothermal welding or
certified connector for direct earthing in accordance with the IEEE 837 standard or the
NTC 2206 standard.
In order to verify that the characteristics of the grounding electrode and its bonding to the
equipotential mains comply with this regulation, accessible and connection points prone
to be inspected must be left at the time of inspection. Their internal dimensions must be
minimum 30 cm x 30 cm, or 30 cm in diameter if circular, and their cover must be
removable. This does not apply to electrodes of transport lines.
To avoid overheating of conductors in three-phase systems of end-use installations with non-lineal

loads, the neutral conductors must be sized at least 173% of the phase current as per the
guidelines of the IEEE 519 or IEEE 1100 standards. Similarity, sizing of the neutral conductor must
be accepted as indicated in the IEC 60364-5-52 standard (articles 523, 524, and Annex E), when
third order harmonic currents are known accurately , which circulate effectively through the
neutral. In any case the design must mention expressly the standard used.
When there are several groundings because of the building requirements, all of them must
be electrically interconnected as per the criterion adopted from IEC-61000-5-2, as shown
on figure 15.1.
63
Figure 15.1. Systems with dedicated and interconnected groundings
The figure above clarifies that all groundings of a building must be interconnected, that is to say,
those parts of the grounding system below the soil level and designed for each particular
application such as: low frequency grounding faults, electrostatic evacuation, lightning protection ,
or cathode protection. This interconnection can be made above or below the soil level.
Grounding systems illustrated on figures 15.2 and 15.3 are forbidden expressly for one
single building, as per criterion adopted from IEC 61000-5-2, which is established similarly
in NTC 2050 and IEC 60364.
Figure 15.3. One single grounding for all Figure 15.2 Separate or independent
needs. groundings
Values given on Table 15.1 must not be exceeded. These correspond to the maximum
touch voltage applied to human beings (with a resistance equivalent to 1000 ) which is
given in function of the grounding fault clearance time, resistivity of the soil and th e fault
current. Those are the maximum values human beings may tolerate with regards to
current circulation and they consider the average net resistance or impedance of the
human body between a hand and a foot without having perforations on the skin and
without the effect of external resistances additionally involved between the person and
the grounding structure or between the person and the surface of natural ground.
The criteria established in IEEE 80 were taken into account for the calculation, taking as base
the following equation for a 50-kilo human being.
116
Maximum touch voltage = [V, ac]
t
Column two applies to places with access for the general public and was obtained from the IEC
60479 standard and taking plot C1 on figure 9.1 herein (5% probability of fibrillation). Column
three applies for mid, high, and extra high voltage installations, where there is presence of
personnel who is aware of the risk and has personal protective elements.
64
Fault clearance time Maximum admissible touch Maximum admissible touch

voltage (rms ac) according to IEC voltage (rms ac) according to IEEE
for 95% of the population (General for 50 kg people (Occupational
public)
Greater than 2 seconds 50 volts 82 volts
1 second 55 volts 116 volts
700 milliseconds 70 volts 138 volts
Table 15.1. Maximum touch voltage admissible for a human being
15.2 DESIGN OF THE GROUNDING SYSTEM

The designer of the grounding systems for power generation units, high and extra high voltage
transmission lines or substations must verify by means of using a calculation procedure recognized
by the current engineering practices, that the maximum values of step and touch voltage to which
human beings can be subject do not exceed the tolerance thresholds. Such calculations must take
as base a resistance of 1000 for the body and each foot as a 200 cm 2 plate applying a force of
250 N.
The suggested basic procedure is as follows:
a. Investigate the characteristics of the soil, especially resistivity.
b. Determine the maximum ground-fault current, which must be submitted by the Grid
Operator, in mid and high tension for every particular case.
c. Determine the maximum clearance time of the fault for simulation purposes.
d. Investigate the type of load.
e. Estimate in a preliminary manner the resistance of the grounding.
f. Calculate in a preliminary manner step, touch, and transferred voltages in the installation.
g. Assess the value of step, touch, and transferred voltages with regards to electric pain
thresholds on human beings.
h. Investigate the possible voltages transferred to the exterior due to piping, mains, neutral
conductors, cable armoring, signaling circuits, besides the study of means for mitigation.
i. Adjust and correct the initial design until the safety requirements are met.
j. Submit a definite design.
The grounding design may be simplified in end-use installations with pole-type substations, but
the parameters of resistivity of the terrain, fault currents that may occur, and the types of load to
be installed need to be taken into account. In any case, step and touch voltages must be
controlled.
15.3 MATERIALS OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS

Materials for grounding systems must be certified and comply with the following requirements:.
15.3.1 Grounding electrodes

For the purposes of this regulation, grounding electrodes must comply with these requirements:
65
a. Grounding must be comprised by one or several of these types of electrodes: rods, tubes,
plates, strips, bare wires or cables.
b. The use of aluminum is not permitted in grounding electrodes.
c. Manufacturers of grounding electrodes must guarantee that corrosion resistance of the

electrode is at least 15 years counted from the installation date. To certify this
requirement, the method of immersion in saline chamber for 1000 hours must be used, or
by using acid soil samples, prepared in a laboratory or acidic solution electrolytes of weak
concentration which enable to simulate the most corrosive soils where electrodes are
expected to be installed, in accordance with the ASTM G 162 or ASTM G 1 standards. The
saline chamber assay is not sufficient for galvanized steel cable electrodes; they mus t be
tested additionally with samples similar to the soil where they are going to be installed.
d. Coating demanded on Table 15.2 must not be lower than the values indicated in any given
point.
e. Adherence and bending of the electrode with coating must be tested in accordance with
what is established in the NTC 2206 standard or equivalent.
f. Rod or tube type electrodes must be at least 2.4 m long.
g. Electrodes must meet the dimensions and values on Table 15.2 below, which are adapted
from the following standards: IEC 62305-3, IEC 60364, BS 7430, AS 1768, UL 467, UNESA 6501F,
NTC 4552, NTC 2206, NTC 2050, ASTM F 1136, and DIN ISO 10683.
ELECTRODE TYPE MATERIALS MINIMUM DIMENSIONS

Diameter Area Thickness Coating
2
(mm) mm mm m
Rod Copper 12.7
Copper alloys 12.7
Stainless steel 15
Hot galvanized steel 16 70
Copper electroplated steel 14 250
Fully copper coated steel 15 2000
Tube Copper 20 2
Stainless steel 25 2
Hot galvanized steel 25 2 55
Strip or solid Copper 50 2
band Stainless steel 100 3
Zinc-coated copper 50 2 40
Twisted cable Copper or tin-coated copper 1.8 per each 50
wire
Hot galvanized steel 1.8 per each 70
wire
Rounded wire Copper 8 50
Galvanized steel 10 78.5 70
Stainless steel 10
Copper coated steel 10 250
Solid plate Copper 250000 1.5
Stainless steel 360000 6
Table 15.2. Requirements for grounding electrodes.
h. Labeling: Rod-type electrodes must be identified with the corporate name or registered
trade mark of the manufacturer and its dimensions; this must be done within the first 30
cm measured from the upper portion.
i. The following requirements must be consider for the installation of electrodes:

The manufacturer must inform the user if there is any specific procedure for installation
and appropriate preservation.
Bonding between the electrode and ground conductor must be made with exothermal
welding or with a connector certified for direct earthing.
Each electrode must be completely buried.
66
The bonding point between the grounding electrode conductor and the grounding must
be accessible, and the upper part of the buried electrode must be at least 15 cm from t he
surface.
This item does not apply to electrodes buried in the foundations of transmission lines
structures nor on the ones installed horizontally.
The electrode may be installed vertically, with a 45 inclination, or horizontally (75 cm
deep) provided that compliance with its purpose is ensured in accordance with numeral 3,
paragraph c, section 250-83 NTC 2050.
15.3.2 Conductor of grounding electrode or ground conductor
It is the conductor that joins the electrode or grounding mains with the main grounding bus bar.
For low tension, it must be selected using Table 250-94 of NTC 2050 or with the following
equation from IEC 60394-5-54.
2
A = (mm )
Besides copper, other conductive materials or their alloys can be used for the conductor of
grounding electrode or grounding conductor provided that corrosion protection is guaranteed
during the useful life of the grounding and the resistance of the conductor does not compromise
the effectiveness of the grounding.
The grounding conductor for medium voltage, high voltage, and extra high voltage must be
selected with the following equation which was adopted from the ANSI/IEEE 80 standard.
Where:
A mm2 is the conductor section in mm2.
l is the ground-fault current, provided by the RO (rms in kA)
Kf is the constant from Table 15.3 for different materials and values of T m. (Tm is the melting
temperature or limit of conductor temperature at an ambient temperature of 40 C).
tc is the clearance time of the grounding fault.
MATERIAL CONDUCTIVITY (%) Tm (C) Kf
Soft copper 100 1083 7
Hard copper when exothermal welding is used 97 1084 7.06
Hard copper when mechanical connector is used 97 250 11.78
Copper coated steel wire 40 1084 10.45
Copper coated steel wire 30 1084 14.64
Copper coated steel rod 20 1084 14.64
Grade EC aluminum 61 657 12.12
Aluminum alloy 5005 53.5 652 12.41
Aluminum alloy 6201 52.5 654 12.47
Aluminum coated steel wire 20.3 657 17.2
1020 steel 10.8 1510 15.95
Stainless steel coated steel rod 9.8 1400 14.72
Zinc plated (galvanized) steel rod 8.5 419 28.96
304 stainless steel 2.4 1400 30.05
Table 15.3. Materials constants from IEEE 80 standard
Note 1: According to the provisions of this regulation, buried aluminum must not be used.
Note 2: The use of galvanized steel cables is permitted in grounding systems for transmission lines,
distribution mains, and end-use installation, for which the parameters of zinc coated steel rod may
be used.
67
Note 3: Use of conductors with different geometry (L-shaped or T-shaped plates) is permitted, and
in other materials that prove their mechanical resistance to corrosion, tested at 1000 hours of
saline chamber.
Note 4: Copper coating of steel rods should not be less than 0.25 mm.
15.3.3 Protective conductor or equipment grounding

Protective conductor, often referred to as equipment grounding conductor, must comply with the
following requirements:
a. The low voltage conductor must be selected with Table 250-95 from NTC 2050.
b. The conductor for mid, high, and extra high voltage must be selected in such a way that its
temperature does not exceed the temperature of active conductors insulation housed in
the same conduit, as set forth in chapter 9 of IEEE 242.
c. Grounding system conductors must be continuous, without breakers or means of

disconnection, and when spliced they must be mechanically and electrically secured by
means of welding or connectors certified for such use.
d. Equipment grounding conductors must accompany the active conductors during all of its
length and through the same conduit.
e. Conductors of ground wiring that required to be installed in accordance with the purpose
of the installation must have green-colored insulation, green with yellow stripes, or
identified with green markings on inspection and external points.
15.4 GROUNDING RESISTANCE REFERENCE VALUES

A good grounding design must ensure the control of step, touch, and transferred voltages. Since
the resistance of grounding is an indicator that limits directly the maximum potential raise, the
maximum values on Table 15.4 may be taken. Those are adopted from the technical standards IEC
60364-4-442, ANSI/IEEE 80, NTC 2050, and NTC 4552. Compliance with these values does not
release the designer and the constructor of ensuring that step, touch, and transferred voltages
applied to human beings in case of a ground fault do not exceed the maximum permitted.
APPLICATION MAXIMUM VALUES OF
GROUNDING RESISTANCE
Metal structures and turrets of lines or mains with guard wire. 20
High and extra high voltage substations 1
Medium voltage substations 10
Lightning protection 10
Neutral point of low voltage service line 25
Mains for electronic or sensitive equipment 10
Table 15.4. Grounding resistance reference values.
When there are high values of terrain resistivity, elevated grounding fault currents, or extended
clearance times thereof, the following measures must be taken not to expose people to voltages
above the human tolerance thresholds:
a. Make areas where it is expected to exceed the pain threshold levels inaccessible to
people.
b. Install high-insulating floorings or pavement.
c. Insulate all devices that may be held by a person.
d. Establish equipotential connections in critical areas.
e. Insulate the grounding electrode conductor at its entry point into the soil.
68
f. Have available signaling in critical areas where qualified professionals can work provided
that they have instructions on the type of risk and they have personal protective elements
with proper insulation.
15.5 MEASURINGS FOR GROUNDING SYSTEMS

15.5.1 Measuring Apparent Resistivity
There are diverse techniques in order to measure the soil apparent resistivity. For t he
purposes of this regulation, Wenner 4-point method, which is the most widely used for
electrical applications, illustrated in Figure 15.4. Other duly recognized methods,
documented in the standards and engineering practices can be used.
Figure 15.4. Apparent resistivity measuring scheme.

The equation for calculation is:
Where
is soil resistivity in ohms meter.
a is the distance between adjacent electrodes in meters.
b is the depth in meters of buried electrodes.
R is the electrical resistance measured in ohms, given by V/l
When b is very small compared against a, the following expression is available: = 2aR
15.5.2 Measuring of grounding resistance
Grounding resistance must be measured before commissioning an electrical system, as part of the
maintenance routine, or exceptionally as part of the verification of a grounding system. For its
measuring, the Potential Drop method can be used. Its setup is shown on Figure 15.5
Figure 15.5 Grounding resistance measuring scheme
Where,
d is the location distance of the current ancillary electrode, which must be 6.5 times the largest size
of grounding to be measured, in order to get an accuracy of 95% (as per IEEE 81).
x is the distance of the voltage ancillary electrode. Grounding resistance in ohms is calculated with
V/I.
The value of grounding resistance that must be taken when applying this method is when the
arrangement of the voltage ancillary electrode is 61.8% of the distance from the current ancillary
electrode, provided that the soil is uniform. Similarly, other methods duly recognized and
documented in standards and engineering practices can be used.
69
On transmission lines with guard wire, measuring must be take n by decoupling the guard wire or
using a high frequency (25 kHz) earth meter.
15.5.3 Measuring of step and touch voltages
Step and touch voltages calculated in the design phase must be measured before commissioning
the high voltage and extra high voltage substation, as well as on the structures of transmission
lines of voltages greater than or equal to 110 kV located in urban areas or which are located less
than 20 m of schools or housing in rural areas to verify that they are within the admitted limits.
The following criteria must be followed in the measuring. These were adopted from the IEEE -81.2
or the ones from an applicable technical standard, such as IEC 61936-1. 12
a. Measuring must be taken preferably in the periphery of the grounding setup. Power feed
sources or impulse generators shall be used, appropriate to simulate the fault, so that the
current injected is sufficiently high in order to avoid that measurements are falsified as a
consequence of spurious or seepage currents circulating through the ground.
b. Substations shall be measured up to one meter outside the enclosure, and in the case of
towers or poles, one meter from the structure.
c. It should be attempted that the injected current is 1% of the current for which the
installation has been sized, and not less than 50 A.
d. Metering electrodes for feet simulation shall have each one a surface of 200 cm2 and exert
a force of 250 N on the ground.
e. Calculations to determine maximum possible voltage shall be made assuming there is

proportionality.
f. Other measurement methods are accepted, provided that they are endorsed by
international, regional, or internationally recognized technical standards or NTC. In such
cases, whoever uses such method shall leave a written record of the method used and the
standard applied.
Paragraph: In medium voltage substation, step and touch voltage must be measured at the edge
of the closing fence if fault currents exceed 10 kA or if the ground resistance measure turns out to
be two or more times the value considered in the design. In case that values established on table
15.1 of the General Annex are exceeded, relevant measures must be taken in accordance with this
Regulation.13
15.6 MAINTENANCE OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS

Components of the grounding system tend to lose their effectiveness after some years due to
corrosion, electrical faults, mechanical damage, and lightning strikes. Inspection and maintenance
works must ensure continuous upgrade of the GS for compliance with the TREI. If an inspection
shows that repairs are necessary, these must be carried out without delay and not be postponed
until the next maintenance cycle.
Inspection must be conducted by a specialist in the area, who must submit records of what was
observed. Such inspection includes verification of technical documentation, visual reports, tests,
and records. Every GS shall be inspected in accordance with Table 15.5 shown below.
Installation voltage Visual inspection Visual inspection & Critical systems(1)
level (years) measurements (years) Visual inspection &
measurements (years)
Low 1 5 1
Mid 3 6 1
High and extra high 2 4 1
(1) Critical systems must be defined by each company or user.
Table 15.5 Maximum period between maintenances of a GS
12
13
Paragraph included with Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
70
Intervals on the chart above may vary according to local weather conditions, failures that
compromise the integrity of the Grounding System, industrial safety standards, requirements from
insurance companies, and technical procedures or regulations particular of a company.
15.6.1 TESTS: Tests to be conducted as part of an inspection are:
a. Equipotential assays.
b. Measure the grounding resistance. Results must be recorded in the inspection reports.
c. Measure spurious or common mode currents.
15.6.2 RECORDS: Inspection of the GS must document and provide evidence of the following
information, as a minimum, by means of records:
a. General conditions of the system conductors.

b. Corrosion level.
c. Condition of conductors and components connections.
d. Resistance values.
e. Deviations of requirements with regards to the TREI.
f. Document all changes against the last inspection.
g. Results of tests carried out.
h. Photographic record.
i. Redesign or proposal for improvements on the SG, if required.
15.7 TEMPORARY GROUNDING

The purpose of a temporary grounding piece of equipment is to limit the current that may go
through the human body.
15.7.1 Product requirements
The temporary grounding equipment must comply with the following minimum specifications,
adapted from the IEC 61230 and ASTM F 855 standards:
a. Electrode: Main bore with a minimum length of 1.5 m.
b. Clamps or clips: The type of clamp must be appropriate according to the geometry of the
element to be connected (can be flat or toothed).
c. Extra flexible copper cable, of cylindrical shape, with transparent or translucent coating
which allows its visual inspection. The caliber shall withstand a minimum fault current of
40 kA in high voltage, 8 kA in medium voltage, and 3 kA in low voltage effective at one
second with final temperature of 700 C. At the opinion of the Grid Operator or the
transmission company, grounding cables of less caliber may be used provided that the
calculated fault current is lower than the aforementioned values and the clearance time is
such that the temperature on the conductor does not exceed 700 C. If the fault current is
higher than the values indicated, a cable with sufficient capacity to withstand it must be
used.
d. The manufacturer must provide a guide for installation, inspection, and maintenance.
15.7.2 Installation requirements Temporary grounding must be installed in accordance with the
a. The assembly must be made in such way that the feet of the lineman are oriented to the
ground potential and the conductors which are connected to the lines have the lesser
length and impedance possible, as shown on Figure 15.6, adopted from the IEEE 1048
guide.
71
b. The assembly sequence must be from the ground to the last phase. For disassembly the
sequence goes from the phases to the ground.
c. In the event that the line is or would be susceptible to break on the structure, ground
connection must be made on both sides of the structure.
Figure 15.6. Typical temporary grounding assemblies.
SECTION 16. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Lightning is a meteorological phenomenon of natural origin. Scientific research conducted in

Colombia for the last three decades led by Universidad Nacional de Colombia and its researcher
Horacio Torres Diaz, which have been published in international journals and books on the subject,
allow to conclude that parameters of lightning are variable spatially and temporally. Since
Colombia is located in the Intertropical Convergence Zone, it has one of the largest lightning
activities on the planet, hence the importance of protection against such phenomena. While
methods developed worldwide may be applied, some lightning parameters are particular for this
area. Such conditions oblige to take measures in order to minimize risks caused by lightning, both
on buildings and electrical installations.
16.1 RISK ASSESSMENT WITH REGARDS TO LIGHTNING

Assessment of the risk level caused by lightning must consider the likelihood of loss of human
lives, loss of power supply and other essential utilities, loss or severe damage to property, cultural
loss, as well as lightning parameters for the tropical area where Colombia is located and the
protection measures that mitigate the risk. Therefore, it must be based on procedures established
in international technical standards such as IEC 62305-2, internationally recognized standards, or
NTC 4552-2.
Installations that have been constructed within the effectiveness of the TREI, to which this
requirement applies and which require the implementation of measures to control it, must be in
compliance within a term not exceeding 12 months after the effective date of this General Annex.
Generation centrals, transmission lines, medium voltage distribution mains, and substations
constructed after the 1 st of May, 2005, must have an assessment of risk level for lightning
supported on international technical standard, or a standard internationally recognized or NTC.
End-use installations where there is high concentration of people, such as multi-family housing
constructions, office buildings, hotels, medical centers, places of worship, educational centers,
shopping centers, industries, supermarkets, amusement parks, prisons, airports, military quarters,
courthouses, dance halls, gymnasiums, libraries, restaurants, museums, auditoriums, bowling
alleys, conference halls, exhibit halls, mortuaries, waiting areas for mass transport, shall also have
a lightning risk assessment. This applies equally to isolated buildings, buildings with heights that
are outstanding in their surroundings and where there is knowledge of high lightning density.
The study of lightning risk assessment study must be available for review of the surveillance and
control authorities.
16.2 DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF A LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Protection must be based on the application of an integral system, aiming to mitigate risks
associated to direct and indirect exposure to lightning.
72
Design and implementation must be carried out by applying me thodologies recognized by

international standards such as IEC 62305-3, or of international recognition, or NTC 4552 which
are based on the electro geometric method. The qualified professional in charge of a project must
include good engineering practices of lightning protection in order to decrease their effects which
may be of electromagnetic, mechanical, or thermal type.
16.3 COMPONENTS OF A LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

The lightning protection system must have the components described in numerals 16.3.1 to
16.3.3.
16.3.1 Air terminals or lightning arresters
Any metallic element of the structure which is exposed to lightning stroke, such as television
antennas, chimneys, roofs, communication towers, and any outstanding piping must be treated as
an air terminal provided that its capacity of conduction and electrical continuity is ensured.
Table 16.1 adapted from IEC 62305 and IEC 61024-1 standards shows the characteristics to be met
by lightning arresters or air terminals constructed for this purpose.
(1)
MATERIAL CONFIGURATION MINIMUM AREA MINIMUM THICKNESS AND
2 (2)
(mm ) DIAMETERS
Solid strip 50 2 mm thick
Wire 50 8 mm diameter
Copper
Cable 50 1.7 mm diameter per wire
Rod 200 16 mm diameter
Solid strip 70 3 mm thick
Aluminum or copper
coated aluminum
Solid strip 50 2.5 mm thick
Aluminum alloy 6201
Hot galvanized steel or
copper coated steel
Coating thickness: 50 m
Stainless steel
Brass Tube 50 4 mm thick
2
If thermal and mechanical aspects are important, these dimensions may be increased to 60 mm for solid strip and to 78
2
mm for wire.
A tolerance of + 10% is admitted for thickness, width, and diameter dimensions.
Air terminals or lightning arresters with radioactive elements must not be used.
Tabl3 16.1. Characteristics of air terminals and lead-ins .
Note: Air terminals do not require CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE. The constructor and
inspector of the electrical installation shall verify the compliance with sizing requirements.
For the purposes of this regulation, the behavior of every lightning arrester or air terminal must be
taken as a Franklin-type lightning arrester.
16.3.2 Lead-in conductors
a. The purpose of lead-in conductors, or simply lead-ins, is to conduct to ground in a safe

manner the current of lightning that has incidence on the structure and strikes on the
lightning arresters. In order to reduce the likelihood of damages due to lightning currents
circulating in the Lightning protection system, lead-ins must be arranged in such a way
that from the point of impact to the ground there are several paths in parallel for the
current, the length of the current paths is reduced to the minimum, and equipotential
connections are made on the structure conductive parts.
b. Two types of lead-ins must be considered in the designs: either link them directly to the
structure to be protected or insulate them electrically from the structure. The decision
about the type of lead-in to be used depends on the risk of thermal or explosive effects on
73
the lightning strike point and elements stored in the structure. The insulated type must be
applied in structures with combustible walls and in areas with explosion hazard.
c. Interconnection of lead-ins must be made on the upper part. Interconnections at ground

level and intermediate rings are optional.
d. Geometry of both the lead-ins and union rings affects the separation distance.
e. Table 16.2 provides the typically recommended distances between lead-in conductors and
between equipotential rings with regards to the Lightning Protection Level (LPL).
LPL AVERAGE TYPICAL DISTANCE (m)

I 10
II 10
III 15
IV 20
Table 16.2. Suggested distances for separation of lead-ins and rings.
f. The installation of more lead-ins, spaced in equidistant manner around the perimeter and
connected by means of equipotential rings, reduces the probability that hazardous sparks
are produced and facilitates the internal protection. This condition is met in completely
metallic structures and in concrete structures in which reinforcement steel is electrically
continuous.
g. The number of lead-ins must not be less than two and they must be located on the
perimeter of the structure to be protected, in function of the architectural and practical
restrictions. They must be installed, as possible, on opposite corners of the structure.
h. Each lead-in must terminate in a grounding that has a vertical or horizontal path to the
current, or a combination of both.14
i. Lead-ins must be installed in such a way that they are direct continuation of th e arresting
system conductors.
j. Lead-in conductors must be installed in a straight, vertical manner, following the shortest
and most direct path to earth. Formation of loops on the lead-in conductor must be
avoided as well as bends with less than 20 cm in radius.
k. Lead-ins must not be installed on water drainage canals, even if they have electrical
insulation.
l. Materials must comply with the specifications given on Table 16.1 above.
m. Frames or elements of the faade may be used as lead -ins if they are metallic profiles or
railings, and their sizes comply with the requirements for lead-in conductors, that is to say,
for metal sheets or tubes, their thickness must not be less than 0.5 mm and their vertical
equipotential is ensured in such a way that accidental mechanical forces (for instance
vibrations, thermal expansion, etc.) do not cause breaking of the materials or loss of
equipotential.
n. Lightning protection grounding must be interconnected to other grounding of the building.
16.3.3 Lightning protection grounding
14
Subsection modified by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
74
Lightning protection grounding must comply with the applicable requirements from SECTION 15 of
this General Annex, particularly with regards to materials and interconnection. The configuration
must be made with horizontal (counterweights), vertical, or a combination of both electrodes
according to the criterion of IEC 62305.
16.4 RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACTIONS IN CASE OF LIGHTNING

In order to prevent accidents with lightning, it is convenient to take into account the following
recommendations in the event of a storm:
a. Do not go outside or stay outdoors unless it is absolutely necessary.
b. Seek for shelter in structures that offer lighting protection such as:
Low buildings without outstanding points.
Houses and buildings with appropriate lightning protection system.
Underground shelters.
Automobiles and other closed vehicles, with metal body.
c. If possible, avoid the following places which offer little or no protection:

Under trees with greater risk of lightning strike, i.e., the tallest ones.
Open sports field.
Tents and temporary shelters in unpopulated areas.
Uncovered or non-metal vehicles.
Communications or energy towers.
d. Take extreme precautions in the following places:

Buildings terraces.
Sports grounds and open field.
Swimming pools and lakes.
Surroundings of electrical lines, overhead lines, electrical fences, diamond mesh, railroad
tracks, and clotheslines.
Isolated trees.
Metal towers (communications, high voltage lines, drilling, etc.)
e. If you must stay in a place with high density of lightning to earth:

Seek for lower areas.
Seek areas populated with trees, but avoid isolated trees.
Seek for safe buildings and shelters.
If you have to choose between a slope and the ridge of a hill, place yourself on the
ridge.
f. If you are isolated in an area where a lightning storm is occurring:

Do not lay on the ground.
Put your feet together.
Adopt a squatting position.
Do not put your hands on the ground.
Do not get shelter under a tree.
g. Pay attention to alarm signs and follow the commands given by emergency brigade
officers when storm detectors are available.
h. Disconnect electronic equipment which do not have lightning protection.
75
SECTION 17. LIGHTING15

Lighting of spaces is widely related to electrical installations since most of modern illumination
sources are based on the incandescence and luminescence properties of materials subject to the
passage of electrical current. Good lighting besides being a safety, productivity, and work
performance factor, improves visual comfort.
Considering this, for the purposes of proving conformity with this Regulation, fixed lamp or bulb
holders (screw bases) must comply with the product and installation requirements set forth on
section 20.29 of the TREI General Annex.
Products for use in lighting systems of places classified as hazardous, such as the ones described
on Chapter 5 of NTC 2050, swimming pools and similar sources in section 680, those of firefighting
systems on section 695, and emergency systems on section 700 of NTC 2050, and the ones of
installations in mines must comply with what is set forth in section 20.28 of the General Annex to
Resolution 90708 of 2013 for products used in special installations. The installations of these
elements must comply with the provisions of NTC 2050 and section 29.4 of the General Annex, as
the case may be, and prove conformity with the TREI for this sort of application.
Both the designer and the constructor of the electrical installation must ensure power supply for
illumination sources and their corresponding controls, on the points defined in the detailed design
or lighting scheme according to the lighting needs resulting from the compliance with the
Technical Regulation for General and Street Lighting - TRGSL-. If the building requires TRGSL
design and it does not have it, this non-conformance must be recorded on the TREI certification.
In constructions where the TRGSL does not demand detailed design, both the designer and the
constructor of the electrical installation must take into account the lighting requirements and
place the necessary outlets for the setup of lamps and switches in places where lighting is required
as well as their control devices. The compliance with these requirements shall be verified in the
TREI certification.
If the lighting system requires full certification, the observation must be recorded in the TREI
inspection opinion.
17.1 SAFETY LIGHTING

In facilities where lighting is a determinant safety factor, the following requirements must be
taken into account. They must be verified as part of conformity with the TREI without excluding
the demonstration of conformity with the TRGSL as applicable:
a. The electrical installation and associated equipment must ensure uninterrupted supply for
lighting in places where lack thereof may cause risks for life of people, such as in critical
areas, emergency exits, or evacuation routes.
b. The use of delayed-ignition discharge lamps is not permitted in emergency lighting

circuits.
c. Emergency lighting systems equipped with batteries banks must ensure their operation for
at least 60 minutes after normal power provision is interrupted.
d. Horizontal luminance shall be at least 5 lux at the height of the plane of use for places
where emergency equipment is located such as fire extinguishers and gurneys, in facilities
of firefighting facilities of manual use, and in lighting distribution boards.
e. Evacuation routes must be clearly visible, signaled, and lighted with a self-contained
battery system ensuring the photometry parameters demanded in the TRGSL, even under
conditions of smoke or full darkness.
f. Except where there are environments classified as hazardous, luminaries must have a
tightness not lower than IP 20 for use indoors and IP65 for use outdoors, and they must be
15
SECTION 17 modified by means of Resolution 907905 of July 25, 2014.
76
capable of withstanding combustion at ambient temperature of 70 C, at least during one

half of the stated autonomy time.
g. Batteries used in emergency lighting systems must comply with the current environmental
legislation.
17.2 PERIODIC TESTS ON EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

With the aim of ensuring that emergency lighting operates properly in the event when it is
required and complies with its purpose of saving lives, verification must be made about absence of
faults in the emergency lighting systems or their components such as the light source and/or
emergency lamp, batteries, load autonomy, conductors and connections, and their operation must
be verified on a monthly basis. It is recommended to apply standards such as NF -C71-801 or NFC-
C71-820 (Emergency lighting self testing), UNE EN 50172 (supervision and maintenance of
emergency lighting installations).
Functionality verification of the emergency lighting system must be recorded in a reports log book
which must be under the custody of the responsible person assigned by the facility owner or
holder, and it must contain at least the following information:
Dates of each one of the periodic inspections and tests.
Brief description of inspections and tests.
Identification of defects found.
Corrective actions carried out.
Modifications made on the emergency lighting installation.
SECTION 18. WORKS ON DE-ENERGIZED MAINS

An electric accident is almost always foreseeable, therefore avoidable. Basic work methods
consist of work on de-energized mains or on voltage. In order to ensure the operators safety,
under no circumstance the same operator should alternate works on vol tage with works on de-
energized mains.
18.1 GOLDEN RULES

Works to be conducted on de-energized mains or equipment must comply with the following
Golden Rules.
a. Perform visible cut of all voltage sources by means of breakers and insulators, in such a
way that impossibility of their sudden closure is ensured. In equipment where cutting
power is not visible, there must be a device that ensures effectiveness of the cut.
b. Lock out or blocking, if possible, cutting devices. Signaling on the equipment commands
indicating Do not energize or Operation is forbidden; remove fuse holders from circuit
breakers. Lock out of a maneuver device is the set of operations intended to avoid
maneuver of such device, by keeping it in a determined position.
c. Verify the absence of voltage in each one of the phases with the voltage detector
appropriate for the mains nominal voltage level, which must be tested before and after
each use.
d. Grounding and circuit breaking of all possible sources of voltage that have incidence on
the work area. It is the operation of linking all the phases on an installation by means of
an equipotential bonding of appropriate section which has been previously grounded.
Unless all conductors or parts of the circuit are effectively grounded, they shall be
considered as energized to their nominal voltage.
Grounding equipment shall be handled with insulated poles, maintaining safety distances
with regards to the conductors while the installation is completed.
77
For its installation, the equipment is first grounded to earth and then to the conductors
that will be grounded. For its disconnection, proceed inversely.
Connectors shall be placed firmly, to avoid their detachment or loosening during the
development of the work.
Grounding equipment shall be connected to all conductors, pieces of equipment, or points
that may acquire potential during the work.
When the structure or support has its own grounding, the struct ure is connected to it.
When a conductor or circuit is going to be open, groundings shall be placed on both
sides.
When two or more workers or crews work in different locations of the same lines or
equipment, they shall be responsible to coordinate the placement and removal of the
grounding equipment in their corresponding jobsites.
e. Signal and limit the work area. It is the operation of indicating by means of signs with
phrases or symbols the message to be complied with to prevent the risk of an accident.
The work area must be delimited by fences, ropes, or reflective bands. For night works,
fluorescent cones or fences must be used, and both sides of the way must be signaled.
18.2 MANEUVERS
A procedure that is logical, clear, and accurate must be available for the appropriate planning,
execution, report, and control of maneuvers in order to ensure safety of the workers and the
system. This also with the aim of ensuring that lines and equipmen t are not erroneously,
accidentally or inadvertently energized or de-energized. Opening of circuit breakers with loads
that may expose the operator or equipment to electrical arc is forbidden except with the use of
arc-extinguishing equipment.
18.3 VERIFICATION ON THE JOBSITE

The group leader must conduct a detailed inspection based on the following items:
a. Equipment must be of the mains class of voltage.
b. Operators are wearing their personal protective equipment.
c. Operators do not carry any metal objects.
d. When a basket lift is used, verify the proper operation of the controls both in the basket
and in the truck.
e. Carry out inspection of gloves.
f. Operators must be in perfect technical, physical, and psychic conditions for performing the
task assigned.
g. Work spaces must have appropriate dimensions and not have obstacles that may put the
worker at risk. 16
h. Before going into an underground chamber, the atmosphere must be subject to gas test
using the technique and instruments to detect the presence of toxic, combustible, or
flammable gases with levels above the allowable levels.
i. Once the inspection cabinet or basement substation is uncovered, personnel must remain
out of it at least for ten minutes, while ventilation conditions are appropriate to begin
work.
16
78
18.4 WORKS AT HEIGHT

Every worker who is located at a height equal to or above 1.5 m, eithe r on the supports, ladders,
airways, helicopters, coil trolleys, or basket lift truck, must be permanently anchored to the
equipment or structure by means of a fall protection device, following the regulations of the
Ministry of Work (Resolution 1409, 2012, or whichever substitutes or modifies it).
All poles and structures must be thoroughly inspected before climbing onto them, in order to
verify that they are in safe conditions to develop the work and that they can withstand additional
weights and strains. Contiguous poles that would be subject to stress shall be revised.
18.5 WORKS NEAR ENERGIZED OVERHEAD CIRCUITS

When poles are installed, moved, or removed near energized overhead lines, precautions must be
taken in order to avoid direct contact with the phases. Workers executing such task must avoid
putting parts of their bodies in contact with the pole.
Workers located on the ground or who are in contact with earthed objects must avoid contact
with trucks or other equipment that is not grounded in an effective manner and that are being
used to move or remove poles on or near energized lines, unless they have approved insulation for
the voltage level.
The minimum safety distance for works on tension to be executed in the vicinity of unprotected
facilities of high or mid tension is considered to be the one existing between the closest point in
voltage and the operator, tool, or element that may handle with voluntary or involuntary
movements. Consequently, those working near energized elements must observe the following
minimum distances:
NOMINAL VOLTAGE MINIMUM
AMONG PHASES (kV) DISTANCE (m)
Up to 1 0.80
7.6 / 11.4 / 13.2 / 13.8 0.95
33 / 34.5 1.10
44 1.20
57.5 / 66 1.40
110 / 115 1.80
220 / 230 2.8
500 5.5
Table 18.1. Minimum safety distances for works near energized lines
Note 1. Distances on table 18.1 apply up to 900 MAMSL, for works at higher altitude and voltage
exceeding 57.5 kV, a correction of 3% for every 300 m must be made.
Note 2. Distances established in standard 516 of IEEE can be accepted for work on energized lines.
Unqualified personnel or those who do not know the risks of electrical installa tions cannot
approach energized elements at distances lower than the ones set forth on the following table:
VOLTAGE OF THE INSTALLATION DISTANCE (m)
Isolated installations less than 1000 V 0.4
Between 1 and 57.5 kV 3
Between 57.5 kV and 110 kV 4
Between 110 and 230 kV 5
Above 230 kV 8
Table 18.2. Minimum safety distances for non specialist personnel
Note 1. This table indicates maximum allowed closeness to a mains without the person performing
any works on it or other energized mains nearby.
Note 2. Distances for voltages intermediate to the ones listed must not be interpolated.
Not 3. Minimum safety distances indicated can be reduced if the electrical installations and the
work area are protected properly with insulators or barriers.
18.6 CHECKLIST FOR WORK UNDER HIGH RISK CONDITIONS

The following checklist is a prerequisite to work which must be filled out by an occupational health
sentry, by the work group leader, by an official of the occupational health area or a delegate of the
79
companys joint committee in charge of the work, and must be filled out in all cases where work
must be carried out under high risk conditions.
Is there a written or recorded authorization to do the work? YES NO

Is the engineer or supervisor informed? YES NO
Have the risk factors been identified as those which cannot be overlooked? YES NO
Was there any attempt to modify the job in order to avoid the risks? YES NO
Has all personnel been instructed on the special condition of this risk? YES NO
Has a person been assigned to report to the occupational health area, the
YES NO
joint committee, or the head of area?
Are the golden rules being followed thoroughly? YES NO
Is there a means of communication? YES NO
Are personal protective elements available and used? YES NO
Table 18.3. Checklist for work under high risk conditions
Note: If any answer is NO, the job MUST NOT be carried out, until the corresponding correction is
made.
18.7 OPENING OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND INSULATORS
The secondary winding of a transformer must not be open under any circumstance while
energized. In case that the whole circuit cannot be de-energized before beginning working with an
instrument, a relay or other section of the secondary, the worker must connect it with bonds on
branch.
Insulators must not be operated with load unless they are certified for this condition, or it is made
with special equipment for opening with load.
SECTION 19. WORKS ON ENERGIZED MAINSS OR LIVE LINES

The following are the most common work methods, according to the means used to protect the
operator and voltage level:
a. Hot stick or live line tool work: In this method the operator executes the work with the aid
of tools set up on the end of insulating poles.
b. Insulating gloves or rubber gloves: In this method the operator insulates from the
conductor in which he is working and elements taken as ground chassis by means of
personal protective elements, devices, and isolating equipment.
c. Potential work: When the operator is at the potential of the transmission line on which he
works, by means of conductive clothes.
In all cases it is necessary to meet the following requirements, adapted from the IEEE-516
standard, which refers to ASTM, IEC, IEEE, and ISO standards about fittings and devices:
19.1 WORK ORGANIZATION

Every live-line work is subject to the application of a previously studied procedure which must
comprise:
a. A title that indicates the nature of the installation intervened, precise description of the
work and the work method.
b. Physical resources (materials, personal and collective protection equipment) and human
resources.
c. Organized description of different phases of work, at level of concrete operations.
d. Necessary sketches, drawings or schemes.
80
e. Every work on energized circuits of more than 450 volts must be carried out with a work
group of at least two (2) people. Work groups conducting works on circuits exceeding
1000 V must have at least two (2) operators and one (1) chief who coordinates and
supervises the tasks, paying attention to the group in order to control any risk that might
affect them in the development of the task. Exceptions of this requirement are
transformers energizing and de-energizing works, MV mains branches, replacement of
fuses in circuit breakers, maneuver and operation of breakers or insulators that can be
made by only one operator provided that he uses appropriate tools and safe protocols.17
19.2 EXECUTION PROCEDURES
a. Every lineman qualified for live-line works must have received special training and be
authorized for such work, which must be proved by means of certification.
b. Every lineman must be affiliated to the social security and professional risks system.
Besides, he must be subject to periodic medical exams in order to certify his bone
structure or to detect pulmonary, cardiac, or psychological deficiencies. Diseases such as
epilepsy, drug consumption, and alcoholism must also be studied by the physician.
c. The work leader, having received confirmation that precise measures were taken and
before starting the work, must gather the linemen and present them the execution
procedure to be carried out, making sure that it has been perfectly understood; that every
worker knows his function, and that everyone understands his involvement in the joint
operation.
d. The work leader shall direct and monitor the works, being responsible for the measures of
any kind that affect safety. At the end of the works, he shall verify its proper execution and
communicate their conclusion to the control center.
e. No operator may participate in live-line works if he does not have in the area his personal
protection elements, to wit:
o In all cases, insulating hard hat and protection gloves.

o In particular cases, the equipment foreseen in the execution procedures, among
others: dielectric booths or special shoes with conductive sole for potential work , two
pairs of insulating gloves, UV protective goggles, insulating cuffs, insulating tools.
f. Each operator must look after the preservation of his personal equipment. These materials
and tools must be kept in dry conditions, sheltered from weathering, and transported in
sleeves, cases, or compartments intended for that use; from which they should not be
removed until the moment of use.
g. Before working on an energized conductor, the operator must be linked electrically to it in

order to ensure its equipotential with the conductor.
h. In case of rain or fog, works can be performed when the leakage current through the
insulating elements is controlled and kept below 1 A for every nominal kV of the
installation. In case of not performing control of leakage current and if voltage exceeds
34.5 kV, these works must be stopped immediately.
i. In case of electric storms, works must not be started; if they started, they must be
stopped. When the atmospheric conditions imply the interruption of work, personnel
17
Paragraph created by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
81
must be removed, and the insulating devices may be left in place until the conditions are
favorable again.
j. When the insulating gloves method is used, operators must wear insulating gloves covered
with mechanical protection gloves and cotton gloves in the inside.
k. Every operator doing potential or hot-hands work must wear a Faraday coverall.
l. In hot stick works on voltages less than or equal to 230 kV, when protections devices
which avoid any contact or electric arc with a bare conductor are not placed, the minimum
distance to the conductor is 0.8 m when the insulator strings are less than 0.8 , and the
minimum distance shall be equal to the length of the string when it is greater than 0.8 m.
This distance may be reduced to 0.6 m for placement of insulating devices near the
anchorage points of insulator strings and insulators in their supports. Minimum approach
distance is understood to be the distance between a conductor and any part of the
operators body when he is located on the most unfavorable working position.
m. Every piece of equipment for live-line works must be subject to periodic testing in
accordance with technical standards or recommendations of the manufacturer. A
technical data sheet must be opened and filled out for every work element.
n. Insulating gloves must be subject to porosity test by means of air injection before each
work day, and a dielectric strength test must be conducted at least twice a year in a
laboratory.
o. At least one insulation test per year must be carried out for sleeves, covers, protectors,
blankets, poles, tensors, ladders, and other pieces of equipment.
p. Vehicles must be subject to general inspection and insulation assays on non conductive
pieces at least once a year.
82
CHAPTER 3
PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 20. PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS

Products subject to TREI, that is to say the ones mostly used in electrical installations, listed on
table 2.1 must comply with the following general criteria, besides other particular requirements
for each product:
a. Comply with the product requirements and prove it by means of a CERTIFICATE OF
PRODUCT COMPLIANCE issued by an accredited certification body. Similarly, installation
requirements must be met.
b. The CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE must refer clearly and expressly to the
product it applies. The manufacturer, importer, distributor, and marketer of the product
must verify that the product to be marketed corresponds to the certified product.
Products subject to this regulation which do not prove conformity shall be considered
unsafe products.
c. Products subject to the TREI listed on table 2.1 which do not have requirements defined in
this General Attachment, must comply with the TREI by means of a CERTIFICATE OF
PRODUCT COMPLIANCE issued by an accredited body in accordance to the applicable
regulation or technical standards.
d. Product requirements set forth in the Colombian Electric Code NTC 2050 (First update)
shall be enforceable by means of the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE insofar as
this is provided for in this General Annex.
e. For products subject to the TREI listed on Table 2.1 to which the compliance with a
technical standard is demanded, an additionally specific requirements are demanded, the
certification process must provide evidence of the compliance with those requirements,
even though they are not included in the technical standard.
f. Regulations referenced for each product indicate methods to prove compliance with the
requirements set forth in the TREI; in case that those regulations do not indicate such
methods, the laboratory or certification body may refer to technical standards rec ognized
internationally or the NTC related to that product, and it will provide evidence of the
standard used in the tests.
g. Any information related to the product that has been established as a requirement by the
TREI, including that with regards to markings or labels shall be written in Spanish language,
using phrasing easily interpreted, and it must be verified within the product certificat ion
process. Technical parameters established therein must be validated by means of tests or
assays conducted in laboratories accredited or evaluated as per the regulations in effect.
h. Information contained in catalogs or equipment instructions must be truthful, technically

verifiable, and it should not induce the user to error; deviations from this requirement
shall be sanctioned in accordance with the legal or regulatory provisions with regards to
consumer protection.
i. Every product subject to this regulation must be labeled with: the brand name and the
name or logotype of the manufacturer as per Act 1480 of 2011. Products on which the
demanded information is not possible to be incorporated directly because of their shape
or size may do so on the product packaging.18
18
83
j. When a product is manufactured for one or more functions particular to other products
covered by this SECTION, compliance of the particular requirements applicable for each
function must be demonstrated.
k. Products which are components of electrical equipment such as collector bars, cable
terminals, insulators, breakers, among others, must not be damaged or contaminated by
foreign material such as remains of painting, gypsum, concrete, cleaning substances,
abrasive or corrosive materials that may affect in a negative manner the good operation or
the mechanical resistance of the equipment.
20.1 ELECTRICAL INSULATORS

For the purposes of this regulation, insulators used on transmission lines, distribution mains,
substations, and equipotential bus bars of voltage exceeding 100 V must comply with the
20.1.1 General product requirements
a. Construction materials such as porcelain, glass, epoxy resin, steatite, or other equivalent
insulators must resist weathering actions unless the insulator is exclusively for use in
covered spaces, preserving their isolating condition.
b. The insulator must provide mechanical resistance that exceeds the stress to which it shall
be subject, for which the manufacturer will indicate the maximum stress it withstands and
must be proved at such conditions in order to determine loss of its isolating function in
case of rupture, fissure, or flashover.
c. Corrosion protection according to the medium where the material is used in accordance
with the IEC 815-1 standard.
20.1.2 Particular product requirements
a. Indoor pole insulators, made of resin, for indoor service and voltage greater than 1000 V
must be subject to the following tests and their results must be in accordance with the
standards IEC 60660 or NTC 2685:
Flammability: They must be category V0 self-extinguishing as per UL 94 or IEC 60695-11-

10.
Dry flash-over test.
Dry power-frequency withstand voltage test.
Partial discharge extinction voltage test, or radiographic exam to determine that the
insulator does not have any porosities.
Test for mechanical deflection.
Tightening torque test.
Water absorption test.
Corrosion test for metal pieces and connection systems.
Dimensional, leakage distance, and insulation analysis.
Labeling. The insulator must be labeled in a permanent manner with at least the following
information: manufacturers brand, model, dimension of connection system, system
nominal voltage.
b. Pole insulators in resin, used as support of bars and phase insulators in switchboards and
terminal boards for voltage less than 1000 V must be subject to the following tests:
Glow wire test at 950 C as per IEC 60695-2-11 standard.

Power frequency resisted voltage.
84
Tightening torque.
Corrosion for metal pieces and connection systems.
Dimensional analysis.
c. Mid and high voltage suspended insulators in polymer materials shall comply with the
requirements set forth in the IEC 61109, ANSI C 29.13, or NTC 3275 standards with
regards to the following aspects:
Galvanizing of fittings with a minimum value of 79 microns.

Flammability: they must be category V0 self-extinguishing as per the UL 94 or IEC 60695-
11-10 standards.
Dimensional analysis where the insulation distance and the leakage distance are included.
Labeling. The insulator must be labeled in a permanent manner with at least the following
information: manufacturer or importers brand name, year of fabrication, nominal
breaking load, and nominal voltage.
d. The following tests must be conducted on PIN type insulators used in medium voltage
mains, fabricated in polymer materials under the NTC 5651 standard, or applicable
international standard:

11-10 standards.
Porosity without penetration of fuchsine.
UV ageing without cracks or fissures after 1000 hours of exposure.
Mechanical loading.
Impact, with value not less than 10 J.
Dry and wet power-frequency withstand voltage test.
Dry and wet flash-over test.
Electromechanical
Labeling: Manufacturer brand name, year of fabrication, and mechanical load.
e. Insulators manufactured in porcelain or glass used on low, mid, and high voltage mains
must comply with the requirements set forth in the technical standard applied to each
type of insulator design, ensuring that the following tests are conducted in accordance
with standards such as IEC 60305, IEC 60383-1, ANSI C 29.1, NTC 1170, NTC 693, NTC 694,
NTC 738, NTC 739, NTC 2620, NTC 1217, or equivalent:
Thread verification.
Torsion, when applicable.
Dry and wet power frequency breaking voltage.
Dry and wet lightning breakdown voltage.
Mechanical or electromechanical when applicable.
Mechanical tests for tension, compression or cantilever.
Fuchsine penetration.
Labeling. The insulator shall be labeled with at least the following information:
manufacturer, mechanical load, and year of fabrication.
f. Insulators called spacers must comply with at least the following requirements and tests,
proved under the criteria of standards such as ANSI C29.5-C29.6 and 29.11, IEC 60507,
NTC 1285 (ANSI C29.1), ASTM G154-98, IEC/TS 62073, ASTM D2303, ASTM D150-98.
Conductor tracking and erosion must not be formed.
Sizing: The insulator or spacer must have four elastomeric rings to hold the conductors of
the three phases and the carrying cable. The distances between the anchorage points
must not be less than 27 cm for voltage up to 15 kV and 46 cm for voltages betwee n 15
and 34.5 kV.
85

11-10 standards.
UV ageing test conducted with xenon lamp, minimum 1500 W for 1000 hours without
having fissures or cracks.
Water absorption.
Impact test with value not less than 10 J.
Electrical tests of power frequency voltage, and dry and wet lightning breakdown.
It must be ensured that the insulator is free of pores or internal bubbles, and that its
material is not hygroscopic.
Labeling. The insulator must be labeled with the following information as minimum:
manufacturer name or brand, batch and/or month and year of fabrication, mechanical
load in kN, service nominal voltage, and BIL.
g. Transformers bushing insulators must comply with the requirements of technical

standards such as NTC 2501-1 or applicable international standards. It must be ensured
that the following tests are conducted:
Porosity without penetration of fuchsine.
UV radiation test conducted with xenon lamp, minimum 1500 W for bushings in polymer
material during 1000 hours without having fissures or cracks.
Saline chamber during 1032 hours for polymer material insulators without affecting their
electrical requirements.
Electrical tests of voltage at industrial frequency, and dry and wet lightning breakdown.
Labeling. The insulator must be labeled with the following information as minimum:
Manufacturer brand name, reference or denomination, cantilever mechanical resistance.
h. Insulators not described in this SECTION must comply with the requirements set forth in
any applicable international or national technical standard.
20.2 WIRES AND CABLES FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE

Wires and cables, insulated or bare, used as electrical conductors, control, and grounding
systems of electrical installations subject to this regulation must comply with the following
general and particular requirements, and prove compliance thereof by me ans of the
CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE. This applies likewise to galvanized steel cables such as
carrying cables, templates, or counterweights used in electrical installations.
20.2.1. General product requirements
For the purposes of this regulation, the requirements below are taken as general
requirements and consequently as safety guarantee for cables and wires used as electric
conductors.
a. Maximum electrical resistance in direct current referred at 20 C, which equals to 1.02
times the nominal resistance in direct current.
Rmaxdc = 1.02*Rndc
Where: Rmaxdc = maximum resistance in direct current, and Rndc = nominal resistance in
direct current.
b. The conductor denomination shall be made in compliance with the parameters defined
herein.
c. The minimum area of the conductive material cross-section shall not be less than 98% of
the nominal area shown on Tables 20.1 to 20.9. Lesser areas are admitted provided that
the direct current resistance complies with the requirements set in this Annex. Violation of
86
this requirement jeopardizes safety of the installations and shall be subject to sanction by
surveillance and control bodies.
d. Thickness of the insulation and its resistance must comply with the values set forth on the
tables shown in this section.
e. The manufacturer must identify whether the insulation materials guarantee that they are
self-extinguishing or flame retardant. This condition must me reported by the
manufacturer and tested in accordance with standards such as IEC 60332-1, IEC 60332-3,
UL 1581, or NTC 3203 as applicable.
f. Conductors for indoor installation or in spaces where there is presence of combustible

materials must not promote flames nor allow their propagation; such requirements must
be tested under standards such as IEC 332-1, UL 83, NTC 1332 or NTC 1099-1 (for low
voltage) or equivalent standards.
g. Dielectric strength must be verified for one minute at power frequency or for one minute
in direct current at three times the voltage magnitude, as per Table 20.6 or the
specification value of the standard.
h. Ageing tests on the insulation and external cover must ensure compliance with its
parameters during the cycle life, and they shall be verified with technical standards for low
voltage such as NTC 1099 part 1 and part 2, and for medium voltage ones in accordance
with ANS/ICEAS 108-720, AEIC CS9 or IEC 62067 or other equivalent. Conductors and
multi-conductors with covers additional to the insulation must comply with an applicable
international standard, or internationally recognized standard or NTC.
i. The minimum breakdown load for aluminum wires, ACSR, aluminum alloys, and other
alloys used on mains or overhead lines shall not be less than the one shown on tables
20.3, 20.4 and 20.5.
j. Aluminum conductor steel reinforced (ACSR) and aluminum alloy cables (AAAC) must have
the number of wires defined on tables 20.4 and 20.5. Other types of cables are accepted,
such as ACCC, ACCR, ACSR/AW, ACAR, ACSR/TW, ACCS. 19
k. Insulated cables for low, mid, and high voltage that do not have the requirements in the
TREI and are used in installation subject to this regulation must comply with an applicable
international standard, or one of international recognition or NTC, and demonstrate that
they are fit for such services by means of a CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE.
l. Conductors used in cable trays must be certified under the IEC 60332-1-1 and UL 1685
standards or other equivalent.
m. Insulated cables or wires must have an indelible, legible label that must be repeated at
intervals not exceeding 100 cm, which can be in high relief or printed in ink; similarly, it is
accepted in low relief provided that the insulation thickness is not reduced so that
compromises dielectric strength set in this regulation. The label must contain at least the
following information:
Conductor caliber in kcmil, AWG, or mm2.
Conductor material when it is other than high purity copper.
Corporate name or registered trademark of the manufacturer or marketer.
Nominal voltage.
Type of insulation.
Maximum operation temperature.
n. Bare cables or wires must be accompanied by a label where the following is specified:
Conductor caliber in kcmil, AWG, or mm2.
Conductor material
Mechanical breakdown voltage.
19
Paragraph corrected by means of Resolution 90907 of October 25, 2013.
87
Corporate name or registered trademark of the manufacturer or marketer.
o. In case that the product is delivered in rolls or spools, these must have a label where the
conductor length is specified in meters, caliber, manufacturer name or brand, marketer or
importer.
p. Conformity is verified by means of inspection and laboratory tests t hat ensure compliance
with the parameters set forth herein.
q. Those who import, manufacture, or commercialize wires, cables, or flexible cords for
service in installations subject to this regulation that do not comply with the applicable
provisions, are in violation of the TREI.
20.2.2 Particular requirements for soft copper wires
Caliber Nominal area RNcc 20 Caliber Nominal area RNcc 20

kcmil AWG
2
(mm ) OC kcmil AWG
2
(mm ) C (o/km)
(Q/km)
11.6 4/0 107.22 0.161 16.51 8 8.37 2.06
167.8 3/0 85.03 0.203 13.09 9 6.63 2.60
133.1 2/0 67.44 0.256 10.38 10 5.26 3.28
105.6 1/0 53.51 0.322 6.53 12 3.31 5.21
83.69 1 42.41 0.407 4.11 14 2.08 8.29
66.36 2 33.63 0.513 2.58 16 1.31 13.2
52.62 3 26.70 0.646 1.62 18 0.82 21.0
41.74 4 21.15 0.817 1.02 20 0.52 33.3
33.09 5 16.80 1.03 0.64 22 0.32 53.2
26.24 6 13.30 1.30 0.404 24 0.20 84.1
20.82 7 10.50 1.64
Table 20.1 Requirements for soft copper wire
20.2.3 Particular requirements for soft copper cables
Caliber Nominal RNcc Caliber Nominal RNcc

kcmil AWG Area 20 C kcmil AWG Area 20 C
2 2
(mm ) (Q/km) (mm ) (Q/km)
1 000 506.71 0.0348 66.36 2 33.63 0.522
900 456.04 0.0387 52.62 3 26.66 0.660
800 405.37 0.0433 41.74 4 21.15 0.830
750 380.03 0.0462 33.09 5 16.77 1.05
700 354.70 0.0495 26.24 6 13.30 1.32
600 304.03 0.0581 20.82 7 10.55 1.67
500 253.35 0.0695 16.51 8 8.37 2.10
400 202.68 0.0866 13.09 9 6.63 2.65
350 177.35 0.0991 10.38 10 5.26 3.35
300 152.01 0.116 6.53 12 3.31 5.35
250 126.68 0.139 4.11 14 2.08 8.46
211.6 4/0 107.22 0.164 2.58 16 1.31 13.4
167.8 3/0 85.03 0.207 1.62 18 0.82 21.4
133.1 2/0 67.44 0.261 1.02 20 0.52 33.8
105.6 1/0 53.51 0.328 0.64 22 0.32 53.8
83.69 1 42.41 0.417 0.404 24 0.20 85.6
Table 20.2 Requirements for soft copper cables.
Class A, B, C, and D cabling
20.2.4 Particular requirements for aluminum cables or copper coated aluminum cables.
Wiring Wiring
Nominal RNcc Nominal RNcc
Caliber in Caliber in
Kcmil Area 20 C Minimum No. of Kcmil Area 20 C Minimum No. of
2 2
or AWG (mm ) (Q/km) breakdow Class wires or AWG (mm ) ( Q /km) breakdow Class
wires
n load(kN) Minimum n load(kN)
breakdown
2000 1013 0.0284 153 A 91 600 304.0 0.0945 47.5 AA 37
1750 887.0 0.0324 132 AA 61 556.5 282.0 0.102 44.4 A 37
1590 805.7 0.0357 120 AA 61 556.5 282.0 0.102 43.3 AA 19
1510.5 765.4 0.0375 114 AA. A 61 500 253.4 0.113 40.5 A 37
1431 725.1 0.0396 108 AA. A 61 500 253.4 0.113 38.9 AA 19
1351 684.6 0.0420 104 AA. A 61 477 241.7 0.119 38.6 A 37
1272 644.5 0.0446 98.1 AA. A 61 477 241.7 0.119 37.0 AA 19
1192.5 604.2 0.0476 93.5 AA. A 61 450 228.0 0.126 35.0 AA 19
1113 564.0 0.0509 87.3 AA. A 61 397.5 201.4 0.143 31.6 AA. A 19
1033.5 523.7 0.0549 81.3 A 61 350 177.3 0.162 28.4 A 19
88
1033.5 523.7 0.0549 78.8 AA 37 336.4 170.5 0.169 27.3 A 19

1000 506.7 0.0567 78.3 A 61 300 152.0 0.189 24.3 A 19
1000 506.7 0.0567 76.2 AA 37 266.8 135.2 0.213 22.1 A 19
954 483.4 0.0594 75.0 A 61 266.8 135.2 0.213 21.4 AA 7
954 483.4 0.0594 72.6 AA 37 250 126.7 0.227 20.7 A 19
900 456.0 0.0630 70.8 A 61 250 126.7 0.227 20.1 AA 7
900 456.0 0.0630 68.4 AA 37 4/0 107.2 0.269 17.0 AA. A 7
795 402.8 0.0713 63.8 A 61 3/0 85.03 0.338 13.5 AA. A 7
795 402.8 0.0713 61.8 AA 37 2/0 67.44 0.426 11.1 AA. A 7
750 380.0 0.0756 60.3 A 61 1/0 53.51 0.537 8.84 AA. A 7
750 380.0 0.0756 58.6 AA 37 1 42.41 0.678 7.30 AA. A 7
715.5 362.5 0.0793 58.4 A 61 2 33.63 0.854 5.99 AA. A 7
715.5 362.5 0.0793 56.7 AA 37 3 26.66 1.08 - - -
700 354.7 0.0810 57.1 A 61 4 21.15 1.36 3.91 A 7
700 354.7 0.0810 55.4 AA 37 5 16.77 1.71 - - -
650 329.4 0.0872 51.7 AA 37 6 13.30 2.16 2,53 A 7
636 322.3 0.0892 50.4 AA, A 37
Table 20.3 Requirements for aluminum cables or copper coated aluminum AAC
Note 1: nominal resistance in direct current and nominal area also apply for AA, A, B, C, and D
cables.
Note 2: For the purposes of this table, cabling is classified as:

Class AA: Used for bare conductors normally used on overhead lines.
Class A: Used for conductors to be coated with weather proof, heat -retardant materials,
and for bare conductors where there is need of greater flexibility than provided by Class
AA.
Class B: used for conductors to be insulated with materials such as rub ber, paper,
varnished clothes, and for conductors such as the ones indicated in class A but that require
greater flexibility than provided by Class A cabling.
Class C and D: For conductors where there is need of greater flexibility than provided by
Class B.
20.2.5 Particular requirements for steel-reinforced aluminum cables - ACSR20
Caliber Nominal Min. Caliber Nominal area Min.

AREA of RNcc Breakd of aluminum RNcc Breakd
A Wiring aluminum 20 C own AW Wiring (mm2) 20 C own
Kcmil W kcmil
(mm2) (Q/km) load G (Q/km) load
G (kN) (kN)
2312 76/19 1171.51 0.0248 252 636 18/1 322.27 0.0892 67.6
2167 72/7 1098.04 0.0264 222 605 30/19 306.56 0.0944 133
2156 84/19 1092.46 0.0266 268 605 30/7 306.56 0.0944 128
1780 84/19 901.94 0.0322 227 605 26/7 306.56 0.0942 108
1590 54/19 805.67 0.0360 242 605 24/7 306.56 0.0942 96.1
1590 45/7 805.67 0.0358 188 556.5 30/7 281.98 0.103 124
1510 54/19 765.13 0.0379 230 556.5 26/7 281.98 0.103 100
1510 45/7 765.13 0.0377 178 556.5 24/7 281.98 0.103 88.1
1431 54/19 725.10 0.0400 218 556.5 18/1 281.98 0.102 60.9
1431 45/7 725.10 0.0398 170 477 30/7 241.70 0.120 106
1351 54/19 684.56 0.0424 206 477 26/7 241.70 0.120 86.7
1351 45/7 684.56 0.0422 161 477 24/7 241.70 0.120 76.5
1272 54/19 644.53 0.0450 194 477 18/1 241.70 0.119 52.5
1272 45/7 644.53 0.0448 152 397.5 30/7 201.42 0.144 90.3
1272 36/1 644.53 0.0446 117 397.5 26/7 201.42 0.143 72.5
1 192.5 54/19 604.25 0.0480 186 397.5 24/7 201.42 0.143 64.9
1 192.5 45/7 604.25 0.0478 142 397.5 18/1 201.42 0.143 44.0
1113 54/19 563.97 0.0514 174 336.4 30/7 170.46 0.170 77.0
1113 45/7 563.97 0.0512 133 336.4 26/7 170.46 0.169 62.7
1033.5 54/7 523.68 0.0551 163 336.4 18/1 170.46 0.168 38.7
1033.5 45/7 523.68 0.0551 123 300 26/7 152.01 0.190 56.5
1033.5 36/1 523.68 0.0549 95.2 266.8 26/7 135.19 0.214 50.3
954 54/7 483.40 0.0597 150 266.8 18/1 135.19 0.212 30.7
954 45/7 483.40 0.0597 115 211.6 4/0 6/1 107.22 0.267 37.1
954 36/1 483.40 0.0594 88.1 211.3 12/7 107.07 0.270 92.1
900 54/7 456.04 0.0633 142 203.2 16/19 102.96 0.280 126
900 45/7 456.04 0.0633 108 190.8 12/7 96.68 0.299 83.2
795 30/19 402.83 0.0719 171 176.9 12/7 89.64 0.322 76.9
795 54/7 402.83 0.0717 125 167.8 3/0 6/1 85.03 0.336 29.4
795 45/7 402.83 0.0717 98.3 159 12/7 80.57 0.358 71.2
20
Title of Subsection 20.2.5 modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
89
795 26/7 402.83 0.0717 140 134.6 12/7 68.20 0.423 60.5
795 24/7 402.83 0.0717 124 133.1 2/0 6/1 67.44 0.424 23.6
795 36/1 402.83 0.0713 74.7 110.8 12/7 56.14 0.514 50.3
715.5 30/19 362.55 0.0798 154 105.6 1/0 6/1 53.51 0.534 19.5
715.5 26/7 362.55 0.0797 126 101.8 12/7 51.58 0.560 46.3
715.5 24/7 362.55 0.0797 113 83.69 1 6/1 42.41 0.674 15.8
666.6 26/7 337.77 0.0855 117 80 8/1 40.54 0.709 23.1
666.6 24/7 337.77 0.0855 105 66.36 2 7/1 33.63 0.850 16.2
636 30/19 322.27 0.0898 140 66.36 2 6/1 33.63 0.850 12.7
636 30/7 322.27 0.0898 135 41.74 4 7/1 21.15 1.35 10.5
636 26/7 322.27 0.0896 112 41.74 4 6/1 21.15 1.35 8.27
636 24/7 322.27 0.0896 100 33.09 5 6/1 16.77 1.70 6.63
636 36/1 322.27 0.0892 61.4 26.24 6 6/1 13.30 2.15 5.29
Table 20.4. Requirements for steel-reinforced aluminum cables ACSR
Note: Minimum breakdown load presented on this table only applies for ACSR cables with steel
core, GA and MA coating
20.2.6 Particular requirements for aluminum alloy cables (AAAC)
Caliber Min. Caliber Min.

RNcc RNcc 20
Nominal Number of Number of
20 C Breakdown Nominal C Breakdown
Kcmil AWG Area wires load Kcmil AWG Area wires load
(n/km) (n/km)
(mm2) (kN) (mm2) (kN)
1750 886.74 61 0.0378 253 450 228.02 19 0.147 67.3
1500 760.06 61 0.0441 217 400 202.68 19 0.165 59.8
1439.2 729.30 61 0.0459 208 394.5 199.90 19 0.168 59.0
1348.8 683.40 61 0.0490 195 350 177.35 19 0.189 52.3
1259.6 638.20 61 0.0525 182 312.8 158.50 19 0.211 46.7
1250 633.39 61 0.0529 180 300 152.01 19 0.220 46.8
1165.1 590.40 61 0.0567 169 250 126.68 19 0.264 39.0
1077.4 545.90 61 0.0614 156 246.9 125.10 7 0.268 38.1
1000 506.71 37 0.0661 146 211.6 4/0 107.22 7 0.312 32.7
927.2 469.80 37 0.0713 136 195.7 99.20 7 0.338 30.2
900 456.04 37 0.0735 132 167.8 3/0 85.03 7 0.394 25.9
800 405.37 37 0.0826 117 155.4 78.70 7 0.426 24.0
750 380.03 37 0.0881 110 133.1 2/0 67.44 7 0.497 20.5
740.8 375.40 37 0.0892 108 123.3 62.50 7 0.536 19.0
700 354.70 37 0.0944 102 105.6 1/0 53.51 7 0.626 17.0
652.4 330.60 19 0.101 97.5 77.47 39.30 7 0.852 12.5
650 329.36 37 0.102 95.0 66.36 2 33.63 7 0.996 10.7
600 304.03 37 0.110 91.5 48.69 24.70 7 1.36 7.84
559.5 283.50 19 0.118 83.6 41.74 4 21.15 7 1.59 6.72
550 278.69 37 0.120 83.9 30.58 15.50 7 2.16 4.92
500 253.35 19 0.132 74.7 26.24 6 13.30 7 2.52 4.22
465.4 235.80 19 0.142 69.6
Table 20.5. Particular requirements for aluminum alloy cables AAAC class A and AA
20.2.7 Particular requirements for insulated wires and cables
Minimum insulation
Minimum insulation Minimum insulation Minimum
resistance in M
Caliber thickness for TW and THW thickness for THHN PVC thickness of Dielectric test voltage V (rms)
per km of
conductors (mm) conductors (mm) nylon external
conductor
coating in THHN
kcmil or conductors TW type TWH and THHN
TW THW THHN Average At any point Average At any point
AWG (mm) conductors type conductors
2 000 10 35 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000

1 900 10 35 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 800 10 35 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 750 10 35 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 700 10 40 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 600 10 40 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 500 10 40 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 400 10 40 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 300 10 45 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 250 10 45 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 200 10 45 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 100 15 45 - 3.18 2.84 - - - 4000 4000
1 000 15 50 60 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
900 15 50 65 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
90
800 15 55 70 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500

750 15 55 70 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
700 15 55 70 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
650 15 60 75 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
600 15 60 80 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
550 15 65 80 2.79 2.51 1.78 1.60 0.23 3500 3500
500 15 55 75 2.41 2.18 1.52 1.37 0.20 3000 3000
450 15 60 80 2.41 2.18 1.52 1.37 0.20 3000 3000
400 15 65 80 2.41 2.18 1.52 1.37 0.20 3000 3000
350 20 65 90 2.41 2.18 1.52 1.37 0.20 3000 3000
300 20 70 95 2.41 2.18 1.52 1.37 0.20 3000 3000
250 20 80 105 2.41 2.18 1.52 1.37 0.20 3000 3000
4/0 20 70 95 2.03 1.83 1.27 1.14 0.18 2500 2500
3/0 20 80 105 2.03 1.83 1.27 1.14 0.18 2500 2500
2/0 25 85 115 2.03 1.83 1.27 1.14 0.18 2500 2500
1/0 25 95 130 2.03 1.83 1.27 1.14 0.18 2500 2500
1 30 105 140 2.03 1.83 1.27 1.14 0.18 2500 2500
2 25 95 130 1.52 1.37 1.02 0.91 0.15 2000 2000
3 25 110 145 1.52 1.37 1.02 0.91 0.15 2000 2000
4 30 115 155 1.52 1.37 1.02 0.91 0.15 2000 2000
5 30 125 135 1.52 1.37 0.76 0.69 0.13 2000 2000
6 35 135 155 1.52 1.37 0.76 0.69 0.13 2000 2000
7 40 145 170 1.52 1.37 0.76 0.69 0.13 2000 2000
8 35 130 185 1.14 1.02 0.76 0.69 0.13 2000 2000
9 40 155 225 1.14 1.02 0.76 0.69 0.13 1500 2000
10 35 125 180 0.76 0.69 0.51 0.46 0.10 1500 2000
11 35 135 195 0.76 0.69 0.51 0.46 0.10 1500 2000
12 40 150 175 0.76 0.69 0.38 0.33 0.10 1500 2000
13 45 165 190 0.76 0.69 0.38 0.33 0.10 1500 2000
14 45 175 205 0.76 0.69 0.38 0.33 0.10 1500 2000
Table 20.6. Requirements for insulated cables and wires.
20.2.8 Particular requirements for conductors specified in mm2 and other conductors.
When a cable or wire is specified in mm 2, it must comply with the requirements set forth in the
following tables:
Maximum resistance of conductor in direct current Maximum resistance of conductor in direct

at 20 C current at 20 C
Nominal
Nominal
area
Area Soft copper circular Aluminum circular (mm2) Soft copper circular Aluminum circular
2
(mm ) conductors (/km) conductors (/km) conductors (/km) conductors (/km)
0.5 36 - 35 0.524 0.868

0.75 24.5 - 50 0.387 0.641
1 18.1 - 70 0.268 0.443
1.5 12.1 18.1 95 0.193 0.320
2.5 7.41 12.1 120 0.153 0.253
4 4.61 7.41 150 0.154 0.206
6 3.08 4.61 185 - 0.164
10 1.83 3.08 240 - 0.125
16 1.15 1.91 300 - 0.100
25 0.727 1.20
Table 20.7. Requirements for Class 1 Wires (Adapted from IEC 60228)
Area of conductor Nominal Insulation Thickness

2
(mm ) 0.6 /1 /1.2 kV (mm)
1.5 and 2.5 0.8
4 and 6 1
10 and 16 1
25 and 35 12
50 and 70 1.4
95 and 120 1.8
150 2
185 2.2
240 2.4
300 2.6
500 to 800 2.8
1000 3.0
Table 20.8. Minimum insulation thickness (adapted from IEC 60502-1)
91
Maximum conductor resistance in direct

Minimum number of wires in conductor
current at 20 C
Nominal Area Non-compacted Compacted circular Conductor in any Soft copper conductors Aluminum conductors
2
(mm ) circular conductor conductor other shape (/km) (/km)
Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al
0.5 7 - - - - - 36.0 -
0.75 7 - - - - - 24.5 -
1 7 - - - - - 18.1 -
1.5 7 - 6 - - - 12.1 -
2.5 7 - 6 - - - 7.41 -
4 7 7 6 - - - 4.61 7.41
6 7 7 6 - - - 3.08 4.61
10 7 7 6 - - - 1.83 3.08
16 7 7 6 6 - - 1.15 1.91
25 7 7 6 6 6 6 0.727 1.20
35 7 7 6 6 6 6 0.524 0.868
50 19 19 6 6 6 6 0.387 0.641
70 19 19 12 12 12 12 0.268 0.443
95 19 19 15 15 15 15 0.193 0.320
120 37 37 18 15 18 15 0.153 0.253
150 37 37 18 15 18 15 0.124 0.206
185 37 37 30 30 30 30 0.0991 0.164
240 61 61 34 30 34 30 0.0754 0.125
300 61 61 34 30 34 30 0.0601 0.100
400 61 61 53 53 53 53 0.0470 0.0778
500 61 61 53 53 53 53 0.0366 0.0605
630 91 91 53 53 53 53 0.0283 0.0469
800 91 91 53 53 - - 0.0221 0.0367
1000 91 91 53 53 - - 0.0176 0.0291
1200 - - 0.0151 0.0247
1400 - - 0.0129 0.0212
1600 1) 1) - - 0.0113 0.0186
1800 - - 0.0101 0.0165
2000 - - 0.0090 0.0149
Table 20.9. Requirements for Class 2 (Cables)
Note: 1) Unspecified minimum number of wires.
Paragraph 1: Wires and cables for electrical service which comply with what is set forth in the IEC
60228 standard may be accepted if verified by means of CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE.
Paragraph 2: In low voltage electrical installations subject to this regulation, cables or wires
insulated with other materials or technologies are accepted provided that the insulation and the
test voltage are not less than the ones set forth in Tables 20.6 and 20.7, and they are based on a
technical standard.
Paragraph 3: In the absence of accredited laboratories to conduct tests on cables with insulation
for service in systems with nominal voltage greater than 66 kV, a statement of the vendor shall be
accepted (First-party certification), taking into account the provisions of the ISO IEC 17050
standard for that type of certification. Additionally, the statement of the vendor must be
accompanied by the results reported from the type-tests conducted in qualified laboratories.
20.2.9 Installation requirements
Conductors used in electrical installations must comply with the following installation
requirements:
a. The requirements set forth in table 400-4 on section 400 of NTC 2050 (first update) shall
be applied to cables and flexible cords used in electrical installations.
b. Types or classes of wires, cables, or flexible cords not specified in Tables 20.1 to 20.9 of
this technical regulation or in Table 400-4 of NTC 2050 with applications similar to
conductors referred in said tables, which must be installed in accordance with the
requirements established in the NTC 5521 standard on in equivalent standards applicable
to such conductors.
c. Conductors not certified for service on cable trays must not be installed therein.
d. When installing conductors it is necessary to keep the minimum curvature radius

recommended by the manufacturer in order to avoid damages on the screen, insulation or
the conductor.
92
e. Conductors that allow flames starting or facilitate their propagation must not be installed
in spaces where there are flammable materials or indoor areas.
f. Conductors must not operate at a temperature greater than the design of element
associated to the electrical circuit (conduits, fittings, connected devices or equipment)
that withstand the lower temperature, which in most pieces of equipment or devices does
not exceed 60 C as per article 110-14 C of NTC 2050.
g. Electrical conductors with flame-retardant insulation or coating of very low content of

halogens, not greater than 0.5%, and low emission of opaque fumes certified under
applicable standards such as IEC 60754-1-2 for halogens content, acidity, and fumes
conductivity, IEC 331, IEC 332-1, IEC 332-3 for flame retardation, IEC 61034-2 for opacity,
or equivalent standards such as UL 2556 or NTC 4786 , must be used in buildings with
elevators or places with high concentration of people, such as the ones listed in section
518 of NTC 2050 and common rooms of residential buildings.
Cable conductors with low halogen content shall be of wiring type; solid conductors are
not admitted. 21
h. Wires and cables not included in this SECTION or in NTC 2050 are admitted provided that
they equal or exceed the specifications established therein.
i. Copper coated aluminum cables and wires are accepted provided that the coating
procedure follows the ASTM B566 standard or equivalent for that type of products. For
the purposes of calculations, the resistance and current capacity shall be taken equal to
the one of the aluminum conductor, as per section 310 of NTC 2050 or the relevant part
of IEC 60364.
j. Aluminum or copper coated aluminum cables and wires are accepted in end-use
installation when the following requirements are met:
They are made in high-ductile aluminum, that is to say, AA 8000 series. Cables of the 1350
series are not admitted.
The aluminum conductor has been tested and certified as AA 8000 se ries and meets the
2000-hour thermal cyclic test, in accordance with standards such as UL 83, UL 44, UL 2556
or equivalent.
To ensure full compatibility with the system equipment the installation must take into
consideration the effects of thermal expansion (creep), corrosion, and galvanic couple, for
which connectors used with aluminum and copper conductors must be bimetal, certified
under the standard corresponding to the UL 486 series or equivalent standard.
Branch circuits of end-use mains for domestic, commercial, or public service electrical
installations using aluminum conductors must be installed and maintained by qualified
persons, with professional competence certified by SENA or a competences certification
body accredited for the installation of this type of product. The inspection body shall
verify the compliance of this requirement and record its observations.22
Oxidation retardant gel must be applied on every connection.
A warning label must be fixed on the body of the device or e quipment for direct service
with aluminum conductors. The label must have yellow background and black letters, and
it must inform the user that the replacement of such device or piece of equipment must
be made with one fit for aluminum connection.
AWG nomenclature conductors must not be bonded with connectors specified in mm 2 or
vice versa.
20.3 CABLE TRAYS
Cable trays must be considered as supporting elements, not conduits. They may support conduits
or certain conductors certified and labeled for use in cable trays. They must comply with the
21
Subsection modified by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015
22
Bullet point modified by means of resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
93
installation requirements set forth in section 318 of NTC 2050, or IEC 60364-5-52 and product
requirements established in standards such as IEC 61537, NEMA VE 1, NEMA VE 2, NMX-J-511-
ANCE, NEMA GF-1, ANSI/UL 568, or in equivalent standards. Additionally, they must meet the
following criteria:
a. Corrosion protection in accordance with ISO 9227 standard.
b. The cable trays manufacturer must specify the maximum allowable mechanical stress they
may support. Under no circumstance cable trays constructed in steel sheet of thickness
lower than caliber 22 or its equivalent 0.75 mm shall be accepted.
c. Cable trays fittings must be designed to fulfill their function of cables support and
fastening, and they must not have shearing elements that may put at risk the insulation of
conductors.
d. Non-metallic cable trays must be made in flame-retardant, no-fire propagating materials

with low emission of toxic gases or corrosive substances.
e. Electrical conductors must not be installed together with piping for other services in a
single cable tray.
f. Cables exposed to ultraviolet radiation, installed on cable trays, must be resistant to this
type of radiation.
g. Equipotential bonding among different sections of the cable tray must be ensured.
h. Cable over trays in domestic installations and other exceptions defined in NTC 2050 are
not permitted.
i. Conductors to be installed must be certified and labeled for their use on cable trays, and
they must meet the installation requirements set forth under section 318 of NTC 2050.
Filling volume of the tray must not exceed 40% fo r power and control cables, nor 50% for
instrumentation cables, as established in the IEEE 525 and IEEE 422 standards.
Conductors must be labeled in visible parts complying with the color coding.
j. The assembly of conductors of calibers lesser than 1/0 on cable trays may be accepted
provided that their section is greater than or equal to 12 AWG; the temperature d erating
is taken into account as per NTC 2431; that they are separated from cables of caliber 1/0
or greater by a rigid wall in material compatible with the tray; the separation between
struts or rungs of the horizontal tray does not exceed 15 cm for conductors between 2 and
8 AWG and 10 cm for conductors between 10 and 12 AWG. This sort of installation must
not be handled by unqualified persons.
k. Installations on metallic cable trays can be accepted for some special facilities, provided
that fire resistance is certified at 1000 C for 90 minutes as per DIN 4102-12 (E90) or the
cables used are fire-proof.
20.4 VAULTS, FIRE DOORS, FIRE DAMPERS, AND FIRE SEALS
20.4.1 VAULTS
Vaults to house mineral oil cooled transformers, regardless of their power, or dry type
transformers with voltage greater than 35 kV must comply with the requirements of section 450 of
NTC 2050 and the ones listed below.
a. Walls, floors, and ceilings of the vault must withstand fire at least for three hours without
allowing the surfaces not exposed to fire exceed 150 C when the temperature in the vault
is 1000 C. Similarly, door joints must be sealed properly so they preve nt the passage of
hot gases between the wall and the door frame.
b. Vaults must have ventilation systems for normal operation of the equipment and devices
with automatic shut off in case of fire.
94
c. Vaults to house mineral oil cooled transformers, regardless of their power, or dry type
transformers with voltage greater than 35 kV installed inside buildings, require that the
entrances from the inside of the building are equipped with fire doors capable of
preventing fire to propagate from the transformer to other places in the construction.
d. A transformers vault or room capable of withstanding fire during one hour is accepted for
dry transformers with power greater than or equal to 112.5 kVA, with RISE less than 80 C,
and voltage less than 35 kV.
e. Dry transformers with power greater than or equal to 112.5 kVA, with RISE less than 80 C,
and voltage less than 35 kV, do not require fire -resistant doors, provided that they are
installed in a metallic cabinet (cell) with ventilation opening as provided in NTC 2050.
f. Vaults for transformers insulated with high flammable point liquids (greater than 300 C)
must comply with item 450-23 of NTC 2050.
g. Conformity of the vault will be verified in the installation inspection process.
h. Every electrical room where people may be trapped must be equipped with doors which
open outwards, and panic locks.
20.4.2 FIRE DOORS
For the purposes of this regulation, fire doors must comply with the following requirements
adapted from standards such as NFPA 251, NFPA 252, NFPA 257, NFPA 80, ANSI A 156.3, UL 10 B,
ASTM A653 M, ASTEM E152, and EN 1634-1.
a. Withstand fire at least for three hours when the vault houses oil cooled transformers or
dry transformers of voltage greater than 35 kV.
b. Doors must be manufactured in materials that preserve their physical and mechanical
integrity, and dimensions in order to minimize and delay passage of fire or hot gases
capable of causing ignition of combustible materials located at close distance on the side
not exposed to fire.
c. They must not emit flammable and toxic gases both at normal temperature or
conflagration temperature.
d. Temperature on the wall not exposed to fire must not be greater than 200 C in any of the
thermocouples located at distances greater than 100 mm from the frames or unions, and
the mean temperature of these thermocouples must not exceed 150 C ; temperature
measured on the frames must not exceed 360 C when the face exposed to fire has
reached temperatures not lower than 1000 C in a test time of three hours.
e. Doors must be equipped with a panic lock which allows opening the door manually from
the inside with just some pressure although the door is locked. This guarantees that in
case of fire, the door lock will not affect its features and good operation. The size of the
anti panic mechanism must cover at least 80% of the mobile door leaf. The operation of
the lock from inside must be guaranteed for a minimum time of 30 minutes after the fire
starting.
f. Doors must not have cutting or sharp elements, hazardous for operators.
g. Doors must be tested in an appropriate furnace which allows to increase temperature

over a short time to the following minimum values: 535 C at 5 minutes, 700 C at 10
minutes, 840 C at 30 minutes, 925 C at 60 minutes, 1000 C at 120 minutes, and 1050 C
at 180 minutes.
h. Labeling: A permanent metal plate must be fixed on a visible place (unexposed surface)
with the following information:
Name or corporate name of the manufacturer.
95
Dimensions.
Door weight.
Manufacturing date.
i. Doors must have in a visible place a permanent plate with the symbol of electric risk in
accordance to the characteristics set forth in this regulation.
Paragraph: Fire doors that withstand conflagration up to one hour at temperatures of 700 C may
be accepted provided that tightness of the vault is guaranteed to avoid entry of air, extinguishing
the fire in a time not greater than five minutes. To do this, it must be verified that dampers,
intumescent door gaskets, duct seals, or cables inlet or outlet sumps make the vault a completely
airtight enclosure in a time not greater than necessary to prevent the conflagration.
20.4.3 VENTILATION DAMPERS
Ventilation dampers and fuses must comply with an applicable international standard, or a
standard or international recognition or NTC.
20.4.4 FIRE SEALS
Fire seals must comply with an applicable international standard, or a standard or international
recognition or NTC.
Paragraph: When cooling oils for transformers have ignition temperature greater than the one of
mineral oils, times of withstanding fire for vaults and fire doors shall be the ones determined by
international technical standards, or internationally recognized for this purpose.
20.5 BOXES AND CONDULETS (ENCLOSURE)
For the purposes of this regulation, boxes, Condulet, and in general elements used as enclosures
for electric devices must comply with the following requirements adapted from standards such as
ANSI/STCE 77, ASTM A 633, ASTM F1136, DIN ISO 10683, IEC 60670-1, IEC 60670-24, IEC 60695-2-
11, IEC 60998-2-5, NTC 2958, UL 50 or UL 746C.
a. They must be resistant to corrosion. On painted boxes, anticorrosive enamel or coating

must be applied inside and outside the box after machining it. Painting must be verified by
means of scratch test under saline conditions for at least 400 hours. Corrosion
progression on the scratch must not be greater than 2 mm. For galvanized boxes,
corrosion tests must be conducted in accordance to what is established in international or
internationally recognized standards.
b. Steel boxes with volume less than 1640 cm3 must be manufactured on metal sheet at least
0.9 mm thick or its equivalent caliber 20. Metal boxes with volume larger than 1640 cm 3
must be manufactured in rigid materials, resistant to mechanical stress as required. If they
are made of steel sheet, its thickness must not be less than 0.9 mm.
c. Walls of malleable iron, aluminum, tin, brass, or molten zinc boxes or Condulet must not
be less than 2.4 mm thick. Boxes or Condulet in other metals must have walls with
thickness equal to or greater than 3.2 mm.
d. Both metal and non metal boxes must not have deformations during its installation and
operation, for which crushing (compression) and impact tests must be conducted, and in
general the mechanical resistance requirements established in the IEC 60670-1 standard
or equivalent so that their appropriate performance is ensured by addressing their
expectations of superficial, embedded or semi-embedded assembly, their capabilities of
being installed in concrete during the pouring process or in any type of installation other
than concrete; and their possible mechanical or physic-chemical damage by exposure to
adverse temperatures during installation or during concrete pouring and dry out.
e. In steel boxes, tabs used to secure devices such as breakers or power outlets must be
drilled in such a way that the thread has a depth equal to or greater than 1.5 mm and the
type of thread must be 6-32 or its equivalent (diameter 6 and 32 threads per inc h). In
nonmetallic or soft metal boxes, permanence of the thread where devices are secured
96
during the useful life of the box must be guaranteed. Similarly in non metal boxes, the use
of other type of elements to secure devices is allowed provided that it is guaranteed that
they maintain their characteristics during the useful life of the box.
f. Boxes to house devices of larger size and weight than breakers or outlets must have the
anchorage elements of the devices capable to withstand mechanical and electr ical stress
during their life cycle.
g. Minimum internal dimensions of rectangular boxes for the installation of manual switches
or general purpose outlets in domestic or similar installations must be as follows: for metal
boxes a width of 53.9 mm, length of 101 mm, and depth of 47.5 mm; for non metal boxes
width of 53 mm, length of 97 mm, and depth of 41 mm. In any case, sufficient space must
be ensured to house the elements, for which the volume of the box must follow the
guidelines of Section 370 NTC 2050 or equivalent standard.
h. Boxes for installation of outlets or switched outlets with grounding protection must have
as minimum the following internal dimensions: 60 x 100 x 47.6 mm.
i. For boxes of different geometry (octagonal or square) dimensions must be such that the
internal volume established in NTC 2050 is ensured; under no circumstance the volume
will be less than 210 cm3.
j. Pieces of nonmetallic boxes and Condulet which do not carry current must be tested with
glowing wire at 650 C; those intended to support current-carrying pieces must be tested
with glowing wire at 850 C, and surfaces to be embedded at 960 C.
k. Supplements used in boxes to install devices must be self-extinguishing.
a. Boxes and Condulet must be installed in accordance with the guidelines of NTC 2050 (first
update) in its chapter 3, without exceeding the filling percentages on table 370 -16.b, for
which a box with the useful volume indicated on table 370 -1.a must be selected. All
materials or elements that do not correspond to the installation must be cleared and
removed.
b. Boxes used in outlets for lighting devices (lamp holders) must be designed for such
purpose, and the use of rectangular boxes is not permitted.
c. When boxes are installed on walls or ceilings of concrete, bricks, or other non combustible
material, it must be done so that their front edge is located not more than 15 mm from
the finishing surface; when because of construction reasons it is not possibl e to meet that
requirement, supplements, approved for that purpose, may be fitted to the box. In any
case, enclosure, mechanical stability of the device or equipment to install, and safety
distances must be ensured.
d. Boxes must be at level or outstand from the finished surface on walls or ceilings made of
wood or other combustible material.
e. The covers of non used duct inlets must not be removed; nor make additional
perforations.
f. Non used openings of boxes, conduits, ancillary canals, cabinets, cases, or bo xes of the
equipment must be effectively shut off so that they offer protection similar to the
equipment wall.
g. The inside of the boxes must be protected properly during the process of concrete pouring
and dry out in order to avoid loss of galvanization.
20.6 RACEWAYS
Raceways are closed ducts of circular, rectangular or square section, in different types ( conduits,
tubes or set of tubes, prefabricated with bars or cables, underground ducts, among others)
intended to house electric conductors. They also constitute a wiring system.
Wire ways, as well as their fittings and in general any element used to house conductors of
installations subject to this regulation must comply with the requirements set forth in this General
Annex, adapted from standards such as ANSI C80.1, ANSI B1.201, IEC 601084, IEC 60423, IEC
60439-1, IEC 60439-2, IEC 60529, IEC 60614-2-7, IEC 61000-2-4, IEC 61439-6, IEEE STD 693, NEMA
97
TC14, NEMA FG1, NTC 169, NTC 171, NTC 332, NTC 979, NTC 1630, NTC 3363, NTC105, UL 5A, UL
85, UL 94, UL 857, UL 870, UL 1684 or UNE-EN 50086-2-3 as applicable, besides the ones
established in chapter 3 of NTC 2050 first update, as follows:
Folding nonmetallic piping. Section 341
Intermediate metallic conduit (IMC type). Section 345
Rigid metallic conduit (RMC type). Section 346
Nonmetallic rigid conduit. Section 347
Thin-walled electric metallic tube (EMT type). Section 348
Thin-walled flexible electric metallic tube. Section 349
Flexible metallic conduit. Section 350
Liquid tight flexible metallic and nonmetallic conduits. Section 351
Metallic and nonmetallic wire ways (raceways). Section 352
Underground wire ways. Section 354
Wire ways on metallic cellular floorings. Section 356
Wire ways for concrete cellular floorings. Section 358
Metal and nonmetallic wire ways. Section 362
Bus bars or wire ways with bars or electrodes. Section 364
Cables bus or pre-wired wire way. Section 365
Ancillary wire ways. Section 374
a. Parts of wire ways that are exposed or at sight must be labeled with stripes of orange
color at least 10 cm wide to distinguish them from other services.
b. There must be a physical separation when electrical conductors are installed with wiring
or piping for other services in the same wire way.
c. When specific conditions of the installation require to do so, wire ways and fittings must
comply with the requirements established for such condition.
d. Particular conditions of the installation and its environment must be evaluated in choosing
and installing the type of wire way, and apply the most appropriate elements considering
the allowed uses and the prohibitions of elements available in the market.
20.6.1 TUBES OR PIPING
This section applies to all tubes and their fittings used as enclosures of electrical conductors or
wire ways in installations subject to the TREI.
For the purposes of this regulation, the term piping shall be understood as a s et of tubes and their
fittings (unions, bends, connectors). Conduit pipe shall be understood as the metallic or
nonmetallic tube (including those of non-reinforced polymer material or reinforced with other
materials such as fiberglass), appropriate to house insulated electrical conductors, with walls
resistant to mechanical impacts.
20.6.1.1 Product requirements
a. The tubes manufacturer shall inform about the permitted and not permitted uses of its
product.
b. Fittings for tubes and piping must be designed to perform their purpose and they must not
have cutting or scratching elements that put at risk the insulation of conductors.
c. Aspects such as flammability, resistance to impact, crushing under load, water ab sorption,
resistance to heating distortion, tolerance in diameters and thicknesses, and extrusion
quality tests must be verified in the certification.
d. Minimum thicknesses of metallic and nonmetallic piping walls, accepted for electrical
installations subject to this regulation, shall be the ones set forth in table 20.10 with their
dimensions in mm. Minimum thicknesses accepted for reinforced plastic piping are the
ones set forth in the NEMA TC14 standard or equivalent. Non compliance with this
requirement puts the installation at risk. In the event that the tube or its fittings do not
meet these requirements, even if they are certified, they must be rejected and notice shall
98
be given to the competent authority (Superintendence of Industry and Commerce),

reporting the address of the installation, name of person in charge of the construction,
name of the product certification body, and tube brand name.
NONMETALLIC TUBES METALLIC TUBES

Nominal Rigid Rigid Nominal
Rigid
diameter SC H80 SC H40 diameter (heavy (Intermittent Light or
Light
Inches (heavy (Intermittent Inches type) type) EMT
type
and mm type) type) and mm
- 21 3.73 2.77 1.52 - 21 2.64 1.98 1.07
- 26 3. 91 2.87 1.52 - 26 2.72 2.10 1.24
1 - 33 4 55 3.38 1.52 1 - 33 3.2 2.35 1.45
1 - 42 4.85 3.56 1.78 1 - 42 3.38 2.42 1.65
1 - 48 5 08 6.68 2.03 1 - 48 3.51 2.54 1.65
2 - 60 5.54 3.91 2.54 2 - 60 3.71 2.67 1.65
2 - 73 7.01 5.16 2.80 2 - 73 4.9 3.81 1.83
3 - 88 7.62 5.49 3.18 3 - 88 5.21 3.81 1.83
3 - 101 8.08 5.74 3.68 3 - 101 5.46 3.81 2.11
4 - 114 8.56 6.02 3.80 4 - 114 5.72 3.81 2.11
5 - 141 9.52 6.55 6.55 5 - 141 6.22 NA NA
6 - 168 10.97 7.11 7.11 6 - 168 6.76 NA NA
Table 20.10 Minimum thicknesses of nonmetallic and metallic tubes.
e. Folding nonmetallic electrical piping for use in installations subject to this regulation must
comply with the requirements of the international standard IEC 61386-1 or its equivalent,
and prove by means of conformity certificate.
f. In order to prevent that sharp edges may tear the insulation of conductors, the ends of
metallic pipes must be smooth internally and the protrusions of the seam shall be
removed by means of an appropriate process such as deburring.
g. The galvanizing process must be made by means of hot immersion as per ANSI C 80.1
standard or other equivalent, ensuring that the internal surface of the pipe is smooth, with
a galvanized coat no less than 20 m.
h. Pipes must be provided with threads in accordance with the standards ANSI B1.201, NTC
332, or equivalent ones, and they must be protected. Similarly, the pipe must be provided
with a threaded union that couples to the pipe.
i. Aspects such as flammability, resistance to impact, crushing under load, water absorption,
resistance to heat distortion, tolerances in diameters and thicknesses, and extrusion
quality tests must be verified in the process of certifying nonmetallic pipes in accordance
with an international technical standard, a standard of international recognition, or NTC.
For thermally stable, fiberglass reinforced plastic piping, apply the NEMA TC 14 standard
or other equivalent norm.
j. Pipes must be labeled in bas-relief or with a template with the name of the manufacturer.
20.6.1.2 Installation requirements
a. Metallic conductors for accommodating conductors which are not properly protected
against corrosion and that do not comply with required resistance to impact and crushing
shall not be accepted in corrosive environments with permanent humidity or
underground.
b. Non-metallic electrical Folding piping, when their chemical composition may expel gases
with high content of halogens or other substances that may result toxic, must be
concealed within ceilings, recessed ceilings, floors, walls or roofs in buildings of more than
three stories provided that the construction materials used have a fire resistance of at
least 15 minutes, or less if there is an automatic sprinkler fi re fighting system in the entire
building. Similar treatment must be given to flexible pipes used in multi-family housing.
99
c. The gaps between elements supporting nonmetallic pipes may not exceed 1.2 m for pipes
up to 19 mm in diameter; 1.5 m for pipes betwe en 25 and 51 mm; 1.8 m for pipes
between 63 and 76 mm; and 2.1 m for pipes between 89 and 102 mm.
d. Nonmetallic pipes cannot be used in spaces where there are temperatures exceeding the
maximum tolerable by the pipes because of effects of the electrical lo ad on the
conductors.
e. The use of nonmetallic Folding electrical piping is not permitted as support of devices,
earthed directly into the soil, nor for voltages exceeding 600 V unless it is certified for such
service.
f. Nonmetallic piping must not be installed in places exposed to physical damage, or to

direct sunlight if they are not certified to be used in such conditions.
g. Resistance to impact or cross-sectional crushing of nonmetallic pipes used in walls,

concrete flooring, or buried, may not be less than the one specified in international
standards or norms of international recognition for this product and applications.
h. Light nonmetallic pipes (Type A) must not be installed either exposed or in recessed
ceilings. They are only admitted if they are embedded in concrete or materials resisting
fire at least for 15 minutes.
i. In constructions with concrete-embedded pipes, installers must be especially careful so

that pipes do not deform or get obstructed in the concrete pouring process. Before
pouring, it must be ensured that all ends are completely plugged. For nonmetallic pipes it
is recommended to heat and compress the exposed ends in order to ensure the plugs are
not removed until other pipes are coupled to the former, or the connection or pull boxes
are installed.
j. Flexible conduits must be installed in dilation joints in accordance to the requirements of

the Code for Seismic-Resistant Constructions.
Note: Nonmetallic thermoplastic pipes reinforced with materials such as fiberglass may meet the
restrictions of subparagraphs d and e above provided that they comply with the NEMA TC 14
standard or an equivalent norm.
20.6.2 METALLIC AND NONMETALLIC SURFACE ELECTRICAL GUTTERS (RACEWAYS)
Raceways, either metallic or nonmetallic, must comply with the following requirements:
Raceways must comply with an applicable international technical standard, a standard of

international recognition, or NTC, as well as the following requirements:
a. They must be protected against corrosion. Painted ones must have a 400 -hour saline
chamber test.
b. The manufacturer shall specify the maximum allowed mechanical stress that the raceway
may withstand and the effective area of each run. Under no circumstance metallic
raceways will be accepted in steel plate with thickness less than caliber 22 or its
equivalent 0.75 mm.
c. Plastic raceways must comply with the flammability test as per UL 5 A, UL 94, or
equivalent tests established in the IEC standards.
d. Aspects such as flammability, resistance to impact, crushing under load, water absorption,
resistance to heat distortion, tolerances in diameters and thicknesses, and extrusion
quality tests must be verified in the process of certifying raceways.
100
Additional to the requirements of NTC 2050, raceways must comply with the following:
a. Use of nonmetallic raceways is not permitted in: concealed installations (except when
they go through walls), where they are exposed to physical damage, in elevators empty
spaces, in environments with temperatures above the ones certified for the raceway, or
wherever there are enclosed conductors whose insulation temperature limits exceed
those for which the raceway is certified.
b. They must be installed in such a way that mechanical and electrical continuity is ensured
by means of equipotential bonding.
c. They must be solidly assembled with complete enclosure.
d. Abrasion or shearing of the conductors insulation must be prevented by mean s of using

appropriate cable grommets, pipes, or fittings.
20.6.3 PREFABRICATED RACEWAYS OR BUS DUCTS
Prefabricated metallic raceways, often referred to as bus bars, troughs, electrical gutters, bus
ways, or bus bar trunking systems, contain bare or insulated conductors (usually aluminum or
copper bars, rods, or pipes), besides their fittings and bindings.
This system is comprised by the following parts: feed unit, conveyance run, branch run, caliber
adapter, thermal expansion units, conductors transposition unit, splice box, and different fittings
both for construction and assembly. Product certification must verify and cover all parts of the
system.
They are generally used for power distribution in buildings, offices, hotels, shopping centers,
farming and industrial facilities; and they are considered as a complete wiring system.
According to the IEEE 141 standard, bus ducts are classified into four types:
a. Feeding duct. It must have low impedance and minimum voltage drop to required power.
b. Rapid connection (plug-in) duct. It allows easy connection and loads distribution.
c. Lighting duct. It provides electrical power and mechanical supports for lighting or sm all
loads.
d. Ducts for mobile equipment such as hoists, cranes, and tools.
Ducts or raceways with bars must comply entirely with the following requirements adopted from
IEC 60439-2, IEC 61439-6, IEC 60695-2-1, UL 857, IEEE STD 693, or NTC 3283:
a. The system must be covered by a rigid enclosure manufactured in hot dip galvanized steel
or aluminum which protects the conductors from mechanical impacts. It may be used as
protection conductor or grounding provided that it withstands the expected fault c urrent
in accordance with the provisions of NTC 20150 or IEC 60364. The systems enclosure
must ensure electrical continuity along the path in order to prevent accidents for direct
contact.
b. Dielectric properties, including insulation and creepage distances.
c. Heating tests (temperature increase).
d. Effectiveness of protection circuit.
e. Structural strength.
f. Verification of safety distances and creepage lines.
101
g. Resistance to crushing.
h. Verification of resistance and reactance.
i. Verification of insulating materials resistance to heat and fire.
j. Short-circuit level (resistance to short-circuits).
k. Degree of protection or type of enclosure.
l. Resistance to flame propagation.
m. Mechanical operation.
n. Labeling: The manufacturer shall provide the following information as minimum:
Name of manufacturer.
Service of element, i.e., as feeder, for branch, or for lighting.
Type of environment for which the element was designed; in case of being special
(corrosion, outdoors, or explosive areas).
Instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance.
o. Branches must comply with the following characteristics:
Continuity of the protection conductor between the raceway and the branch must be
established before the connection of active conductors, thus ensuring safety of people
particularly during the hot assembly.
Breakers used on branches must minimize impacts of short-circuit.
p. When provisions are required for the removal of barriers, opening of the enclosure, or
removal of pieces of the enclosure (doors, casings, covers, and similar), the following
requirements must be met in order to mitigate the risk of direct contact:
Removal, opening, or extraction must be made by using appropriate tools.

Ensure the insulation of all live parts that may be touched before opening a door, for
instance by using interlocks between the door and the disconnection element of a splice
box so that the door may only be opened if the disconnection box is in the open position
or by including an internal barrier or curtain confining the live parts, so that they cannot
be touched inadvertently once the door is open. In this case, removal of the barrier or
curtain shall not be possible without using an appropriate tool.
q. In systems where total harmonic distortion (THD) in current is greater than or equal to 15%,
all conductors or bars must be sized in accordance with the correction factor demanded in
IEC 60364-5-523 Annex C, as shown in Figure 20.1.
Figure 20.1. Conversion Factor against proportion of harmonics
r. Pieces non carrying current of raceways with bars shall be tested with glowing wire at 650
C, and current-carrying pieces with glowing wire at 950 C as per IEC 60695-2-11.
102
Requirements set forth in section 364 of NTC 2050 must be complied with, especially the
following:
a. In vertical installations where raceways with incorporated bars go through several floors,
each one of them must have a wall of at least 11 cm high around the raceway, at a
distance from the edge of the orifice of at least 30 cm in order to protect the raceway
from liquid spills.
b. When a duct is installed vertically in residential and commercial facilities, its IP shall not be
less than 44.
c. When the label or plate does not specify the support points, they must be installed not
more than 1.5 m apart.
d. Proper spacing must be left between raceways which allow to execute maintenance t ask. In
floor penetrations, spacing must be left in such a way that there are 20 cm left on the
sides and on the back, and 30 cm in the front in order to facilitate operation, maintenance,
and repositioning.
20.6.4 OTHER RACEWAYS
It is permitted to use direct earthing technologies for underground transmission of electrical

power using bonding, tunnels, excavations, or other type of shared structure provided that the
manufacturer has certified the cables for that kind of service, that the installation requirements
are met, and that CIGRE guidelines are followed with regards to general services and requirements
for this sort of application.
20.7 BATTERY CHARGERS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES
Battery chargers for electric vehicles (EV) are classified in accordance with the recharging mode, as
per IEC 61851, as follows:
Mode 1: Connection of EV to mains is made directly by means of a 1 -phase or 3-phase

household socket-outlet including earth. The charger, the control system, and the cord
are part of the vehicle.
Mode 2: Connection of VE to mains is made by means of a 1 -phase or 3-phase household

socket-outlet through a recharge monitor which may have incorporated or not the
recharge cord. Charge is limited to 10 A.
Mode 3: Connection of VE to mains is made through a fixed EV supply equipment (EVSE)

with special outlets fed from a dedicated circuit. The recharge monitoring system is
incorporated to the EVSE.
Mode 4: Typical case of charging stations. The EV connection to mains is made on direct
current, in a short time. The charger is fixed and it has incorporated the functions of
recharge monitoring and protection.
Equipment intended for charging electric vehicles (EV) batteries must comply with the following
requirements adapted from the standards IEC 61851-1, SAE J1772, UL 2594, UL 2231, UL 991, UL
1998, UL 2251, and prove it by means of the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE:
a. Be designed in accordance with voltages normalized in Colombia, to be connected to

household electrical installation, industrial electrical installations, charging stations, or
parking lots.
103
b. The charger must have protection systems that prevent accidents for people or damage to
the vehicle charging system or the mains.
c. Marking and labeling: They must have a plate with legible, permanent marking with the
information listed below. These parameters must be verified by means of testing in the
certification process:
Number of phases.
Source nominal voltage.
Maximum and minimum charge voltage.
Charge rate.
Registered trademark or name of manufacturer in Colombia or importer.
Power consumed.
Power factor.
Harmonic distortion.
The installation must comply with the provisions of IEC 61851-1 or Section 625 of NTC 2050
standards, particularly the following:
a. Electric vehicles battery chargers must be technically revised with the periodicity
recommended by the manufacturer, or at least once a year if the manufacturer does not
determine the frequency of revision in order to validate their functionality.
b. Care should be taken to avoid accidental feed of the EV to the fixed charging point for
modes 3 and 4.
c. Electric separation. An unearthed source supplying an electric vehicle must have a simple
separation.
d. The equipment must be protected from external influences, such as:
Presence of water (EA). When the connection point is installed outdoors, the equipment
shall be selected with a protection grade of at least IPX4 to protect against water splashing
(AD4).
Presence of foreign solid bodies (AE): Ehen the connection point is installed outdoors, the
equipment shall be selected or have a protection grade of at least IPX4 in order to avoid
entry of small objects (AE3).
Impact (AG). Equipment installed in public areas and parking sites shall be protected
against mechanical damages (medium severity impacts AG2).
Similarly, these external influences may be controlled with NEMA 3R protection systems.
Basic equipment protection shall have the following options:
Each connection point shall be protected individually by a differential switch with residual
operating current not exceeding 30 mA, except for the circuits that use electric separation
as protective measure. Selected devices must disconnect all active conductors, including
the neutral.
Overvoltage protection device. Each connection point shall be supplied by an individual
circuit protected by an overvoltage protection device.
Each outlet or vehicle connector must be located as close as possible to the EV parking
place for its charge.
One vehicle plug or connector shall provide charge only to one EV.
The lowest part of any outlet must be placed at a height between 0.5 m and 1.5 m above
the floor.
20.8 ELECTRIC FENCES
For the purposes of this regulation, electric fences must comply with the following requirements
adapted from the IEC 60335-2-76 and IEC 60695-2-22 standards:
104
The pulses generator or controller must comply with the following requirements, being a
fundamental element of the electric fence:
a. Maximum voltage of feeding circuit shall not exceed 250 V.
b. Pulses frequency shall not exceed one cycle per second.
c. Duration of pulse shall not exceed 10 milliseconds for the nominal load.
d. In limited power controllers, the energy per pulse shall not exceed 5 J for a standard
resistance of 500 .
e. Limited current controllers are permitted, provided that it is verified in the equipment that
the pulse duration is less than 0.1 ms and the maximum current is less than 15.7 A for a
standard resistance of 500 .
f. Parts not carrying current in an electric fence controller with plastic casing shall be tested
with glowing wire at 650 C, and parts carrying current with glowing wire at 950 C.
g. It must be labeled and marked with at least the following information:
Nominal voltage.
Warning sign of not to be connected to electric mains for battery-operated controllers.
Duration of each pulse.
Maximum energy.
Resistance taken as standard.
Time between pulses.
Corporate name or registered trademark of the manufacturer.
a. The fence should not cause risks on people or animals under normal operation conditions.
b. Avoid storage or placement of combustible materials along electric fences, which may
cause fires.
c. Barbed wire fences must not be energized by a controller.
d. Every controller must have a grounding system. If resistivity of the terrain is very high, a
ground cable parallel to the fence is admitted.
e. Controllers must have specifications to withstand lighting surges coming from the fence
or mains.
f. Metallic parts must be protected against corrosion.
g. The fence must not be energized from two different controllers or from different circuits
of a same controller.
h. Wiring of all the fence must be setup on insulators.
i. There must be a minimum of 2 m between two different fences, fed by independent

sources.
j. The electric fence must have a minimum separation distance, as shown on table 20.11.
105
MAINS VOLTAGE SAFETY DISTANCE

(Kv) (m)
<1 3
>1 and <33 4
>33 8
Table 20.11. Minimum safety distances of electric fences to distribution circuits
k. The height of electric fences in the vicinity of overhead power lines must not exceed 2 m
above ground.
l. Every fence parallel to a public road must be clearly identified by means of a 10 cm x 20

cm plate with the notice BEWARE ELECTRIC FENCE in indelible printing, written on
both sides. The letters must be at least 2.5 cm in black color over yellow background.
m. The use of electric fences as safety barriers in buildings or domestic, commercial, or

industrial spaces provided that they are not in the reach of children, that they have been
constructed by qualified persons, and that they have the Certificate of Conformity both for
the energizer and the installation.
20.9 INSULATING TAPES
For the purposes of this regulation, thermoplastic tapes of either PVC (polyvinyl chloride,
copolymer of polyvinyl chloride and vinyl acetate) or polyethylene or bands used as electric
insulation on wire and cable splices which temperature does not exceed 80 C in electrical
installations up to a voltage level of 600 V must comply with the following requirements adapted
from IEC 60454-3, NTC-1023, NTC 2208, NTC 3302, UL 510, and ASTM-D 1000 standards:
a. Each roll of insulating tape must be free from telescopic and distortion defects; its edges
must be straight and continuous.
b. When unraveled, the tape surface which does not contain the adhesive must remain
smooth, uniform, and free of lumps.
c. Dielectric strength must not be less than 5 kV for tapes of thickness equal to or less than
0.13 mm or 7 kV for tapes of thickness greater than 0.13 mm up to 0.18 mm.
d. The tape must ensure adherence to steel in accordance with the standard.
e. The tape must not have a banner effect when the heat resistance test is conducted as per
UL 510.
f. The tape material must be self-extinguishable (flammability tests).
g. Labeling. Each roll of insulating tape or its packaging must be labeled in a clear and
indelible manner with the following information:

Type of tape. PVC or PE, and the phrase Electric insulator.
Nominal length and width.
Minimum service temperature (80 C).
Each roll must contain printed identification of production batch or manufacturing date.
Note: Electric insulating tapes of other materials (e.g. rubber) or for voltages exceeding 600 V
must comply with an international technical standard or a standard of international recognition,
and they must prove compliance thereof by means of a CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE.
106
Insulating tapes used in outdoor electrical installations must be of black color. It is recommended
to select insulating tapes used in indoor installations by applying the color coding in this General
Annex.
20.10 PLUGS AND OUTLETS

For the purposes of this regulation, plugs and outlets must comply with the foll owing
requirements adapted from standards such as IEC 60695-2-11, IEC-60884-1, IEC 60309-1/2, UL
498, UL 943, or NTC 1650.
a. Male (plug) and female (outlet) contacts must be designed and manufactured in such way
that they ensure proper electrical connection, and they shall not have exposed energized
pieces under normal service conditions.
b. Outlets must be constructed in such way that they do not accept a plug with different
voltage values or current capacity greater than those for which they were designed for,
but at the same time they must accept plugs with lower current capacities.
c. Outlets must be manufactured with materials that ensure permanence of the mechanical,
dielectric, thermal, and flammability features of the product, its components, and fittings
so that there is not any possibility that as a result of natural ageing or normal use their
performance is altered and safety is affected.
d. Outlets and plugs for direct use of aluminum conductors must comply with the standards
UL 498 and UL 1567 or equivalent, especially the thermal cycle tests.
e. A warning label must be fixed on the body of outlets for direct use with aluminum
conductors. This label shall have a yellow background and black letters informing the user
that replacement of such device shall be made with one fit for aluminum connection.
f. Plugs and outlets must be tested with glowing wire at 650 C on pieces non carrying
current which provide protection against electric contact. This also applies to decorative
rings and frames. Similarly, the glowing wire test must be applied at 850 C to current-
carrying pieces.
g. Outlets must be provided and installed with their corresponding plate or cover intended
to avoid direct contact with energized pieces; these materials must be of high resistance
to impact.
h. Polarized power outlets with grounding must have clearly identified by means of letters,
colors, or symbols the neutral and grounding terminals, and if they are 3 -phase, the
terminals where phases are connected must also be marked with letters. In one -phase
outlets, the shortest flat terminal must be the live one.
i. Power outlets must perform an appropriate number of cycles in accordance with the
provisions of the applicable technical standard, therefore they shall resist without
excessive wear or other detrimental effect dielectric mechanical, thermal, and
flammability tensions that occur during their normal service.
j. General purpose power outlets must be specified for nominal capacities of 10, 15, 20, 30,
50, 60, 63, and 125 A at voltages of 125, 150, 220, or 250 V with 2, 3, or 4 poles and
grounding connection. Current conductive pieces must have the capacity to convey
continuously the indicated nominal current without reaching the highest temperature
107
defined at 45 C under the test criteria of the IEC standard or 30 C under the test criteria
of the UL standard.
k. Parts intended for conduction of current must be manufactured in copper or its alloys but
not in ferrous materials. Exceptions of this requirement are screws, rivets, or similar
elements used only for mechanical fastening of components or tightening of cables, and
pieces not subject to wear.
l. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 5 M both for the power outlet and the plug.
This value is measured between electric points of different polarity, and between those
and any point in the body of the device.
m. Terminals of power outlets and plugs must allow sufficiently safe electrical connection of
conductors in order to avoid overheating.
n. Power outlets with ground fault protection must have a visual monitoring system that
indicates functionality of the protection.
o. Labeling. Plugs and power outlets must be marked with the following features:

Nominal current in amperes (A).
Nominal voltage.
Identification of the corresponding polarities, if applicable.
Power outlets must identify the service by means of the corresponding colors and
markings on their body.
p. Power outlets with insulated grounding for connection to sensitive equipment not
connected to patients must be identified with an orange triangle.
q. Hospital grade power outlets must have as identification a green dot on the outside, and
they must be certified for such service.
r. Power outlets with differential devices that detect a ground leakage current, known as
GFCI, RCCB, or RCBO must comply with the following requirements adapted from the
standards UL 943, IEC 61008-1, IEC 61008-2-2, IEC 61009-1 and IEC 61009-2:
Be certified for such service.

Have a signal that indicates their operation and mechanism to verify their appropriate
operation.
Prevention of false trips in case of being exposed to radio frequency conditions.
The devices must indicate clearly their function and the one of their controls on the
external wiring.
Indicate the nominal trip or leakage current, or equivalent in class.
Note: Plugs and power outlets for special services must prove they are fit for such uses by means
of a CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE where the applicable international technical
standard, standard of international recognition or NTC is indicated as well as the specific scopes of
application.
a. Connection of electrical conductors to terminals of power outlets and plugs shall be

sufficiently safe to avoid contacts overheating.
108
b. Power outlets installed in wet places must have an IP grade enclosure (or NEMA
equivalent) appropriate for the service and expected environmental conditions, and such
service shall be identified.
c. Power outlets and plugs for use outdoors must have an IP grade en closure (or NEMA
equivalent) appropriate for the application and expected environmental conditions.
Outlets installed in places subject to rain or water splashing must have a protective cover
or splash-proof enclosure.
d. Power outlets and plugs with enclosure not lower than IP 67 or their NEMA equivalent
shall be used In environments with water jets (washing facilities). Outlets with ground-
fault protection are not fit for these applications, unless the manufacturer guarantees so.
e. Where there is permanent presence of toddlers, terminals of power outlets must be

protected to avoid children introducing objects and get in contact with energized pieces.
In nurseries, kindergartens, or places of high concentration of toddlers, power outlets
must have protection against contact of energized pieces such as child -proof increased
protection (often referred to as Tamper Resistant), protective covers, or be located at a
height of 1.70 m which does not affect the safety of children.
f. When power outlets are installed in a horizontal manner, the upper contact must
correspond to the neutral. When there is an arrangement of several outlets in a single
product, the upper contact must be the neutral.
g. In places classified as hazardous, power outlets and plugs must be approved and certified
for service in those environments.
h. Power outlets must be installed in accordance with the service voltage level, type of use,
and configuration for which they were designed.
i. Plugs and outlets used in classified areas must be installed in such a way that the required
degree of enclosure is not deteriorated.
j. In places subject to frequent floods, the height of the outlet must be such that it exceeds
the historic flooding level.
k. When power outlets are installed in mains with aluminum conductors, the connection
shall be made by means of a Cu-Al dual compression connector, bimetallic connector, or
aluminum alloy series 6000 terminal board as established in section 110-14 of NTC 2050. If
the plug and power outlet are CO/ALR the connectors mentioned above are not required
as provided in paragraphs 380-14 and 410-56 of NTC 2050 since the aluminum cable is
connected directly to these devices.
20.11 LOW AND MEDIUM VOLTAGE CAPACITORS
For the purposes of this regulation, individual capacitors with capacity equal to or greater than
3 kVAR and capacitor banks with capacity equal to or greater than 5 kVAR used in low or
medium voltage shall comply with the following requirements adapted from standards such as
IEC 60831-1, IEC 60831-2, BS 1650, VDE 0560, CSA 22-2-190, UL 810, UL 945VA, JIS C 4901,
NTC 3422, NTC 2834, NTC 2807, or IEC 60871-1/2.
a. Type of insulation.
b. Voltage tests.
c. Maximum admissible overload at nominal frequency.
d. Operation temperature limit.
109
e. Voltage drop rate.

f. Electromechanical interlock in medium voltage capacitor banks.
g. Capacity to withstand without deterioration admissible over-current level due to
harmonics effect on the mains.
In order to work on capacitors it is necessary to wait for the predefined discharge time once they
are disconnected, in accordance with the characteristics of the equipment. Then, its terminals are
short-circuited and are grounded directly to earth or by m eans of the carcass before starting the
works. Capacitors must not be opened with voltage.
For installations where total harmonic distortion (THD) exceeds 5% in the connection point,
capacitor banks shall be provided with tuning reactance, otherwise activ e harmonics filters must
be implemented.
20.12 CONDUCTORS, TERMINALS, AND SPLICES FOR ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS
For the purposes of this regulation the connectors, splices and terminals used as bonding,
connection, or fastening elements of conductors or for control of the galvanic couple in the
bonding of conductors or terminals where the contact may generate corrosion must comply
with the following requirements adapted from the standards UL 486 A, B, and C.
a. Connectors must comply with an applicable international technical standard, a standard of

international recognition, or NTC, and prove it with a product certificate issued by an
accredited products certification body.
b. It must be ensured that corrosion is not generated with the conductor(s) they connect to.
c. The material of the connector, splice, or terminal must guarantee that changes in
temperature due to the passage of current do not cause hot spots, electric arcs, or false
connections.
a. Two or more connectors or terminals shall not be installed in the same terminal board or
to the same screw.
b. Due to different characteristics of copper and aluminum, pressure connectors or unions,

or welded terminals appropriate for the type of conductor must be used and installed
properly.
c. Terminals and conductors of different materials such as copper and aluminum must not be
bonded, unless that the device is identified and approved for those conditions of service.
d. If materials such as welding, fluxing or composite agents are used, they must be
appropriate for the service and be of a type that is not harmful to the conductors, their
insulations, the installation, or the equipment.
e. The use of corrosion retardant materials, gels, or inhibitors must ensure that the
conductivity of the splice, connector, or terminal is not compromised and that the part of
the conductor near the union does not cause corrosion, nor deterioration on the
insulation dielectric conditions.
20.13 CONTACTORS
These elements must ensure switching of current during all of their useful life. Their
manufacturing and materials must have features that allows them to withstand electrical
110
failures, short-circuits, overvoltage, overloads, for which they must comply with and prove
compliance with the following product requirements in accordance with standards such as IEC
60947-4-2, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947.4.1, JISC 4520, UL 508 or CSA C22.2 SPEC 14:
a. Temperature increase.
b. Dielectric properties.
c. Capability of closure and opening.
d. Operative limits.
e. IP protection grade or NEMA equivalent.
f. Nominal, insulation, and pulse voltage.
g. Nominal operation current corresponding to each utilization category.
h. Nominal frequency.
i. Marking and labeling.
20.14 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
For the purposes of this regulation, transient overvoltage protective devices, often referred to
as surge suppressors or limiter, must comply with the following requirements adapted from
the IEC 61643-1, IEC 61643-12, IEC 60099-1, IEC60099-4, UL 1449, IEEE C62.41-1, IEEE C62.41-2 and IEEE
C62.45 standards.
a. Porcelain-housed SPD used in mid, high, and extra high voltage must have some automatic
overpressure relief device that helps prevent explosion of the equipment.
b. Polymer-housed SPD used in medium voltage must have some external disconnection
device in case of being in short-circuit.
c. Under any circumstance the materials constituting the DPS housing shall ignite, for which
the plastic-housed SPD must be tested with glowing wire at 650 C on parts not carrying
current.
d. In case of explosion of the SPD, the insulating material must not e xpel fragments capable
of harming people or equipment nearby. In low voltage, this requirement may be replaced
by an impact-proof enclosure.
e. Low voltage SPD must comply with a technical standard, such as the ones mentioned
above.
f. Marking. The following are the basic parameters a low voltage SPD must meet, and that
shall be available to the user on the equipment or catalog:
Nominal discharge current, which under no circumstance shall be less than 5 kA per
module, for SPD installed at the beginning of the internal mains.
Nominal voltage, according to the mains on which it will be installed
Maximum continuous operation voltage, which must be equal to or greater than 1.1 times
the maximum system voltage at permanent scheme.
Voltage protection level, which must be less than the basic insulation level.
Paragraph 1: for SPD of nominal voltage exceeding 66 kV, the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT
COMPLIANCE issued by a product certification body may be replaced by the manufacturers written
statement where it declares that the product complies with the requirements of the TREI,
accompanied by the tests conducted in a recognized laboratory.
Paragraph 2: lightning rods or arresters, arcing horns, and contact pins which may be classif ied
commercially as surge protective devices do not require to prove conformity by means of a
111
certificate. The constructor and the installation inspector shall verify that requirements for sizing
and materials provided in Section 16 of this General Annex are met.
For the purposes of this regulation, SPD must comply with the following requirements adapted
from the IEC 61643-12, IEC 60664, IEC 60664-1, IEC 60071, IEC 60099, IEC 60364-4-443, IEC 60364-
5-534, IEC 61000-5-6, IEC 61312, IEEE 141, IEEE 142 and NTC 4552 standards:
a. Every substation (transformer) and every transition from overhead line to an insulated
cable of mid, high, or extra high voltage must have SPD. In all other equipment of mid,
high, or extra high voltage or on low voltage or end-use mains, the need of SPD shall
depend on the result of an objective technical assessment of risk level for transient
overvoltage to which such piece of equipment or installation may be subject. Such
assessment shall be made by the person responsible for the installation design, taking the
following factors into consideration:
Use of the installation.

Insulation coordination.
Density of lightning to the ground.
Topographic conditions of the area.
People who may be subject to overvoltage.
Pieces of equipment to be protected.
b. Coordination of overvoltage protection must be in accordance with the ground connection

scheme (TN-C-S, TN-S, IT).
c. SPD which act as basic protection must be installed in common mode (phase/earth or
neutral/earth) and those acting as complementary protection may be installed in
differential mode (phase/phase or phase/neutral).
d. Figure 20.2 shows the general connection scheme of a SPD in common mode. The goal
shall be to have residual voltage of the SPD almost equal to the one applied to the
equipment, for which distance b if possible shall not be greater than 50 cm, and the
connection conductor between the SPD and the equipment is as short as possible.
Figure 20.2 Typical SPDE assembly
e. In distribution substations within buildings, the designer shall assess and justify the
possibility of installing SPD only on the transition to the underground electricity supply and
not on the transformer.
f. It is necessary to consider when installing a SPD that the distance between its terminals
and the ones of the equipment to protect must be the shortest possible (standards
recommend minimum 50 cm), therefore the inductance shall be minimum.
112
g. For the purposes of safety, the SPD shall be in common mode in the installation, i.e.,
between phase(s) and earth.
h. When SPD are required, preference shall be given to installation on the origin of the
internal grid. SPD are permitted to be installed indoors or outdoors, but they must be
inaccessible to non qualified persons. It is allowed to have one block of set of SPD
protecting several circuits. When several stages of SPD are installed, a zoning methodology
must be applied, and they must be coordinated per energy and not only per current.
i. SPD constructed only with voltage switching technology must not be installed on electrical
power mains.
j. The short-circuit capacity of the SPD must be coordinated with the fault capacity in the
node where it will be installed.
k. In low voltage, the connection conductors of SPD to the mains and earth must not have a
caliber of less than 14 AWG in copper. For mid, high, extra high voltage the connection
conductors to the mains and earth shall not be of caliber less than 6 AWG.
20.15 ELECTRICAL SHOWERS AND TANKLESS WATER HEATERS
For the purposes of this regulation and due to the increase in the use of tankless water heaters
and electrical showers, and the high risk of contact to which people are exposed with those
products, it is required to comply with the IEC 60335-2-35, NBR 12483, or equivalent standards as
23
well as the following requirements.
a. The leakage current shall not exceed 5 mA in water at operation temperature. This current
must be measured with water of conductivity greater than 1000 S/cm at 15 C
(equivalent to 1 k.cm).
b. Metallic clamping pieces in contact with water shall be of a non ferrous material and
ensure corrosion protection.
c. Heating elements and contact terminals must be supported on dielectric material which
must be tested with glowing wire at 750 C. Other nonmetallic pieces must be tested with
glowing wire at 650 C.24
d. Neutral, grounding, and phase(s) conductors must be identified.
e. Metallic enclosures are not accepted in showers.
f. The temperature selector that can be manipulated must be electrically insulated.
g. Labeling and instructions of installation and operation. Electric showers and tankless
water heaters must have the following information in permanent, legible form:
Operation voltage.
Nominal current.
Nominal power.
23
Subsection modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
24
Subsection modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
113
Name of manufacturer or registered trademark.

Warning about the need for grounding connection.
h. The manufacturer must give the user a guide for the proper installation and use of the
electric shower or tankless heater.
a. The shower installation will observe the requirements and instructions provided by the
manufacturer.
b. Electric showers must be fed through a dedicated circuit with capacity of no less than 30 A
for voltages lower than 150 V and not less than 20 A for voltages exceeding 150 V and less
than 240 V with thermo-magnetic protection. The circuit shall have differential ground-fault
protection in the case of showers without shielding. The circuit must not have
interruptions, and it must ensure permanent connection of the shower. Protection shall be
located out of the reach of a person exposed in a wet area.
c. The electrical connection must be water-proof.
d. The circuit feeding the shower must have a grounding conductor which must be connected
both to the installation grounding and the grounding terminal of the shower.
e. To avoid direct contact with the shower electrical pieces housing, the shower must not have
pieces located less than 2 m from the bathroom floor.
20.16 SWITCHING AND ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FOR LOW AND MEDIUM VOLTAGE
20.16.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR DISTRIBUTION MAINS

For the purposes of this regulation, circuit breakers for distribution mains must comply with
the requirements set forth in standards such as NTC 2132, NTC 2133, NTC 2076, ANSI
C37.41 or equivalent ones.
20.16.2 LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC BREAKERS

For the purposes of this regulation, low voltage automatic breakers must comply with the
following requirements, adapted from the NTC 2116, NTC-IEC 947-2, IEC 60898, and UL 489
standards:
a. The general breaker of an installation must have both thermal protection with a bimetallic
element or equivalent electronic device for verification of the current level, and magnetic
protection by means of opening a contact when exceeding the current limit.
b. The manufacturer must provide the breaker trip characteristic curves for appropriate
selection and coordination of protections with other automatic backup equipment located
upstream in the installation.
c. Leak current breaking devices for protection of people against direct contact must have a
nominal differential current of less than 30 mA and its operation time must be in
accordance with Figure 9.1 in this regulation.
d. Mobile contacts of all poles in multi-polar breakers must be mechanically coupled in such
a way that they open and close jointly, either manually or automatically, even if the
overload only occurs on one protected pole.
114
e. Breakers shall have a free trip mechanism.
f. Breakers must be assembled in such a way that mobile pieces can only rest on the closed
position or on the open position, even when the maneuver element is released in an
intermediate position.
g. Breakers must have elements indicating both the closed and o pen position. They must be
easily visible from the front of the breaker, when the latter has its cover plate or cap. For
breakers which maneuver element is released in an intermediate position, such position
must be marked clearly to indicate that the breaker has tripped.
h. External pieces of automatic breakers, made of insulating materials, must not be

susceptible to flame and to propagate fire when conductive pieces in fault or overload
conditions reach elevated temperatures.
i. Automatic breakers must perform an appropriate number of cycles at nominal current and
voltages, in such a way that they withstand without excessive wear or other detrimental
effect the mechanic, dielectric, and thermal stress that occur during their normal
utilization.
j. Automatic breakers must be assembled with materials that ensure permanence of

mechanical, dielectric, thermal, and flammability features of the product, its components
and fittings so that there is not any possibility that as a result of natural ageing or normal
use their performance is altered and safety is affected.
k. Automatic breakers must be tested with glowing wire at 650 C on pieces not carrying
current which provide protection against electrical contact. This also applies to rings and
decorative frames. Glowing wire testing must be applied at 950 C to current -carrying
pieces.
l. Marking and labeling: Automatic breakers shall be labeled on their outer part in a
permanent manner, clearly visible and legible, with the following data:
Corporate name or registered trademarks of the manufacturer or vendor.

Nominal current.
Indication of open and closed positions.
Nominal operation voltage.
Short-circuit breaking capacity for each nominal voltage value.
Line and load terminals.
m. Additional information that must be available in the catalog for the user:
Use as isolating equipment, if applicable.

Designation of type or serial number.
Nominal frequency if the breaker has been designed for a single frequency.
Specify instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance.
Reference temperature for non compensated devices, if other than 30 C.
Number of poles.
Insulation nominal voltage.
Indicate the short-circuit current. It is expressed as the maximum peak current expected.
a. An automatic breaker must be set in a position such that when the feeding circuit is
connected it reaches the line terminal and the outlet is connected to the load
115
terminals. In case of transfers, the plant breaker may be fed through the load terminals
and connect to the bus bar through the line terminals, provided that the breaker
manufacturer allows to do so and indicates such condition.
b. An automatic breaker must have specifications of current and voltage not less than the
nominal values of the circuits it controls.
c. Breaking devices for leakage current to ground may be incorporated in automatic

breakers or placed next to it by forming a set within the panel or board that contains
them.
d. Protection against equipment ground fault must be installed in solidly grounded wye
systems with a ground voltage greater than 150 V but without exceeding 600 V among
phases, per each disconnection device of the nominal 1000 A service line. The sensor
may comprise all of the circuit conductors or only the main equipotential bonding.
e. Each branch circuit of a distribution panel must have over-current protection.
f. An over-current device must not be connected permanently on the grounded

conductor of any circuit unless the opening of the device occurs simultaneously in all of
the conductors in that circuit.
g. Automatic protection for fire-fighting pumps must be against short-circuits, but not
against overload.
h. Over-current protective devices must be easily accessible.
i. Differential breakers against risk of fire must have a differential nominal current equal
to or less than 300 mA, although they can be of instantaneous or delayed actuation.
j. In places classified as hazardous, breakers must be approved and certified for service in
those environments.
k. The installation of reused automatic breakers shall not be accepted unless there are
protocols for type-tests that ensure their functionality, conducted after their utilization
20.16.3 MANUAL LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHES
This section of the regulation applies only to breakers operated manually or with other part of the
body, intended for industrial, commercial, household and similar electrical installations of low
voltage, both indoors and outdoors. The section does not apply to very low voltage switches such
as the ones for use in electronics. It does not apply either to switches used in systems where their
operation is not made manually, such as end of run switches, level, volume, temperature, and
pressure controls, among others.
For the purposes of this regulation, switches must comply with the following requirements
adapted from the NTC 1337, IEC.60669-1, IEC 60947-5, and UL 20 standards:
a. The on and off positions must be clearly indic ated in the breaker body. This requirement is
not enforceable on switches for household or similar uses (housing, commerce, offices).
116
b. Switches shall be designed in such way that when they are installed and wired, the
energized pieces are not accessible to people during their normal use.
c. Metallic covers or caps must be protected by means of additional insulation made by

coatings or insulating barriers.
d. For outdoor use, switches must be protected by means of a water-proof enclosure.
e. Switches must be designed and constructed so that during their normal utilization the
operation is reliable and free of hazard for the user and its surroundings.
f. Switches must be assembled with materials that ensure permanence of mechanical,

dielectric, thermal, and flammability features of the product, its components and fittings in a
way that there is not any possibility that as a result of natur al ageing or normal use their
performance is altered and safety is affected.
g. Distances between pieces subject to voltage which are separated when the contacts are
open; between pieces of different polarity subject to voltage; among pieces subject to voltage
and accessible pieces of insulating materials; grounded metallic pieces, metallic frames
supporting the base of embedding switches, screws or devices for the adjustment of bases,
covers or covering plates, metallic pieces of the mechanism (if it is required that they are
insulated from the pieces subject to voltage), must not be less than 3 mm or they shall adjust
to the requirements of an applicable international technical standard or a standard of
international recognition. Additionally, compliance with this requirement must be ensured
over time as a result of the normal use of the product.
h. The breaker insulating pieces must have a minimum insulating resistance of 5 M between
the poles and the carcass with the breaker in the on position. They must not be susceptible
to flame and propagate fire when the conductive pieces reach elevated temperatures under
fault or overload conditions.
i. Switches must perform an appropriate number of cycles at nominal current and voltages, in
such a way that they withstand without excessive wear or other detrimental effect the
mechanic, dielectric, and thermal stress that occur during their normal utilization.
j. Switches for control of devices must specify the equipment nominal current and voltage.
k. Manual low tension switches must be tested with glowing wire at 650 C on pieces not
carrying current which provide protection against electrical contact. This also applies to rings
and decorative frames. Glowing wire testing must be applied at 850 C t o current-carrying
pieces.
l. Switches for direct use of aluminum conductor must comply with the UL -20 and UL 1567
standards or their equivalent with regards to cyclic heating tests.
m. Marking and labeling: Each breaker shall have the following data in an indelible manner:
Corporate name or registered trademarks of the manufacturer.

Nominal operation voltage.
Nominal current to break.
Paragraph 1: Current or voltage regulators known as dimmers, used as manual switches for
household or similar applications, must comply with the requirements for switches and prove
compliance thereof by means of the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE.
Paragraph 2: Manual low voltage disconnecting switches, also known as blade-knife switches,
must comply with the safety requirements of an applicable international technical standard, NTC,
or standard of international recognition, and prove compliance thereof by means of the
117
CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE. The use of this sort of switches (blades) shall observe the
restrictions given by the applicable standard.
Paragraph 3: A warning label must be fixed on the body of the switch for direct service with
aluminum conductors. The label must have yellow background and black letters, and it must inform
the user that the replacement of such device must be made with one fit for aluminum connection.
a. Switches must be installed in series with the phase conductors.
b. A general purpose switch must not be connected on the grounding conductor.
c. In special environments (classified as hazardous) appropriate switches for the selected

protection technique shall be used.
d. The metallic box that houses the switch must be solidly grounded.
e. Switches shall be provided with their corresponding covers that avoid direct contact with
energized pieces.
20.16.4 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHES, RECLOSERS AND DISCONNECTORS
For the purposes of this regulation, medium voltage switches, reclosers, and disconnectors used
both in manual and automatic way, must comply with the requirements of an applicable
international standard such as IEC 62265-1 (switches), IEC 62271-100 (switches), IEC 62271-102
(disconnectors), IEC 62271-105 (disconnectors-fuse), a standard of international recognition such
as ANSI/IEE C-37.60 (reclosers), or NTC.
In any case, in order to prove compliance with the TREI, the following tests must be conducted as
a minimum:
a. Dielectric (BIL and industrial frequency).
b. Temperature increment test.
c. Mechanical operation.
d. Short-term and peak value currents withstanding.
Neither switches nor reclosers shall be used with SF6 as insulation medium in MV as far as
possible. Shall it be used, it must not have leaks greater than the ones set forth in the applicable
international standard.
20.16.5 PUSH BUTTONS
For the purposes of this regulation, low voltage push buttons must comply wit h the requirements
of international technical standards or standards of international recognition such as IEC 60947-1,
IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4, or UL 508.
In order to distinguish the buttons, the emerald-green one shall be used as start-up button, and
the red one for all shutdown devices.
20.17 STRUCTURES, POLES, AND CROSSHEADS FOR DISTRIBUTION MAINS
For the purposes of this regulation, supporting structures of distribution mains for voltage
lower than 57.5 kV may be poles made of wood, concrete, iron, steel, reinforced polymer fibers
or other materials; as well as metallic towers or turrets. In any case, they must comply with the
following applicable requirements adapted from standards such as ISO 9223, NTC 1329, NTC 776,
NTC 1056, NTC 2222, NTC 1093, NTC 1057, NTC 2083, NTC 1966, NTC 5193, NTC 172, ASTM D 4923,
118
ASTM G 155, ASTM D 2244, ASTM D4923, ASTM D 570, ASTM D 149, ASTM G 155, ASTM D 648, ASTM
A 123, ASTM B 633, ASTM A 653 or ASCE 104.
a. Poles, turrets, and in general supporting structures of distribution mains shall prove
compliance with the TREI by means of the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE issued
by a certifying body accredited by ONAC or by means of the mechanism this General
Annex establishes for specific cases.
b. Poles shall be of standardized dimensions, to wit 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 20, or 22
meters, with allowances of more or less 50 mm. The use of 7 m poles is permitted for the
installation of secondary mains in rural areas. Poles of lower height are permitted for use
in isolated areas with scarce population, where insulated or semi-insulated conductors are
utilized, and for secondary insulated supply lines. Besides, 6 m height poles (truss type)
may be used to support insulated overhead lines from the meter to the building
distribution board provided that their breaking resistance is not less than 250 kgf.
Sectioned poles may be accepted in order to achieve standardized dimensions provided
that mechanical breaking resistance is not less than the required to withstand all forces
acting upon the pole. In any case, compliance with the minimum safety distances set forth
in Section 13 herein must be ensured. On roads, poles must be placed in pedestrian
access areas, not on the vehicle traffic lane.
c. Poles of materials other than wood must be specified and tested for minimum breaking
loads of 5001 N, 7355 N, 10300 N, 13240 N, 17640 N, 19600 N o r their equivalent 510,
750, 1050, 1350, 1800 or 2000 kgf. If specific installation conditions call for breaking loads
or heights greater than the ones established in this regulation, the user shall justify its use
and shall precise the required technical specifications. It is permitted to use structures or
poles in metallic or reinforced polymer materials provided that their breaking resistance
ranges between 250 kgf and 510 kgf generated by the mains under conditions of lower
temperature and maximum wind, and their application is made on places of difficult
access; that in neighboring places there is not concentration of people, and their
mechanical breaking resistance is tested by a laboratory for environmental conditions
similar to the ones on the place of utilization.
d. Poles and structures must be weather resistant, and they must be tested for operation
outdoors.
e. Concrete poles of circular or polygonal section must have a tapering degree between 2
and 1.5 cm/m of length. Poles assembled in bolt-coupled sections are excepted from this
requirement.
f. The pole must have diametrical bores on their upper part, on the same plane at uniform
distances with sizes and tolerances to be crossed by bolts up to 19 mm in diameter. These
bores shall not leave exposed the metallic pieces of the frame. Their number and
distances shall depend on the dimensions of fittings used in the structure. Some of these
bores may have an inclination that allows the passage of ground conductors inside the
pole. As per agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser, there might be
poles with bores for specific uses, or even without them.
g. Concrete poles must be constructed using mixing techniques and materials recognized by
the Seismic-resistant Constructions Code or international technical standards for this type
of requirements. They must not have parts of their frame exposed to corrosion. Depth of
iron shall not be less than 25 mm for use in saline environments and 20 mm for use in
regular environments. For vibrated reinforced poles intended for saline or corrosive
environments, depth of iron shall be increased in 5 mm or the value set forth in an
international technical standard, NTC, or applicable standard of international recognition.
Poles must not have fissures or cracks that compromise the useful life and mechanical
integrity. The manufacturer must take into account the environmental conditions of the
place where the pole is to be installed and take constructive measures in order to prevent
corrosion.
119
h. Concrete poles must have a plate or any other metallic element, which acts as electrical
contact between the steel in the pole frame and the external connection medium for
grounding, of an area not less than 78 mm 2 located less than 1 meter from the ground
reference marking.
i. Hollow poles must be provided with two bores of diameter not less than 2 cm located at a
distance between 20 to 50 cm below the ground line reference.
j. Safety factor for poles, calculated as the ratio between the minimum breaking load and
the maximum tension applied (maximum work load) cannot be less than 2.5. A safety
factor of not less than 2 is accepted for structures in steel or reinforced fiberglass provided
that they have laboratory test results that ensure knowledge and homogeneity of the
mechanical features of materials used and their behavior in the structure.
k. The pole must not sag in excess of 3% of the free length when it is under the action of a
load applied 20 cm from the top, with an intensity equal to 40% of the minimum breaking
load.
l. Gravity center of the pole. The manufacturer must mark with permanent paint the
transversal section where the gravity center of the pole is located. This is done in order to
allow handling and lifting with the least risk possible for the operator.
m. Labeling. Poles and turrets must have a visible plate in bas relief, of if they are concrete -
made, the marking is embedded, located two meters from the embedding signal, with the
following information:
Corporate name of the manufacturer.

Length of the pole or turrets in meters.
Minimum breaking load in N or kgf
Weight of the pole.
Date of manufacture.
n. Poles, crossheads, and other wooden elements used in electrical mains shall be treated
against fungi and other agents that may reduce their useful life. Maximum moisture
content must be tested. Dimensions and bending stress must not be less than the values
set forth in international technical standards or NTC.
o. Crossheads used in electrical mains structures may be constructed in wood, steel, polymer
materials reinforced with elements such as fiberglass or other materials provided that the
following is certified:
Comply with an applicable international technical standard, NTC, or an internationally

recognized standard.
For nonmetallic crossheads, water absorption must not be greater than 6% in a 24-hour
test at 25 C.
Dielectric strength not less than 8 kV/mm for crossheads in polymer materials25.
Flammability test by means of glowing wire at 900 C in accordance with standard for
polymer-made crossheads.
Ageing test under standard procedures. For hot dip galvanized crossheads, the depth or
thickness of the galvanized layer shall be assessed. It shall not be less than the value
established in standards such as NTC 3320, ASTM A123, ASTM 153 or equivalent.26
Paragraph: Concrete poles sill be accepted in any of their shapes (such as cone trunk, pyramid
trunk, or l-section) and construction techniques (reinforced or pre-tensed, vibrated or centrifuged)
provided that they comply with the former applicable requirements.
25
Bullet point modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
26
120
a. Poles or crossheads which have fissures or other abnormalities that may compromise their
mechanical conditions over time, regardless of the type of material, shall not be used.
b. Poles or turrets made of metal or other materials susceptible to corrosion shall be

protected in order to ensure a useful life of no less than 25 years.
c. All poles or metallic structures must be grounded, except for the ones intended for low
voltage.
d. The pole must be embedded at a depth equal to 60 cm plus 10% of the poles length, and
it shall always be verified that there is not any risk of toppling. The manufacturer must
mark with permanent yellow paint the transversal section where such distance is located.
Paragraph: When the pole is installed in places adjacent to high velocity roads, likely to be
impacted by vehicles, the designer or constructor must determine and use the constructive
technology which poses the less risk for passengers and vehicles.
20.18 EXTENSION CORDS AND POWER STRIPS
For the purposes of this regulation, and considering that the use of extension cords and power
strips for low voltage makes them integral part of the installation since power strips are an
expansion of the number of connection points in certain point and t he extension cord is a product
to take the connection point to a place other than the one of the fixed power outlet, their
utilization is accepted provided that there is compliance with the following requirements adapted
from standards such as IEC 60695-2-11, NTC 1650, and NTC 1337.
a. Male (plug) and female (outlet) contacts in power strips and extension cords must comply with
the requirements of subsection 20.10.1 subparagraphs a, b, c, f, h, I, h, and k herein. They must be
designed and manufactured in such way that they ensure a proper electric connection.
Manufacturing shall be in a way that there are not exposed pieces in service conditions.
b. Insulation resistance should not be less than 5 M, value measured between el ectric points of
different polarities and between these and any point in the device body.
c. Pieces of extension cords and power strips not carrying current must be tested with glowing
wire at 650 C and current-carrying pieces shall be tested with glowing wire at 850 C.
d. All outlets in power strips must have the same current range and they must have dedicated
neutral and grounding contacts. Current capacity in each outlet must not be less than 15 A.
e. Polarized extension cords must indicate this characteristic, and they must be connected in only
one way (by fitting the wide plug contact in the wide neutral slot of the outlet).
f. Power strip disconnection and protection devices, if any, shall be sized as the ones of a branch
circuit.
g. The type of conductor (cable or flexible cord) both for power strips and extension cords and
connection terminals must be appropriate for the current capacity of all load connected. Under no
circumstance they may be lower than the one of the caliber 14 AWG copper conductor.
h. The cable or flexible cord used in power strips or extension cords must be marked in high relief,
bas relief, or permanent indelible ink with at least the following information: number of
conductors, caliber of conductor, type of insulation, and maximum allowed permanent current.
i. Labeling on power strips must be permanent, clearly visible, legible, and printed in the outside of
the power strip body. It must contain as minimum the following information: corporate name or
registered trademark of the manufacturer and nominal values in volts (V) and amperes (A).
j. Besides the permanent marking, the extension cord must have a tag or strap with the following
information: Corporate name or registered trademark of the provider, nominal values in volts (V),
amperes (A) and watts (W), length, and prohibitions or limitations of use.
121
k. The extension cord provider must furnish information that allows the user to know the
maximum allowed permanent current without increasing the temperature more than 45 C as per
tests under IEC criteria or more than 30 C as per tests under UL criteria.
Paragraph: Accessories commercialized separately and that incorporate cable, plug, and outlet,
used as feeding cables for devices and equipment must be considered as electric extension cords
and therefore they must comply with the requirements established for them, except the load which
must be the one of the device to be connected.
a. The extension cord or the power strip can only be connected to a branch circuit whose
conductors and outlet have sufficient capacity to withstand all loads connected, in an
appropriate length so that the voltage drop does not exceed the values that affect
connected loads.
b. The user of the extension or power strip must observe the information supplied by the
vendor and not exceed the specified voltage and current values nor incur in forbidden
uses.
c. Accessories (plug and outlets) of extension cords used outdoors must be moisture-proof.
d. Heat concentration must be avoided when using extension cords. This may occur by
leaving the conductor wound or piled, compromising the safety of both the install ation
and its surroundings.
e. Extension cords for decorative or Christmas lights must comply with the requirements
set forth in the TRGSL.
20.19 FUSES
Fuses used in installations subject to this regulation must comply with the requirements set forth
in applicable international standards, standards recognized internationally or NTC, such as IEC
60269-1, IEC 60269-2-1, NTC 2133, IEC60282-1, IEC 60282-2, or NTC 2132
a. Time-current characteristic curve.
b. Type of fuse.
c. Nominal current.
d. Nominal voltage.
e. l2t (ampere2 second)
f. Breaking capacity.
g. Additionally, it must be indicated whether it is a slow, fast, or ultra fast acting fuse.
20.20 FITTINGS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND DISTRIBUTION MAINS
For the purposes of this regulation, fittings used on transmission lines and distribution mains
must comply with the requirements of a technical standard for the corresponding application
and the following general requirements adapted from standards such as IEC (61284, 60652,
60826, 60068-2-11), IEEE (C135.61, 1691, 751, 951, 977, 1025, 1070, or 1217), ASTM (A 633, B 117 or
F1136), DIN ISO 10683, ASCE (10-97, 48, 52 or 104):
a. They must be of a design appropriate for the mechanical and electrical function of their
application.
b. They must be protected against corrosive agents and contaminant elements. To do this,
proven techniques such as hot dip galvanizing, electrolytic galvanizing, or organometallic
coating shall be used. Fittings must show corrosion protection by means of the saline
chamber test in times not less than 480 hours for low pollution environments and 720
hours for environments with greater contamination. The manufacturer must specify the
122
test conducted and information about the use in permitted and non permitted
environments.
c. Fittings must have smooth surfaces and they must be free of sharp edges, that is to say,
they must not have protuberances, burrs, scales, or slags which make coupling difficult,
nor they should have brisk curvature changes or points of concen tration of mechanical
stress or electrical gradient. Fittings used on 220 kV lines or more must be designed so
that they do not promote a corona discharge.
d. Fittings must be supplied and installed with all of their pieces.
e. They must provide information on the minimum breaking load and environmental
characteristics of where they can be installed.
Paragraph: For fittings and other hot dip galvanized products for use in installations subject to the
TREI, the saline chamber test may be replaced by the depth or thickness test of the galvanized
coating, which cannot be less than the one established in standards such as NTC 3320, ASTM A123,
ASTM 153 or equivalent standards.27
a. Fittings subject to mechanical tension by conductors and ground wires or by insulators,

must have a mechanical safety coefficient not less than three with regards to their
nominal work load. When the minimum breaking load is verified through assays, the
safety coefficient may be reduced to 2.5.
b. Retention clamps of the conductor and splices must withstand mechanical tension on the
cable for at least 90% of the breaking load thereof, without causing slipping.
c. Predominant environmental characteristics of the area where fittings will be installed shall
be taken into account in selecting the fittings.
20.21 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND GENERATORS
For the purposes of this regulation, electric motors and generators (electric rotating machines)
either new, repaired, or reconstructed, of power equal to or greater than 375 W must comply with
the requirements adapted from the NTC 2805 and IEC 60034-1 standards, provided that they are
not integral part of a machine, except when they are coupled to a special installation such as
pumps, escalators, elevators, or hoists.
This applies to motors that contain complementary mechanical elements, such as speed reducers
or amplifiers, pumps and clutches, as well as generators coupled to motive machines.
a. Nominal parameters for voltage, current, power, power factor, frequency, speed, and
other electrical parameters such as startup current, admissible temperature, degrees of
protection, and energetic efficiency must be tested in accordance with an applicable
international standard, standard recognized internationally, or NTC, in laboratories
accredited or assessed as part of a certification process.
b. In the case of generators, they must have overspeed and over-current protection.
c. Every electric motor or generator most be furnished with a connection diagram which
must be affixed to the enclosure, and one or several plates with the characteristics. The
plates must be made in a durable material, with indelible letters, and installed on a visible
place in a way that they are not removable. Besides, they must contain the following
information as minimum:
Corporate name or registered trademark of the manufacturer, trader, or importer.
27
Paragraph added by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
123
Nominal voltage or interval of nominal voltages.

Nominal current.
Nominal power, up to 1000 m.a.s.l.
Nominal frequency, or specify it is direct current.
Nominal speed or interval of nominal speeds.
Number of phases for alternate current machines.
IP degrees of protection.
Energy efficiency at nominal operation conditions.
For alternate current machines, the nominal power factor.
Paragraph 1: If the machine is incorporated in a piece of equipment which does not allow
visualization of the characteristics plate, the manufacturer must supply a second plate to be affixed
on a visible spot.
Paragraph 2: If a person other than the manufacturer repairs or modifies partially or totally the
winding of a machine or any other of its components, an additional plate must be provided to
indicate the name of the repair person, the year of repair, and modifications made.
d. The manufacturer must maintain available to the user the applicable information from the
following list:
Startup current.
Serial number of the machine or identification mark.
Year of manufacturing.
Numeric reference of standards applied.
Admissible overspeed.
Maximum admissible ambient temperature.
Minimum admissible ambient temperature.
Altitude above sea level for which the machine is designed.
Total mass of the machine in kg.
Operation and startup torques.
Work position (vertical or horizontal).
Thermal classification or admissible heating (maximum external nominal temperature).
Class of nominal voltage scheme. If it is an interval between voltage A and voltage B, it

must be labeled A-B. If it is for dual voltage, it should be labeled as A/B.
For hydrogen-cooled machines, hydrogen pressure at nominal power.
For alternate current machines, the nominal frequency or interval of nominal frequencies.
For alternate 3-phase current machines with more than three connection points,
connection instructions by means of a scheme.
For direct current machines with independent excitation or bypass excitation, and for
synchronous machines, the nominal excitation voltage and nominal excitation current.
For wound rotor induction motors, the voltage between open circuit rings and nominal
current of the rotor.
For direct current motors with whose induced is expected to have supply by means of
static power converters, the identification code of the static power converter.
124
For motors which do not exceed 5 kW, the nominal form factor and nominal alternate
voltage in the input terminals of the static power converter if the former exceeds the
direct nominal voltage of the induced circuit of the motor and noise levels.
e. The manufacturer shall give the user the minimum indications and recommendations for
assembly, operation, and maintenance of the machine.
20.21.2 Installation requirements.
a. The user must follow the assembly, operation, and maintenance indications and
recommendations for the machine given by the manufacturer, including the position.
b. Only motors approved and certified for service in places classified as hazardous shall be
used in such environments.
c. The machine work position must be maintained (horizontal or vertical) as per indications
of the manufacturer.
d. Carcasses of electric rotating machines shall be solidly grounded. For mobile generators,
there must be a monitored grounding system.
e. The use of open motors is strictly prohibited in places accessible to people or animals.
f. The capacity of the machine must be calculated taking into account the correction per
altitude above the sea level of the place where it will operate.
g. The motor or generator must be appropriate for the kind of use and environmental
conditions of the place it operates.
h. Systems actuated by electric motors which imply mechanical risks for people must have an
emergency stop system. Similarly, these emergency stops must be installed on conveyor
belts, amusement parks, and other machines that involve rollers and shearing elements.
i. Every motor with nominal current equal to or greater than 3 A must have a dedicated
thermo-magnetic protection (exclusive for the motor).
Paragraph: For electric motors or generators with power greater than 800 kW, the CERTIFICATE
OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE may be substituted by the statement of the vendor where it is specified
that the motor complies with this regulation; indicate the technical standards applied and the
results of typical and routine tests conducted by a laboratory. This self certification shall be in strict
compliance with the criteria of the international standard IEC 17050. Similar treatment shall be
given to reused or remanufactured motors or generators of power greater than 200 kW.
20.22 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC PANELS.
Solar photovoltaic panels to provide electric power to household or similar installations and public
establishments, must comply with the requirements of an applicable international standard,
standard recognized internationally, and prove it by means of a CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT
COMPLIANCE issued by an accredited certification body.
The electrical installation and assembly of the panels shall be made in accordance with Section 690
of NTC 2050, by a competent professional who shall declare the compliance with the TREI.
20.23 ELECTRIC PANELS AND CELLS

For the purposes of this regulations, products known as boards, cabinets, panels, or cells shall be
denominated panel when they are for low voltage and cells for medium voltage. If the panel
contains the main protection and the main equipotential bonding, it is called main switchboard.
They must comply with the requirements set forth in this section, as applicable.
125
20.23.1 LOW VOLTAGE BOARDS

Low voltage boards are classified as per Table 20.12, and they must comply with the applicable
requirements according to their type, which were adapted from referenced standards.
TYPE OF BOARD IEC STANDARD UL STANDARD NTC
Distribution 60439-3 67 3475
61439-1/3 2050
Power 60439-1 891 3278
61439- 1 / 2 508
For temporary installations 60439-4 3278
61439 1 / 4 2050
For public distribution mains 60439-5 3278
61439 1/5 2050
Table 20.12 Reference standards to conduct tests on switchboards
Distribution boards may contain automatic plug-in or bolt-on switches.

20.23.1.1 Conditions of the enclosure (also called cabinet or box)
Enclosures intended for switchboards must comply with the following requirements adapted
from standards such as IEC 60529, IEC 60695-2-11, IEC 60695-2-5, IEC 61439-1, IEC 62208, IEC
62262, UL 50, UL 65, NTC 1156, ANSI/NEMA-250 or ASTM 117.
a. Boards must be manufactured in such way that hazardous energized pieces shall not be
accessible, and accessible energized pieces shall not be hazardous both in normal
operation and in case of failure.
b. Both the housing and the cover of a board must be constructed in steel sheet whose
thickness and coating shall resist mechanical, electrical, and thermal strains for which it
was designed.
c. The enclosure of the distribution board shall be only accessible from the front. When it is
metallic, it must be manufactured in steel sheet of a minimum thickness of 0.9 mm for
boards up to 12 circuits and in steel sheet of a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm for boards
from 13 up to 42 circuits.
d. Enclosures shall have a degree of protection against solids not larger than 12.5 mm; liquids
in accordance with the place of operation, and direct contact minimum IP 2XC or its NEMA
equivalent.
e. Board enclosures must resist the effects of moisture and corrosion, verified by means of
tests under scratching in saline environment for a minimum of 240 hours. Corrosion
progression on the scratch must not be greater than 2 mm. For corrosion environments,
the test duration may not be less than 400 hours. The manufacturer shall indicate the type
of test conducted.
f. Enclosures must be resistant to external mechanical impacts of minimum IK 05 degree.
g. Chemical compounds used in the preparation of paints to be applied on the boards must
not contain TGIC (triglycidyl isocyanurate).
h. Construction of distribution boards with plastic enclosures or a combination of metal -

plastic enclosures is permitted, provided that they are self-extinguishable. Pieces not
carrying current which provide protection against direct contact must be tested with shall
be tested with glowing wire at 650 C during 30 seconds, and insulating pieces supporting
metallic elements, tested with glowing wire at 950 C.
20.23.1.2 Current conductive pieces
126
The parts of the boards intended to the conduction of current in normal scheme shall comply with
the following requirements:
a. Fixed pieces shall be made of silver, silver alloy, copper, copper alloy, aluminum, or other
metal that has been proved useful for this application. Neither iron nor steel shall be used
in a piece that must conduct current in normal scheme.
b. Bus bars shall be rigidly fastened to the enclosure structure, on insulating materials for the
maximum voltage they may receive. Coated steel resistant to corrosion or bronze bolts
and nuts must be used in order to secure the pressure connectors to the bus bars. Coating
shall be of cadmium, zinc, tin, or silver; copper and brass are not accepted as coatings for
support bolts, nuts, nor terminals of connection plugs. Every terminal shall have steel
support bolts in connection to a non-ferrous terminal plate.
c. The current capacity of phase bus bars shall not be less than the maximum load current
projected or the capacity of the board feeding conductors, except if there is local
protection incorporated. All bus bars, including the neutral and insulated grounding shall
be assembled on Insulators.
d. The phase arrangement of bus bars in three-phase boards shall be A, B, C, taken from the
front to the posterior part; from the upper part to the lower; or from left to right seen
from the front of the board.
e. All external parts of the panel must be solidly grounded by means of protection
conductors and their terminals must be identified with the symbol for grounding.
f. All internal elements that support electric equipment must be in conditions of

withstanding the electrodynamics strains produced by the system fault currents.
Dimensions, enclosures, and barriers must allow sufficient space for housing cables
terminals and bends.
g. Parts manufactured with insulating materials shall be resistant to heat, fire, and the
appearance of leakage paths. The door or barrier which covers the automatic switches
shall allow their disassembly only by means of using a tool, since energized elements are
left accessible (direct contact) upon its removal.
h. Pieces of the boards intended for the conduction of current in normal scheme must
ensure that the conditions of materials used in samples subjec t to certification tests are
maintained. To do this, the following parameters must be verified:
Minimum copper content, or type of aluminum alloy.

Tensile strength (calibrated status), minimum.
Conductivity (calibrated status), minimum.
Minimum hardness.
Folding angle.
Modulus of elasticity or Youngs modulus.
20.23.1.3 Wiring terminals
Wiring terminals of boards must comply with the following requirements:
a. Each conductor installed in the board must be connected by means of a terminal, either
on pressure or fastened by a screw.
127
b. Connections by means of the comb system are permitted in boards, both for power and
control, provided that the conductors and insulations comply with the requirements set
forth in this regulation.
c. Each branch circuit shall have an outlet terminal for the connection of required neutral or
grounding conductors.
d. The board shall be provided with insulated bus bars for neutral and insulated grounding
conductors, both for the feeding circuit and the branch circuits. The main equipotential
bonding shall only be installed in the main switchboard.
e. The board shall have a bus bar for the feeder grounding connection, with sufficient outlet
terminals for branch circuits.
f. Wiring of the board shall comply with the color code established in this regulation.
20.23.1.4 Labeling and instructions
A switchboard must have as a minimum the following information affixed in a clear, permanent,
and visible manner:
a. Nominal operation voltage(s).
b. Nominal feed current.
c. Number of phases.
d. Number of wires.
e. Corporate name or registered trademark of manufacturer, dealer, or importer.
f. Symbol of electric hazard.
g. Chart to identify circuits.
h. Indicate, in a visible manner, the position that the levers for action of switches shall have
when closing or opening the circuit.
i. Every switchboard shall have its corresponding updated one-line diagram.
Additional to labeling, the board manufacturer shall have the following information available to
the user, as a minimum:
a. Degree of protection or type of enclosure.
b. Original one-line diagram of the board.
c. Type of environment for which it was designed, in case of being special (corrosive,
outdoors, or explosive areas).
d. Installation, operation, and maintenance instructions.
20.23.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CELLS
Medium voltage cells must comply with the requirements of an applicable international standard
such as IEC 62271-1, IEC 62271-200, IEC 60695-11-10, a standard recognized internationally such
as UL 347, UL94, ANSI- IEEE C37, NTC 3309 or NTC 3274. In any case, they must ensure compliance
with the following requirements:
128
a. Switching equipment cells must allow to control the effects of an arc (overpressure,
mechanical and thermal stress) by evacuating gases upwards, to the sides, backwards, or
to the front if it does that at least two meters from the floor.
b. Insulators must comply with the flammability test in medium voltage cells.
c. Doors and covers must have a lock to keep them closed.
d. Pieces likely to detach, such as sheets or insulating materials must be secured firmly.
e. When an arc occurs, it must not pierce accessible external pieces.
f. There must be effective connections to the grounding system.
g. Labeling. The cell must have specified the classification of internal arc resistance and the
labeling requirements set forth in item 20.23.1.4 of this General Annex.
h. Current conductive pieces shall comply with subparagraph h, item 20.23.1.2 herein.
Paragraph 1: Heat exchange must be facilitated in cells of dry type transformers, therefore
subparagraph a) above does not apply to this type of cells.
Paragraph 2: Cells with enclosures that have specifications lower than LV boards in item 20.23 .1.1
herein will not be accepted under any circumstance.
20.23.3 CERTIFICATION OF SWITCHBOARDS AND CELLS
The following parameters must be verified as a minimum by means of tests for the purposes of the
certification of low voltage switchboards and medium voltage cells:
a. IP protection grade not less than 2XC (or its NEMA equivalent) and stated IK.
b. Temperature increase.
c. Dielectric properties.
d. Insulation and leakage distances.
e. Effectiveness of the protection circuit.
f. Verification of mechanical operation of blocking systems, doors, locks, or other elements

intended to be operated during the normal use of the switchboard.
g. Enclosure resistance to corrosion.
h. Resistance to abnormal heat and fire of insulating equipment.
i. Measures to prevent direct contact (bars, warning signals, etc.)
j. Resistance to short-circuit.
k. Internal arc (only for the case of medium tension cells).
Paragraph 1: The certification body may accept that these tests are replaced by simulations
conducted by means of calculations, computing programs, or similar ways provided that the model
used for the simulation is supported properly by technical literature and has bee n validated by a
testing laboratory with accredited electric assays or that it is assisted by a laboratory in a
university with an approved electrical engineering program. This exception would be in effect for a
term not exceeding five years, or less if t here are any laboratories in Colombia which enable to do
short-circuit and internal arc tests. The certification body shall ensure that the entity developing
the simulation complies with conditions of qualification, transparency, and independence required
in a certification process.
129
Likewise, simulations using the procedure set forth in the standard IEC 61439-1 Attachment D, or
other equivalent standard. For the test, a sample of the assembly or of the pieces of the assembly
must be taken to verify whether the design complies with the indispensable requirements of a
standard assembly.
The certification body must specify in the Conformity Certificate whether it is issued based on the
simulation or in the short-circuit and internal arc testing.
Paragraph 2: The certificate of conformity only for the enclosure shall not be accepted as
certificate of conformity with the TREI of the cell or switchboard.
Paragraph 3: Tests on switchboards shall be conducted observing the IEC 61439 -1 standard or
equivalent, and the standard they refer to for each type of test. The short -circuit resistance test
applies to cells and switchboards. The following products are exempted from the test in
accordance with Subsection 10.11.2 of IEC 61439-1: a) switchboards with short-time withstand
current or rated short circuit current not exceeding 10 kA r.m.s., b) switchboards protected by
current-limiting devices having cut-off current not exceeding 17 kA; c) switchboards to be
connected to transformers whose rated power does not exceed 10 kVA. The requirements of the
short-circuit and internal arc testing (or in their absence, the simulations of such tests) shall be
enforceable from January 1st, 2015. 28
20.23.4 INSTALLATION OF CELLS AND SWITCHBOARDS
Cells and electric switchboards are pieces of equipment with frequent risk of electric arc. The
following provisions must be applied in order to minimize that risk:
a. Installation and commissioning of cells and switchboards shall be executed by qualified

professionals.
b. When the cell or switchboard is designed for use indoors, the equipment shall be stored in
vertical position, in a dry, well ventilated place protected from rain, extreme temperatures
and dust. This in order to avoid deterioration of characteristics particular to the originally
tested product.
c. Switchboards with DIN rail mounting system may not exceed the occupation level defined
by the manufacturer.
d. The floor must be flat, and maximum level deviations shall be the ones allowed by the
manufacturer.
e. Except the manufacturer specifies another value, the distance from the cell to the ceiling
shall not be less than 60 cm.
f. Grounding bars of a set of modular sections must be interconnected by using bolts and
nuts at least of grade or class 5 with appropriate torque.
g. Cables shall never go through bus bars.
h. The grounding bus bar must be connected first to the grounding grid in order to ensure
protection of personnel.
i. Installation of cable ties shall not affect the IP protection grade.
j. Terminals shall be used to make connections between cables and bus bars. If the
connection is made with aluminum cable, bimetallic connectors shall be used.
k. When the connection involves several bars per phase, connectors shall be placed facing
each other when copper spacers between the bars.
l. When the connections go directly to the equipment terminals, torques specified by the
manufacturer must be applied.
28
130
m. Safety distances defined by the manufacturer shall be observed in order to ensure the
proper operation of the equipment.
n. Cables of the control system shall be wired in raceways under the following criteria:
Raceways must be secured at least every 600 mm.

Raceways must not be filled more than 70% of their capacity.
Connections shall be made in terminal boards.
All wires of a conductor must be inserted in the hole of the terminal.
Adjust tightly, taking care not to cut the wires.
Conductors must be armored when they are for communication signals, and armoring
shall be grounded.
o. The following verifications must be made:
Functionality of the ventilation grids, lateral covers, and doors.

Identifications of switchboard, control and power conductors.
Remove dust.
Measure equipotential bonding among conductive pieces of the switchboard.
Verify mechanical interlocks of the switchboard equipment.
Inspect visually all of the switchboard structure, specially the paint. Do retouches if
necessary.
Grease slightly electrical contacts (contact grease).
Remove foreign objects that may hinder operation of the switchboard (remains of cables,
loose nuts and bolts, tools, etc.).
Carry out insulation tests: Measuring shall be made using a megohmmeter at a voltage of
at least 500 Vcc. The insulation resistance value shall not be less than 1000 /V.
Energizing may take place after completing these steps and leaving evidence records
thereof.
p. Installation of switchboards in public areas shall observe the guidelines of the municipality
urban planning, and under no circumstance they shall generate risks for the general
public.
q. It is forbidden to install switchboards in walls adjacent to steps on staircases, or on spaces

that contradict the requirements set forth in NTC 2050.
20.24 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
Transfer switches used in emergency systems and circuits supplies shall be incorporated in an
enclosure that complies with the requirements of Subsection 20.23.1.1 of this General
Attachment. Their components and wiring must comply with international technical standards,
standards recognized internationally or NTC applicable to this type of product such as UL 1008, IEC
60497-6-1 or equivalent.
20.25 TRANSFORMERS
For the purposes of this regulation, electric transformers with capacity equal to or greater than 3
kVA, either new, repaired, or reconditioned shall comply with the following requirements adapted
from the standards IEC 60076-1, ANSI C57 12, NTC 3609, NTC 1490, NTC 1656, NTC 3607, NTC
3997, NTC 4907, NTC 1954, or NTC 618.
a. Transformers shall have a grounding device to connect solidly the tank, cabinet, neutral,
and core in accordance with the requirements of applicable technical standards and the
characteristics required by their operation.
b. All liquid immersed transformers with an external bypass switch for operation without
voltage must have a notice, to wit, operate without voltage.
131
c. All liquid immersed transformers must have an automatic overpressure relief device,
easily replaceable, which must operate at a pressure lower than the maximum withstood
by the tank.
d. Distribution transformers must have a lifting device which must be designed to provide a
minimum safety factor of five for oil-cooled transformers and three for dry transformers.
Work stress is the maximum developed on lifting devices by the static load of the
completely assembled transformer.
e. Supporting devices to be hung on poles must be designed to provide a safety factor of five,
when the transformer is supported on a vertical plane from the upper device.
f. The maximum noise level (LPA noise pressure) shall not exceed the levels set forth in
applicable technical standards.
g. The manufacturer shall give the user the minimum indications and recommendations for
assembly and maintenance of the transformer.
h. Labeling. Every transformer must have a plate manufactured in corrosion-resistant

material, affixed on a visible place, that contains the following data in an indelible form.
Brand or corporate name of the manufacturer or provider.

Serial number given by the manufacturer.
Year of manufacture.
Type of transformer.
Number of phases.
Nominal frequency.
Nominal power, in accordance with type of cooling.
Nominal voltage, number of bypasses.
Nominal currents.
Short-circuit impedance.
Total weight in kilograms.
Connection group.
Connections diagram.
i. The following additional information must be available to the user (catalog):
Symmetric short-circuit current.

Maximum allowable duration of symmetric short-circuit.
Cooling methods.
Type of insulation.
Insulating liquid.
Volume of insulating liquid.
Basic insulation level BIL of each winding.
Maximum allowable noise levels in transformers and manner of measurement.
Total energy losses at nominal conditions.
Paragraph 1: : If a person other than the manufacturer repairs or modifies partially or totally the
winding of a transformer or any other of its components, an additional plate must be provided to
indicate the name of the repair person, the year of repair, and modifications made.
Paragraph 2: Exceptions in the certification procedure. The manufacturer or provider of unique-
manufacture transformers, transformers of power greater than 800 kVA, or whom repairs or
modifies a transformer may replace the certificate issued by a product certification body for the
statement of provider or repairer taking into account the requirements of the ISEO-IEC-NTC 1750
standard. To do this, duly certified quality products must be used in accordance with the
requirements set forth in this regulation, as well as conduct the relevant tests and include within
their test protocols the information corresponding to the verification of features required in the
TREI, proved as applicable by means of calculations, test-types, and routine assays.
132
Paragraph 3: Owners of rewound transformers must have available upon request of SIC or other
competent authority the test protocols used (e.g., energy losses, among others).
a. When the transformer is not of a submersible type and it is housed in underground

chambers subject to flooding, these must be duly weatherproofed in order to avoid
humidity, and if possible they must be separated from the maneuvers chamber. When the
underground chamber is not impermeable, a submersible transformer and maneuver box
shall be installed.
b. Oil-cooled transformers shall not be installed on levels or floors that are above or adjacent
to places of living, offices, and in general places intended for permanent occupation of
people, which may be subject to fire or damage caused by oil spills. Tra nsformers with
more than 2000 gallons of oil shall be installed at least 9 m away from the walls of a
substation. If this condition is not met, fire resistant walls must be placed in accordance
with the NFPA 255 standard. If oil volume is between 500 and 2000 gallons, the distance
may be reduced to 7 m, and if such distance cannot be met, a 2-hour fire resistant wall must
be placed.
c. When an oil-insulated transformer requires installation in vault (in accordance with section
450 of NTC 2050) the vault must ensure that it will not allow ingress of air at temperatures
above 150 C in order to extinguish the fire by oxygen deprivation. The vault must comply
with the requirements set forth in Subsection 20.4.1 herein.
d. Transformers and bus-bars of the secondary winding when used in end-use installations,
shall be installed in accordance to what is set forth in section 450 of NTC 2050.
e. Every transformer with nominal tension exceeding 1000 V shall be protected at least in the
primary with over-current protections. When fuses are used, these must be certified and
selected according to an appropriate protections coordination.
f. The noise level in the external part of the enclosure shall not exceed the values set forth in
environmental provisions on the matter, as per exposure to persons.
20.26 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
For the purposes of this regulation, UPS must comply with the provisions of NTC 2050 for
their installation, and meet the product requirements of an international standard such
as IEC 620-40-3, or a internationally recognized standard such as UL-1778.
UPS must have the following indication on their marking, among other data:
a. Number of phases (unless it is a one-phase UPS).
b. Nominal output power in W of kW.
c. Apparent output power in VA or kVA.
d. Nominal output voltage.
e. Nominal output current.
f. Nominal output frequency.
When units are installed in parallel, special attention must be given t o their synchronizing as well
as the voltage return from allowed load and overload.
20.27 REGULATED VOLTAGE UNITS (VOLTAGE REGULATORS)
133
For the purposes of this regulation, only low voltage regulators of power greater than or equal to
500 VA are covered. Regulators must comply with the requirements of an applicable
international technical standard, a standard recognized internationally, or NTC 2540.
20.28 PRODUCTS USED IN SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS
Products used in this type of installations (those located in environments classified as hazardous,
with high concentration of people, or that feed complex systems or equipment), that is to say , the
ones set forth in Section 28 herein and discussed with greater detail in chapters 5, 6, and 7 of NTC
2050, must comply with an international technical standard or a standard recognized
internationally applicable both to the product and the installation condition. And it must be
proved by means of the Certificate of Conformity.
In order to confirm whether a product is appropriate for the special conditions, the installation
inspector must verify that by comparing the scope of the technical standard i n which the
CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE is supported against the special conditions in which the
installation will operate.
20.29 LAMP HOLDERS OR BULB SOCKETS
Although bulb sockets used in installations subject to this regulation are associated to the lighting
requirements set forth in the Technical Regulation for General and Street Lighting - TRGSL, the
requirements for the product and installation are related to safety and prevention of electrical
risks. Consequently, they must comply with the following requirements and prove compliance
with the TREI.
a. Sockets for bulbs with threaded caps must be of the E 27 type and comply with the
dimensions and tolerances provided in the IEC 60061 standard. For street or industrial
lighting, sockets may be accepted for bulbs with E 40 or E 39 caps (Mogul screw).
b. External pieces of non ceramic insulating material which provide protection against
electric shock must be subject to glowing wire test at 650 C for 30 s. Any flame or
incandescence of the sample shall be extinguish within 30 s after removing the wire, a nd
any dropping flame shall not ignite a piece of 5-ply tissue paper extended horizontally 200
mm + 5 mm below the prototype being tested, as specified in paragraph 6.86 of the ISO
4046 standard.
c. Pieces of insulating material that keep live parts in position shall be subject to the needle
flame test as per IEC 395-2-1. If it is necessary to remove certain pieces of the bulb socket
to conduct the test, it must be ensured that the test conditions do not deviate significantly
from the ones existing in normal use.
d. The bulb socket must have mechanical resistance to withstand a torsion of at least 2.26 N
due to the insertion of the bulb. Non conductive material shall be self -extinguishable,
proved by means of the glowing wire test at 650 C during 30 seconds , without
maintaining the flame once the hot wire is removed.
e. The cap and central contact of the bulb socket and other current -conducting pieces shall
be of a non-ferrous material, resistant to corrosion.
a. Bulb sockets must be installed observing the requirements set forth in Section 410 of NTC
2050, ensuring that energized pieces are not exposed. To do this, it must be verified that
the phase is connected to the socket central terminal and the neutral is co nnected to the
threaded sleeve.
134
b. The placement of the bulb socket must ensure the compliance with provisions of the
TRGS, particularly what is related to the rational and efficient use of energy, lighting levels,
and glare control. Similarly, it must ensure evacuation of heat produced by the lamp in
order to avoid ignition of adjacent materials.
c. These aspects are related to safety of the electrical installation and shall be verified in the
process of establishing compliance with the TREI.
135
CHAPTER 4
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE GENERATION PROCESS
A generation central or plant is the set of facilities that contain machines, generators, motors,
devices for control, maneuver, protection, and measurement, that are used to produce electric
energy, different from the ones considered as emergency plants.
For the purposes of this regulation, a generation central must involve the processes of
transmission, transformation, distribution and end-use. It must comply with the requirements for
each process that are applicable to the plant. The requirements of this chapter are of mandatory
compliance and shall be taken as complementary to the contents of the other chapters in this
General Annex.
Provisions contained in this regulation are of mandatory application in the Colombian territory and
must be met by generating companies operating in the country.
SECTION 21. GENERAL PROVISIONS

Additional to the compliance of permits, environmental requirements, municipal or district
planning, and the concessions that may take place, the generation central must comply with the
21.1 BUILDINGS.
a. Buildings and structures of generation centrals shall comply with the Colombian Seismic -
Resistant Constructions Code.
b. End-use electrical installations must comply with NTC 2050 first update or the
international standard IEC 60364 , but not a combination of standards.
c. The building of a generation central shall be independent from every construction not
related to the generation process. Exceptions to this requirement are facilities in
industries with co-generation processes.
d. It is strictly forbidden to use combustible materials in the vicinities of raceways and

energized machines or equipment; their use is permitted provided that they are away
from the energized piece or duly protected (for instance in facilities with diesel engines).
e. The plant control center shall have a real time display representing the centrals one line
diagram, covering the medium and high voltage systems and transmission lines associated
to physical connection of the central. The display should be on panels or computer
screens, near the command centers.
f. Overhead cranes available to handle elements in centrals must be provided with travel
limiter, both for translation and elevation. Available elevation height and maximum weight
must be indicated. Besides, they must have a sound indicator in order to notify operation
to the personnel when the crane is executing a translation movement.
g. Intake gates of the hydraulic central must have an automatic control system and a
mechanical manual control for opening or closing them, as the case might be.
h. In thermal plants, chimney stacks not exceeding 25 m shall be painted in accordance with
the requirements of aeronautic signaling.
i. The use of excessively polished pavement and the assembly of narrow staircases is
forbidden In the vicinities of energized pieces or moving machines.
136
j. The construction of unconfined water reservoirs shall be avoided within centrals in areas
close to high voltage installations that may put at risk the safety of people or of the
facility.
k. There must not be alcohol, ammonia, acetic, hydrochloric, nitric acid or volatile residues
vapors in batteries rooms. These rooms shall not have direct communication to the
control center. They must be dry, well ventilated, and not be subject to detrimental
vibrations which may cause detachments of gases and premature wear. Besides, there
must be eye and hands washing stations in case of emergency.
l. Dry transformers shall be used for ancillary systems and in general low voltage systems in
underground constructions.
m. Hallways of great length, and in general wherever there is likelihood of electric arcs, must
have two ways of access as minimum. Cables running through these hallways and covers
shall be made of flame-retardant materials.
n. The generation central shall have an automatic fire extinguishing system and an
emergency plan.
o. Fire fighting protection systems shall operate minimum upon temperature and smoke
signals.
p. All low voltage circuits located in the vicinity of machines, devices, or other high voltage
circuits shall be considered as belonging to high voltage installations, in cases where due
to lack of protection, contact may occur between them.
q. Electric raceways must not be installed near heating and steam conduction pipes, and in
general near places with elevated temperature and defective ventilation. Wiring shall be
organized, tied, and with duly identified circuits in all raceways. Cables shall be insulated
in self-extinguishing or flame retardant materials.
r. Lighting in the central and substations shall be uniform, particularly avoiding glare in
reading areas of panels. Illuminance values shall comply with the requi rements set forth
in the Technical Regulation for General and Street Lighting TRGSL.
s. Centrals that require personnel operating permanently shall have emergency lighting
available that comes from a source different than regular lighting. Each lamp in this
system shall have a minimum autonomy of 60 minutes.
t. All places where people circulate such as accesses, rooms, hallways, etc., must be free of
objects that may cause accidents or interrupt notoriously an evacuation in case of
emergency. Evacuation routes shall be demarcated with signals and exit signs. The se shall
be luminous, with photoluminiscent paint, and lights connected to the centrals
emergency circuit.
u. In order to avoid the hazards that may arise from fire in a transformer of more than 100
kVA or a breaker of large oil volume, a pit or sump shall be constructed with several layers
of gravel that will act both as a filter and a way to suffocate the combustion.
v. Transformers with power equal to or greater than 100 kVA located within the machines
house shall be installed in cells designed with blast resistant doors and walls. Each cell
shall have an automatic fire extinguishing system and a system to renew air thro ugh a
handling unit.
137
w. Transformers with power equal to or greater than 100 kVA located in substations shall be
installed in spaces protected by fire-proof doors and walls.
x. Gas conductions shall always be away from electric raceways. Placement of both
conductions in a single duct or the same duct bank is forbidden. The use of explosion -
proof equipment is mandatory in areas that communicate with piping where there is
accumulation of methane.
y. Generation centrals must comply with limits of emission, noise, and other regulations
established by the environmental authorities, as well as seismic resistance norms.
Paragraph: Small electric centrals or micro centrals may deviate from some of these requirements,
provided that safety of people, animals, and the environment is not compromised.
21.2 SAFETY DISTANCES

Generation centrals shall comply with safety distances set forth in section 13 of this General
Annex.
21.3 GROUNDING
With the aim of ensuring safety of personnel in generation centrals, the criteria set forth in
section 16 of this General Annex must be met.
21.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD VALUES

Electromagnetic field values in jobsites shall not exceed the limits set forth in section 14 herein.
21.5 SUBSTATIONS ASSOCIATED TO GENERATION CENTRALS

In order to unify responsibilities and criteria, when the generation central has one substation
associated, for the purposes of conformity certification they shall be considered as a set and
have one single certificate to include all of the components.
21.6 OTHER STRUCTURES ASSOCIATED TO THE GENERATION CENTRAL

Structures associated to the generation central such as dams or dikes, structures for water
intake, conduction, and discharge, substations or storage yards, warehouses, and site offices
must comply with international technical standards or standards recognized internationally for
these structures, the Colombian Seismic Resistance code, applicable environmental regulations,
and municipal or district planning norms and provisions of the place where the central is
located.
21.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF GENERATION CENTRALS

Operation and maintenance of the generation central must comply with all the regulatory,
commercial, environmental, and municipal or district planning requirements, as well as permits
or concessions applicable.
138
CHAPTER 5
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE TRANSMISSION PROCESS
The provisions contained in this chapter refer to technical provisions to be met by overhead power
lines of high and extra high voltage of three-phase alternate current at 60 Hz of nominal
frequency.
For the purposes of this regulation, transmission is deemed to be the transfer (or transport) of
electric power in high and extra high voltage equal to or greater than 57.5 kV, and it shall not be
confused with the names and voltage levels established in the regulation for commercial or service
quality issues.
Transmission systems deliver energy from generation plants to substations and large industrial
facilities, from which distribution systems provide the service to residential and commercial areas.
They also serve to interconnect generation plants enabling exchange of energy, when generation
plants are out of service due to damage or routine repairs.
The requirements in this chapter are of mandatory compliance and they must be taken as
complementary for the contents in other chapters of this regulation.
The provisions in this regulation are applicable to the entire Colombian territory and must be met
by companies which construct and operate energy transmission lines with voltage exceeding 57.5
kV in alternate current.
For those lines where it is expected to use other energy transmission systems (direct current,
underground wiring, one-phase or poly-phase alternate current) shall be subject to special
justification before the Ministry of Mines and Energy or entity determined by it, and they must
adapt to the provisions and basic principles of this regulation and the ones particular for the
specific case.
SECTION 22. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

Provisions contained in this regulation refer to the minimum technical conditio ns to be met by
overhead transmission lines of high and extra high voltage.
Every transmission line constructed or modified during the effect of this regulation must have a
Full Certification with the certification mechanism in force and effect at the beg inning of the
construction.
22.1 DESIGNS
Every transmission line subject to the TREI shall have electric, mechanic, and civil works designs
that ensure reliability levels demanded by the regulation for each type of line. A comprehensive
design of lines requires multiple disciplines work and the professionals involved must be identified
with their names, number of professional license, and their signature on relevant documents.
Designs must take into account at least the following documents: electrical, structural, mechanical
and geotechnical calculation records, technical specifications, environmental requirements,
economic analysis, and drawings.
Drawings must display the type of work to execute, fabrication of structure, construction of
accesses, assembly of structures, laying of transportation lines, amount of civil works to construct,
amount and type of structures, amount and type of conductors. The designer shall define i n the
technical specifications the scope of the works, applicable general and particular standards,
equipment, methods, and procedures to be followed in the construction.
The design shall contain as a minimum the following drawings: location, plant and profile along the
whole line. The profile view shall display variations in the terrain elevation level on the axial
projection of the line; location of details, elevation every 20 m, and side slopes in that point;
location, height and type of structure, and temperature curves of the conductor from the lowest
to the highest temperature.
139
The design shall also contain drawings of foundations and identify each one of the forces acting on
the structure and foundations.
The design shall consider alternatives of lesser environmental impact, following the guidelines of
the environmental authority and uses of land established in the municipalities land planning.
Electrical design shall cover the following as minimum:
a. Behavior of line both on permanent and transient schemes.
b. Reliability of the line (number of outages per 100 km/year)
c. Coordination of insulation.
d. Coordination of protections.
e. Safety distances.
f. Establish the line parameters.
g. Screening study.
h. Load flux study.
i. Energy losses study.
j. Evaluate the corona effect and superficial gradients.
k. Evaluate overvoltage by lightning type waves and maneuver type.
l. Evaluate levels of electromagnetic fields in the area of easement.
m. Evaluate radio interference levels.
n. Grounding.
o. Audible noise level.
p. Economic conductor.
q. Calculation of losses due to corona effect.
22.2 AREAS OF EASEMENT

For the purposes of this regulation, areas of easement shall meet the following requirements:
a. Every overhead transmission line with nominal voltage equal to or greater than 57.5 kV
shall have a safety area or right of way. This area shall be defined before construction o
the line, for which proceedings for acquiring the easement shall be conducted, either by
mutual agreement with the owners of the piece of land or by judicial way. The owner or
operator of the line shall make periodic use of the easement either through maintenance
of the line or trimming the vegetation, and evidence thereof shall be recorded. In cases
that the easement is threatened, particularly with the construction of buildings, police
protection as well as other forms established in the legislation shall be requested. 29
b. Planting or natural growth of trees or brushes that over tim e may compromise the safety
distance and constitute hazard for people or affect the reliability of the line shall be
avoided within the easement area.
c. Buildings, houses, sheds, or other type of structures to shelter people or animals shall not
be constructed. High concentration of people or the presence of people external to the
operation or maintenance of the line shall not be permitted on areas of ease ment. The
use of these areas as parking or vehicle repair areas shall not be permitted either, as well
as the development of commercial or recreational activities. Municipal or urban planning
offices shall abstain from granting construction licenses or permits in those areas and
municipalities shall abide by their responsibilities with regards to control of the use of land
and public areas in accordance with the Law. 30
d. The existing electric infrastructure shall adhere to the limitations of use of land as
established in Land Zoning Plans (POT, Spanish acronym). Similarly, the POT shall take into
account expansion plans in order to ensure provision of electric power service.
29
Paragraph amended by means of Resolution 90907 of October 25, 2013.
30
Paragraph amended by means of Resolution 90907 of October 25, 2013.
140
e. In cases where Land Zoning Plans do not permit the construction of an overhead lin e in
the urban area or the effects caused by electromagnetic fields or safety distances exceed
values set forth in this regulation, the line shall be underground considering the
appropriate spaces for maintenance and operation.
f. The Grid Operator shall refuse connection to the local distribution grid to an installation
that invades the area of easement due to the risk it poses for the life of people.
g. Electromagnetic fields shall not exceed the values set forth in section 14 of this General
Attachment for occupational exposure in areas of easement at a height of one meter
above the ground. Values to be considered in the surroundings of areas of easement shall
be the ones for general public exposure, and if there are buildings, they shall be measured
at a height of one meter from the floor where people stand.
h. For the purposes of this regulation and in accordance with the standardized voltage in the
country, table 22.1 sets the minimum required values in the width of the easement area,
whose center is the axis of the line.
TYPE OF STRUCTURE VOLTAGE (Kv) MINIMUM WIDTH (m)

500 (2 Circuits) 65
Towers/poles
500 (1 Circuit) 60
400 (2 Circuit) 55
Towers/poles
400 (1 Circuit) 50
220/230 (2 Circuits) 32
Towers
220/230 (1 Circuit) 30
220/230 (2 Circuits) 30
Poles
220/230 (1 Circuit) 28
110/115 (2 Circuits) 20
Towers
110/115 (1 Circuit) 20
110/115 (2 Circuits) 15
Poles
110/115 (1 Circuit) 15
Towers/poles 57.5/66 (1 or 2 circuits) 15
Table 22.1 Width of the easement area of transmission lines (m)31
Note 1: When circuits of different voltage level are installed on a single structure, the minimum
width of easement shall be the one corresponding to the higher voltage level.
Note 2: For direct current transmission lines (HVDC) the minimum widths of easement areas shall
be the ones on the table above reduced by 10%.
Note 3: Easement values set forth on table 22.1 refer to minimum widths, however, adhering to
the principle of economy and reduction of visual and environmental impact, maximum widths shall
not exceed in 10% the values set forth on the table.
Figure 22.1 Area of easement width

i. Easement on compact lines: The minimum width of easement on compact runs of a new
line shall be determined as the distance between the points on both sides of the line from
which, at one meter above the ground or floor with human presence, the electric and
magnetic field do not exceed the values set forth in section 14 herein for exposure of the
general public, including the most critical temperature, wind, or electromagnetic forces
31
Modified table and footnotes added by means of Resolution 90794 of July 25, 2014.
141
conditions to which conductors may be subject in the transmission line. Su ch easement

shall never be less than the one resulting from considering safety distances set forth in
subparagraph j below.
j. For transmission lines with nominal voltage less than or equal to 500 kV which run across
urban or industrial areas and for which existing constructions make it impossible to leave
the width of easement established on table 22.1, it is accepted to construct the overhead
line with the following requirements: a) that the Land Zoning Plan existing at the time of
planning the project allows to do so, b) that an insulation study of the particular case
proves that there are not any risks for people or assets in the building, c) that the values of
electromagnetic fields for the public in general are not exceeded in the building, d) that
neither the radio interference values nor acoustic noise exceed the values set forth by the
competent authorities, e) that horizontal distances of at least 3.5 m are met for 57.5 kV, 4
m for 115 kV, 6 m for 230 kV, and 8.6 m for 500 kV, taking into account t he maximum
movements approaching the building that the conductor may have. These distances shall
be measured between the most salient vertical projection of the conductor and the
closest point in the building.
In these cases, the use of compacts lines is recommended, and they may use lines of other
voltages, mounting several lines on the same structure (either a tower or a pole). Under
no circumstance the line may be built on above buildings or sports fields that have some
sort of associated construction.
22.3 FOUNDATIONS
Support structures of transmission lines shall be supported on foundations appropriate to the type
of soil, weight, and other strains to which they may be subject in order to avoid their toppling,
twisting, or sinking that compromises the mechanical stability of the line. There must be hydraulic
control in order to avoid landslides that may affect stability of the foundation.
22.4 GROUNDING
For the purposes of this regulation and in order to ensure safety both of personnel working on the
lines and the users, the criteria set forth in section 15 herein shall be met. Additionally, step and
touch voltages shall be verified in the structures of transmission lines with voltage equal to or
greater than 115 kV in urban areas and in structures located less than 20 m from schools, houses,
industries, businesses, and in general, places with high concentration of people.
22.5 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS IN STRUCTURES OR SUPPORTS OF TRANSMISSION

LINES
Designs, materials used, constructive form, and assembly of the structure must ensure the
compliance with the mechanical requirements it may be subject to, in accordance with the
following types of application and operation conditions, for which the requirements below shall be
met.
22.5.1 Suspension structures
a. Normal condition: All conductors and return cable(s) healthy, maximum design wind and
matching temperature.
b. Abnormal condition:
For lines with bundled conductors:

- 50 per cent of broken sub-conductor in any phase; the other sub-conductors, phases,
and return cables shall be healthy. Average maximum wind and matching
temperature.
- One broken return cable, and the other phases and remaining return cable (if any)
healthy. Maximum average wind and matching temperature.
For lines with only one conductor per phase:
- One broken conductor in any phase. The other phases and return cable(s) healthy.
Maximum average wind and matching temperature.
142
- One broken return cable, and the other phases and remaining return cable (if any)
healthy. Maximum average wind and matching temperature.
22.5.2 Retention structures
a. Normal condition: All conductors and return cables healthy. Maximum design wind and

- All sub-conductors in any phase and one return cable broken simultaneously. The
other phases and remaining return cable (if any) healthy. Maximum average wind and
- Any phase and one return cable broken simultaneously. The other phases and
remaining return cable (if any) healthy. Maximum average wind and matching
temperature.
- Two different phases broken. The remaining phase and return cable(s) healthy.
Maximum average wind and matching temperature
22.5.3 Terminal structures
a. Normal condition: All conductors and return cables healthy. Maximum design wind and

- All sub-conductors in any phase and one return cable broken simultaneously. The
other phases and remaining return cable (if any) healthy. Maximum average wind and
- All sub-conductors broken in two different phases. The remaining phases and return
cable (if any) healthy. Maximum average wind and matching temperature.

- Any phase and one return cable broken simultaneously. The other p hases and
remaining return cable (if any) healthy. Maximum average wind and matching
temperature.
- Two different phases broken. The remaining phase and return cable(s) healthy.
Maximum average wind and matching temperature.
22.6 FITTINGS
Fittings on transmission lines shall comply with the requirements set forth in Subsection 20.20 of
this General Annex, and shall be appropriate for the type of line, sizing of conductors, return
cables, electrical, mechanical, and environmental conditions of the environment where they will
be installed.
22.7 INSULATORS AND CONDUCTORS INSULATION
a. Insulation shall be appropriate for the electrical features of the line considering aspects
such as voltage level, number of outages accepted by the regulation, density of lightning
to ground in the area, overvoltage per maneuver, pollution or environm ental
contamination of the site, and mechanical tension of the conductors which determine
breaking loads, among others.
b. Insulators breaking load. To determine breaking load in insulators used on transmission

lines, differentiation must be made between suspension and retention structures based
143
on the mechanical loads at normal condition, applying safety factors calculated in

accordance with Subsection 7.3.6 of IEC 60826 standard, as follows:
Insulators for suspension structures. The minimum breaking load shall be equal to the
vector sum of vertical and cross-sectional loads (absolute maximum in the string) times
the safety factor, which may not be less than 2.5.
Insulators for retention structures. The minimum breaking load of the insulator shall be
equal to the maximum longitudinal load to which it is exposed times the safety factor,
which may not be less than 2.5.
c. Mechanical resistance corresponding to parallel strings may be taken equal to the product
of the number of strings conforming it times the resistance of each single string, provided
that under normal condition it is distributed among all, and with a broken string, the load
is distributed equally among the remaining ones.
d. Maintenance of insulators. Insulators shall be subject to maintenance in order to preserve

their insulating characteristics. The criterion to determine the loss of function of an
insulator shall be breaking or loss of insulating properties when subject simultaneously to
electric voltage and mechanical stress.
e. The insulation level of underground lines conductors shall comply with international
standards or standards recognized internationally in accordance with the voltage level
used.
f. Conductors of underground lines shall have inspection and transposition chambers.
22.8 MINIMUM SAFETY DISTANCES
a. Transmission lines must comply with the minimum safety distances set forth in section 13
of this General Annex, in the most critical conditions of temperature, winds, or
electromagnetic forces withstood by the conductors.
b. It must be ensured that on easement areas vegetation growth remains controlled in such a
way that safety distances are not compromised.
c. Electrical sizing of structures shall be defined by means of combining the minimum

distances corresponding to overvoltage due to atmospheric electric discharges, maneuvers
overvoltage, and industrial frequency. Additionally, it must take into account the pollution
levels, altitude above sea level, and minimum distances for maintenance of live lines.
22.9 CONDUCTORS AND RETURN CABLES

Phase conductors and return cables used on transmission lines shall comply with the following
specific requirements for their installation and operation, besides requirements particular to the
products;
a. They must be appropriate for the environmental conditions of the site where they are
installed.
b. Mechanical laying tension of the conductor shall not exceed 25% of the breaking tension
of the conductor without load.
c. Fittings used to splice or hold the conductors shall be appropriate for the characteristics
and types of conductors, and they shall not permit sliding.
144
d. Conductors with rupture in any of their threads shall be repaired or spliced in the least
time possible.
e. There shall be elements to buffer mechanical oscillations of conductors and return cables
caused by winds, electromechanical forces, and abrupt changes in temperature.
22.10 AIR NAVIGATION SIGNALS
Markers shall be installed on phase conductors or return cables of greater height in compliance
with the requirements of the Colombian Aeronautic Regulation (Resolution 01092 of 2007
published in the Official Gazette 46591 of April 4, 2007) or the regulation that modifies it or
replaces. Markers shall be installed on obstacles limiting surfaces and approach cones in airports
regulated by Aerocivil. For the purposes of this regulation, daytime bacons shall comply with the
minimum requirements shown below.
a. Markers shall be fabricated in a weather-proof material in accordance with the procedure

established in ASTM G 155 of an equivalent standard. In general, it must be ensured that
the marker maintains its mechanical and optical features so it lasts for a long time.
b. Markers whose deterioration exceeds 5 units estimated as per the method of ASTM D D
2244 shall not be installed.
c. Minimum external diameters are 600 mm or the ones established by aeronautic

standards.
d. Clamps, cables or special accessories shall be used for mounting the Markers. They shall
be made of materials galvanically compatible with the material of the cable where they
are to be installed, and adjustable to different calibers.
e. Color of the markers shall be Aviation red or International orange or the ones
established by technical regulations issued by Aerocivil.
f. If markers are required in night mode, they may be stroboscopic lamps whose lighting is
by line induction or other technology, provided that the requirements of aeronautic
regulation are met.
Paragraph 1: The marker may prove conformity with this regulation by means of a statement of
the provider or manufacturer which includes dimensions, color, ageing or weather resistance,
dielectric rigidity, and performance.
22.11 USE OF NEW TECHNOLOGIES

Use of transmission technologies such as Gas Insulated Lines (GIL), High Pressure Fluid Filled Lines
(HPFF), Variable Frequency Transformers (VFT), High Voltage Direct Current Transmission systems
(HVDC), Flexible AC Transmission System (FACT) is permitted, as well as high-temperature
conductors provided that they are subject to the compliance of international standards or
guidelines for use and application from entities such as CIGRE, IEEE, IEC, or similar. In the case of
GIL, for example, there is the IEEE PC37.122.4 Guide for Application and User Guide for Gas-
Insulated Transmission Lines (GIL), Rated 72.5 kV and Above.
Transmission systems in direct current for high voltage shall consider the requirements of
technologies such as AC/DC converters (rectifiers) and DC/AC (inverters), conversion transformers,
AC and DC filters transport lines which must comply with the requi rements of an international
standard such as IEC/TC 115 or equivalent.
22.12 UNDERGROUND LINES
145
Underground transmission may be carried out through several types of raceways such as ducts,
vaults, or direct burying using existing infrastructure such as bridges, tunnels, or other type of
shared structures. This can be done provided that there are mechanical and space conditions that
do not put people, infrastructure or the electrical installation at risk , that the manufacturer of the
cables and other accessories of the line had certified them for that kind of setup, and that the
requirements set forth by the manufacturer or a guideline of international recognition such as
CIGRE or IEEE are met.
Every underground line must have available the drawings where its ro ute and depth are shown,
and have appropriate signaling in its run in order to avoid that when excavations are made, safety
of people or of the line itself may be compromised. Depth of burying shall comply with
international technical standards or standards internationally recognized for this type of lines.
22.13 SAFETY INFORMATION FOR PEOPLE NEAR THE LINE
Owners or operators of transmission lines shall inform periodically to residents nearby the
easement areas of the lines about the risks of electrical origin or other risks that may generate
from the development of undue practices with the line or its surroundings, and evidences thereof
shall be recorded.
146
CHAPTER 6
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE TRANSFORMATION PROCESS (SUBSTATIONS)
Provisions contained in this regulation are applicable in the entire Colombian territory and must
be met by companies which involve the energy transformation process operating in the country.
Provisions apply to substations with nominal voltages greater than 1 kV.
An electrical substation is a set of pieces of equipment used to transfer the flux of energy in a
power system, to ensure safety of the system by means of automatic protective devices, and to
redistribute the energy flux through alternate routes during contingencies.
A substation may be associated to a generation central by controlling directly the flux of power to
the system with power transformers, converting the supply voltage to higher or lower levels, or it
may connect different paths of flux to the same voltage level.
SECTION 23. GENERAL ASPECTS OF SUBSTATIONS

The transformation process shall be understood as the one applied to substations. To do this, a
distinction between different types of substations shall be made according to their u se or their
voltage level and power they manage.
Every owner of a substation or constructive units comprising the substation is responsible for the
compliance with the TREI as corresponds. The requirements of this chapter are of mandatory
compliance and shall be taken as complementary to the contents in other chapters of this
regulation.
For the purposes of this regulation, substations shall be classified as:
a. High and extra high voltage yard substations (may include maneuver, transformation, or
compensation).
b. High and extra high voltage indoor or outdoor gas insulated substations. Generally gas
such as sulfur hexafluoride (SF6).
c. Medium voltage distribution yard substations.
d. Hybrid yard substations of medium and high voltage comprised by ai r or gas insulated
switchgear technologies. Compact switchgears include all functions necessary for a
connection field by means of operation of equipment such as circuit breakers,
disconnectors, grounding switches, and instrument transformers housed in pressure-
resistant, gastight enclosures.
e. Medium voltage distribution substations located inside buildings and under control and
operation of the grid operator.
f. Substations within buildings (owned and operated by the user).
g. Pad mounted substations.
h. IP X 8 Submersible substations (both the transformer and associated maneuver equipment
must be of this type).
i. Semi-submersible substations or flood-proof (equipment shall be IP X7 protected to
temporary immersion and the vault or chamber shall ensure drainage in a time lower than
the one withstood by the equipment).
j. Pole mounted distribution substations.
23.1 SUBSTATIONS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Substations, regardless of their type, shall comply with the applicable requirements:
a. Every substation shall have an electrical design.
b. In electrical systems of distributors, large consumers, and transporters the maximum fault
clearance time on the main protection from the beginning of the fault to the extinction of
the arc in the power breaker shall not be greater than 150 milliseconds.
147
c. In spaces where substations are installed with exposed energized pieces, there must be
fences, screens, or walls in such a way that the possibility of access for unauthorized
personnel is minimized. Doors shall have safety elements which limit entry of
unauthorized personnel. This requirement does not apply to pole mounted substations
that comply with minimum safety distances.
d. There must be a sign affixed in each entrance of an electrical substation with the electric
risk symbol, as well as in the external part of the chain link fence when it is accessible to
people.
e. Metallic walls or mesh used to enclose substations shall have a minimum height of 2.50
meters and they shall be duly grounded to earth.
f. Applicable grounding requirements set forth in section 15 of this General Annex shall be
complied with in order to ensure safety of both personnel who works in substations and
the general public.
g. Step, touch, and transfer voltages shall be calculated in all substations in order to ensu re
that people are not exposed to voltage exceeding the withstand threshold.
h. Special attention must be given to the voltage level and power of the substation for
assessment of conformity. This shall only be made by qualified professionals with specific
training who shall use the appropriate techniques and equipment for tests, assays, and
measurements.
i. The substations inspection body may not inspect high and extra high voltage substations if
it does not have express accreditation for these voltage levels.
j. Enclosures used in substation to house breaking and insulation equipment shall be

metallic, and limits of such enclosures shall not include the walls of the substation
dedicated room. Inspection windows shall ensure the same protection grade (IP) of t he
enclosure and the same insulation level.
k. Covers, doors, or insulation distances shall not allow access of unqualified personnel to
bus bars or energized items.
l. In case that energized items are removable, it shall be ensured that they may not be
removed while the system operates under normal conditions, for which systems of locks
or interlocks shall be enabled. If the energized elements are fixed, it must be ensured that
they may not be removed without the use of tools handled by competent professionals
who are knowledgeable about the operation of substations.
m. Interlocks among different breaking and insulation elements in a substation are

indispensable for safety of people and operative convenience of the installation, so that
undue maneuvers are not performed.
n. For removable equipment, interlocks shall ensure that the following operations are not
possible to be carried out:
- Removal of the protection breaker unless it is in open position.

- Breaker operation, unless it is in service, disconnected, removed, or earthed.
- Close the breaker, unless it is connected to the ancillary circuit or designed to open
automatically without the use of an ancillary circuit.
o. In the case of fixed pieces of equipment, they shall have the necessary interlocks in order
to avoid erroneous maneuvers.
148
p. Continuity and integrity of the grounding system must be ensured taking into account the
thermal and mechanical stress caused y the current it will transport in case of fault.
q. Enclosure of each functional unit shall be connected to the grounding protection

conductor.
r. All grounded metallic pieces which do not belong to main or ancillary circuits shall be
connected directly to the grounding system or through the metallic structure.
s. It is indispensable that the system permits to ground the pieces subject to energizing so
that appropriate personnel may perform safely their maintenance duties.
t. Position of the elements that comprise the cell grounding shall be clearly identified by
means of an element that indicates visually the maneuver for grounding the piece of
equipment.
u. It is forbidden that water, natural gas, compressed air, industrial gases, or fuel ducts run
across the substation except for fire extinguishing and cooling piping for equipment in the
substation.
v. In order to avoid the hazards that may arise from fire caused by oil spill, a pit or sump
shall be constructed with several layers of gravel that will act both as a fi lter and a way to
suffocate the combustion. Exceptions to this are substations mounted on poles, pads, and
substations with oil-cooled transformers whose total capacity does not exceed 112.5 kVA.
w. The IP protection grade or NEMA equivalent for pieces of equipment in substations

subject to flooding shall be appropriate for such condition.
x. Every substation shall have over-current protections. In circuits protected by fuses, the
maximum capacity of the fuses shall be the one established by a protections coordination
study and it must ensure proper protection of the transformer and de -energizing of the
circuit when required. To do this, the Grid Operator shall establish a chart with values for
these purposes and shall demand compliance thereof.
23.2 SAFETY DISTANCES IN OUTDOOR SUBSTATIONS
Fences installed as barriers for unauthorized personnel must be placed in such a way that
exposed energized pieces are out of the safety distance zone, as illustrated in Figure 23.1, and
the minimum distances to keep are the ones shown on Table 23.1.
Nominal voltage Size

among phases (kV) R (m)
0.151 7.2 3.0
13.8/13.2/11.4 3.1
34.5/44 3.2
66/57.5 3.5
115/110 4.0
230/220 4.7
500 5.3
Figure 23.1 Safety distances to prevent direct Table 23.1. Safety distances for Figure 23.1
contacts in outdoor stations
149
In medium voltage substations closed with walls, the horizontal distance between the wall and
energized elements may be reduced to the free work space given on column two, Table 110-34a of
NTC 2050 provided that the wall is at least 2.5 m high and it does not have holes through which
conductive elements that approach energized pieces may be inserted. In all cases it must be
ensured that minimum spaces for ventilation and equipment access are complied, as well as work
spaces defined in section 110 of NTC 2050.
High and extra high voltage outdoor or yard substations shall comply with the safety distances and
guidelines presented on Figures 23.1, 23.2, and 23.3, and Tables 23.1 and 23.2 related to the
coordination of insulation and Committee 23 of CIGRE and the IEC 60071-2 standard.
Figure 23.2 Safety zone for personnel transit
Figure 23.3. Safety zones
150
Minim Safety distances

Up um Basic value Personnel transit Work zone in absence of heavy machinery Vehicles transit
[kV] distanc Amount Below Horizontal Vertical Safety zone Total
(Peak e as added Basic value
% [m] Value Safety Total Total Safety Total Total
value) per IEC Safety zone Gauge Tolerance
(m) [m] zone value [m] value zone value value
[m] [m] [m]
(2) [m] [m] [m] [m] [m] [m]
(1) (3) (4) (5)=(2)+(4) (6) (7)=(5)+(6)(8) (9) (10)=(5)+(9) (11) ( )=( )+( ) (13)
12 5 11
(14) (15)=(5)+(13)
+(14)
60 0.09 10 0.01 0.10 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
75 0.12 10 0.01 0.13 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
95 0.16 10 0.02 0.18 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
125 0.22 10 0.02 0.24 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
170 0.32 10 0.03 0.35 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
200 0.38 10 0.04 0.42 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
250 0.48 10 0.05 0.53 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
325 0.63 10 0.07 0.70 2.25 (*) 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
380 0.75 10 0.08 0.83 2.25 3.08 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
450 0.90 10 0.10 1.00 2.25 3.25 2.25 1.75 (*) 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
550 1.10 10 0.11 1.21 2.25 3.46 2.25 1.75 2.96 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
650 1.30 10 0.13 1.43 2.25 3.68 2.25 1.75 3.18 1.25 (*) (**) 0.70 (**)
750 1.50 10 0.15 1.65 2.25 3.90 2.25 1.75 3.40 1.25 2.90 (**) 0.70 (**)
850 1.70 10 0.17 1.87 2.25 4.12 2.25 1.75 3.62 1.25 3.12 (**) 0.70 (**)
950 1.90 10 0.19 2.09 2.25 4.34 2.25 1.75 3.84 1.25 3.34 (**) 0.70 (**)
1050 2.10 10 0.21 2.31 2.25 4.56 2.25 1.75 4.06 1.25 3.56 (**) 0.70 (**)
1175 2.35 10 0.24 2.59 2.25 4.84 2.25 1.75 4.34 1.25 3.84 (**) 0.70 (**)
1300 2.60 10 0.26 2.86 2.25 5.11 2.25 1.75 4.61 1.25 4.11 (**) 0.70 (**)
1425 2.85 6 0.17 3.02 2.25 5.27 2.25 1.75 4.77 1.25 4.27 (**) 0.70 (**)
1550 3.10 6 0.19 3.29 2.25 5.54 2.25 1.75 5.04 1.25 4.54 (**) 0.70 (**)
Table 23.2. Overhead safety distances, for Figures 23.1 and 23.2
(*) The minimum recommended value is 3 m but it may be slightly less according to local conditions
and standardized work procedures.
(**) To be determined in each case.
23.3 SAFETY DISTANCES IN INDOOR SUBSTATIONS
Safety distances to be kept within a room intended for a substation shall comply with Section 13 of
this General Annex as applicable, and safety distances, ventilation, and work spaces set forth in
Section 110 of NTC 2050 first update.
23.4 OPERATIONS, COMMAND, AND CONTROL ROOMS
The room or space where electrical equipment for operation, command or control of a substation
has been installed, shall comply with the following requirements:
a. Construction materials shall have a high ignition point.
b. Facilities must be free of combustible materials, dust and smoke. They shall not be used
for manufacture, repair, or storage, except for minor parts essential for maintenance of
installed equipment.
c. It must be sufficiently ventilated in order to maintain operation temp eratures within due
ranges and minimize the accumulation of contaminants carried by air, under any
operation condition.
d. Electrical installations shall remain dry. In outdoor substations or those located in wet
tunnels, underground passage ways, or other wet places or with high degree of humidity,
the electrical equipment shall be appropriate to withstand the prevailing environmental
conditions.
e. Every fixed electrical equipment must be supported and secured for service conditions.
Attention must be given to the fact that some heavy pieces of equipment such as
transformers may be secured on site, however, the equipment that generated dynamic
forces during its operation may require additional measures.
151
f. The control room must have an indication of the contacts position of breaking and
insulating elements that display the actual status of operation being executed, in order to
have full awareness of such condition.
SECTION 24. SPECIFIC SUBSTATION REQUIREMENTS

Substations must comply with the following specific requirements in accordance with their type.
24.1 HIGH AND EXTRA HIGH VOLTAGE SUBSTATIONS
a. They shall be build following standards that ensure both safety and reliability.
b. The substation shall have accurate operation and maintenance manuals which do not
leave room for errors.
c. Step, contact, and transferred voltages must be measured, ensuring that people are not
exposed to risk with voltages exceeding the withstand threshold. Measurement shall be
taken in the fencing and up to one meter from the external side.
24.2 MEDIUM TENSION INDOOR SUBSTATIONS OR LOCATED INSIDE BUILDINGS

Regardless of whether the substation belongs to a Grid Operator or one or more users, this type of
substations must comply with the provisions of Section 450 of NTC 2050 and additionally the
following applicable requirements, adopted from the IEC 62271-200 standard:
a. When a substation is required inside a building, space must be provided with appropriate
dimensions in accordance with the type of substation and the requirements of this
regulation.
b. For indoor substations, the room shall be located in a place of easy access from the
outside, on common areas, with appropriate means that facilitate entry and exit of
equipment to allow competent professionals to perform maintenance, revision, and
inspection tasks.
c. Entry of unauthorized persons shall not be permitted in substations and electrical rooms
so that they do not have access to energized pieces of the system either touching them
directly or by introducing objects that may be in contact with an energized element.
d. The substation must comply with the following requirements in order to avoid accidents
caused by electric arc within it:
- Cells shall comply with the protection requirements established in Subsection 20.23.2
of this Annex. 32
- Doors shall have locks and remain closed.
- All fixed elements shall be duly supported or secured. There must not be
detachments.
- Combustible or fire-propagating elements shall not be placed within the reach of an
electric arc.
- Fencing and enclosures shall be solidly grounded to earth.
e. Every substation housed in rooms shall have the amount and appropriate form of
emergency exits to avoid an operator getting trapped in case of an accident.
f. Every electric substation housed in rooms or basements shall have drainage or pumping
elements that prevent flooding. In case that this condition cannot be ensured, the
equipment shall be submersible.
32
152
g. Electrical equipment of the substation or electrical rooms shall be separated from the
emergency plant by a wall or barrier which avoids non qualified persons approaching
energized elements.
24.3 POLE MOUNTED SUBSTATIONS

Substations with transformers mounted on poles shall comply with the following assembly
requirements:
a. Substations with transformers mounted on poles may be installed without any type of
fencing, provided that it neither exceeds 250 kVA nor 800 kgf weight. Transformers of
112.5 kVA or less, and with weight lower than 600 kgf shall be installed on one single pole
with a breaking resistance not less than 510 kgf. Transformers with power greater than
112.5 kVA and less or equal than 150 kVA, weighing less than 700 kgf shall be installed on
one single pole with breaking load not less than 750 kfg. Transformers with power greater
than 150 kVA and less or equal than 250 kVA, shall be preferably installed on one single
pole with resistance not less than 1050 kgf. The use of structures with dual pole shall be
avoided for installation of transformers in urban areas since they generate greater visual
impact and they make mobility difficult.
b. In rural installations or small villages, transformers of less than or equal to 25 kVA may be
installed on wooden poles, with breaking resistance less than 510 kgf. In all cases it is
necessary to conduct a stress analysis and ensure mechanical stability o f the structure.
Similarly, municipal or district planning regulations with regards to the use of land and
public space shall be followed, and it should be encouraged that substations do not cause
visual contamination, especially when the infrastructure is shared with other utilities.
c. Every pole mounted substation shall have over-current and overvoltage protections (DPS)
at least on the primary side.
d. The DPS shall be installed in the path of impulse current and as close as possible to the
transformer bushings.
e. The transformer shall have both the neutral point and the carcass solidly grounded.
f. Applicable safety distances set forth in section 13 of this General Annex shall be ensured in
the installation.
g. The transformer securing elements shall withstand at least 2.5 times its weight.
h. Medium voltage connections shall have a shape and mechanical rigidity that do not allow
them to move either with wind or vibrations so that they may get in contact with pieces
that should not be energized, or approaches that cause electric arcs.
i. In order to ensure safety for both the GO (Grid Operator) personnel and the public in
general, the applicable grounding requirements shall be met as provided in article 15 of
this General Annex.
j. The DPS that protects the transformer shall be installed following Figure 20.2.
k. The grid operator must take the necessary measures to avoid people getting in contact
with energized pieces of equipment in cases of pole mounted substations installed before
the enforcing of this Annex, in which the operator sees evidence of medium voltage
energized pieces approaching places accessible to people thus causing imminent risk. In
other places where minimum safety distances are not complied with but there is no
evidence of imminent hazard, the grid operator shall take the necessary measures to
minimize risks in its reconditioning plans. If the cause of risk for people was not generated
153
by the grid operator, the latter shall demand directly or by means of legal proceeding or
police actions that the imminent hazard is eliminated, leaving recorded evidence thereof.
24.4 PAD MOUNTED OR YARD SUBSTATIONS

a. Pad mounted distribution transformers are designed for underground and outdoor
service. They are normally mounted on a concrete base.
b. This type of transformer shall be manufactured with separate high and low voltage
compartments, equipped with front doors.
c. The high voltage compartment shall not be accessible while the door of the low voltage
compartment is open.
d. The low voltage compartment shall have a system so that the user installs a safety lock.
e. For safety concerns, all energized pieces shall be in lockable compartments.
f. A cover above the tank intake is accessible through the cabinet and provides protection
against damages from vandalism and the environment.
g. For pad mounted or yard substations exposed to the general public, where in normal
operation conditions the external temperature of the cubicle exceeds ambient
temperature by 45 C, a protection barrier must be installed to avoid burns and signs must
be placed to indicate the existence of a hot surface. If the transformer has protection
that ensures cutoff or de-energizing when there is over-temperature or if it is not located
on places accessible to the public, such barrier is not required.
24.5 CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTATIONS FOR END-USE INSTALLATIONS

Substations which feed end-use installations exclusively, shall prove conformity with this
regulation together with the installation they feed and the service line up to the limits where the
general use grid ends.
24.6 SUBSTATIONS MAINTENANCE33

Periodic maintenances that ensure continuity of service and safety for the equipment and other
components of the installation as well as for people working on them shall be made on electrical
substations. Records and evidences of these activities shall be kept, and they may be required by
any control and surveillance authority.
In telecontrolled substations, also known as unattended substations, the fire detection and
extinguishing equipment shall be automatic. In case of not being automatic , the substation shall
have the permanent presence of qualified personnel for their operation regardless of the
commissioning date of the substation.
Periodic revision and maintenance of control and protection equipment shall be ensured in every
substation with specialized personnel; besides appropriate cleaning of work elements and spaces
that facilitate the revision and maintenance activities.
There shall be records of all maintenance and cleaning activities. Periodicity of maintenances and
cleaning shall depend on the environmental conditions of the place; in any case it may not be
greater than biannual.
33
Subsection added by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
154
CHAPTER 7
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DISTRIBUTION PROCESS
For the purposes of this regulation, a set of devices and associated circuits for electric power
transport and transformation whose nominal voltages are equal to or greater than 120 V and less
than 57.5 V shall be considered a distribution electrical installation.
The requirements of this chapter are of mandatory compliance and shall be taken as
complementary to the contents of the other chapters in this General Annex.
Provisions contained in this regulation are of mandatory application in the Colombian territory and
must be met by generating companies operating in the country as well as other owners of
electrical networks comprised within this category.
SECTION 25. GENERAL PROVISIONS
25.1 SCOPE OF THE DISTRIBUTION PROCESS

For the purposes of this regulation, a typical distribution system comprises:
a. Distribution substations, which must comply with the applicable requirements from
Section 6 of the TREI.
b. Primary circuits or feeders which usually operate in the range of 7.6 kV to 44 kV and that
feed to the load in a well defined geographic area.
c. Distribution transformers in nominal capacities greater than 3 kVA, which may be installed
on poles, on locations at ground level, or in vaults near the consumers.
d. Maneuver, metering, and protection cells for secondary distribution transformers in the
case of power substations.
e. Low voltage circuits which take energy from the distribution transformer along roads,
public areas, or private estates.
25.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Additional to what is set forth in CREG Resolution 070 of 1998, or those which modify it or
substitute it with regards to the operation and maintenance of distribution grids, the Grid
Operator or owner of the electric distribution installation shall comply with the following
requirements:
a. Every distribution project must have a design with calculation records and construction
drawings, with the name, signature, and professional license number of the person
responsible for the design.
b. The company must keep a record of the technical tests and maintenance routines, both
for the installation and the pieces of equipment that allow to have traceability of the
project.
c. The company that operates a distribution grid shall provide training to each one of the
qualified persons who work in energized facilities or in their vicinit y. Training shall include
information about electric risks. Also, the company shall ensure that each one of the
professionals working on those installations are qualified and authorized to address the
routine demands of the job.
d. Every qualified professional who develops activities associated to distribution grids must
be trained about the procedures to be followed in case of an emergency of electrical
nature, as well as first aid rules including proved resuscitation methods. Copies of such
rules and procedures shall be kept in visible locations both on vehicles and places where
the number of workers or the nature of work justify to do so.
155
e. The person responsible for the construction, operation, and maintenance must provide
the protection elements in amount sufficient so that qualified persons can comply with
the requirements of the job to be performed. These must be available in easily accessible
and visible places.
f. Qualified persons shall be knowledgeable of safety rules, and they can be evaluated at any
time by the authority or the company owner of the grid in order to test their
knowledge. Similarly, if the job is performed in the vicinities of energized pieces of
equipment or lines, they shall execute only those tasks for which they have been trai ned,
equipped, and authorized. Persons without sufficient experience shall work under the
direction of a qualified professional and shall only execute supervised tasks.
g. Operators of other utilities which share infrastructure for the provision of electric power
service shall ensure availability of spaces and comply with safe procedures for assembly,
fitting, operation, and maintenance of both the infrastructure of those services and the
one for electricity. Similarly, it must be ensured that the requireme nts of mechanical
strains resulting in each support structure due to the weight of cables, equipment, and
other loads applied, guarantee compliance with the demands of the TREI with regards to
design, supervision, construction, operation, maintenance, replacement or other activities
related to lines, electric grids, and associated equipment.
h. Installations under this regulation which are part of the distribution system shall have the
Certificate of Conformity with the TREI, and it must be available wheneve r the
Superintendence of Domestic utilities and other competent authorities require it.
25.3 GROUNDING OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

For the purposes of this regulation and in order to ensure safety of both the personnel working on
distribution circuits and the public in general, the following requirements must be met:
a. Grounding systems shall comply with the criteria set forth in section 15 of this General
Annex.
b. The Grid Operator shall provide the designers of a project with the maximum ground fault
current expected in the corresponding node.
c. Workers shall consider every metallic part which is not grounded as energized with the
highest voltage to which they are exposed, unless it is verified by means of testing that
those pieces are not energized.
25.4 SUPPORT STRUCTURES

Overhead distribution grids shall be supported on structures such as towers, turrets, concrete
poles made in any construction technique (pre-tensed or reinforced), iron poles, wooden poles, or
of other materials provided they comply with the following requirements additional to the ones
applicable from Chapter 3 in this Annex:
Poles, towers or turrets used as supports of distribution grids shall have a breaking tension of
minimum 2.5 times for concrete and 2 times for metallic and reinforced polymer materi als,
understanding sys factor as the sum of mechanical tensions resulting from the interaction of
different strains to which the structure is subject. To do this, it is necessary to take into account
the strains of the electric grid cables and other elements and cables that act upon the structure.
a. Poles or structures with standardized dimensions and breaking loads shall be used.
b. Wooden poles and all wooden elements used in distribution grids shall be duly treated for
protection against fungi and other agents that accelerate their deterioration.
156
c. They must be protected against corrosion, in order to withstand a useful life of no le ss

than 25 years, and those supporting medium voltage grids shall be solidly grounded. Paint
shall be of epoxy resin with appropriate thickness to withstand abrasion, corrosion,
humidity, and detachment, complying with the provisions of ASTM standards with regards
to paints.
d. Welding used to manufacture a metallic pole shall comply with the provisions of ASCE-48.
e. Poles with fissures or other deterioration that compromise the mechanical conditions and
safety of the structure shall be replaced.
f. Poles or suspension structures may be manufactured in synthetic materials provided that

their resistance to breaking is greater than 250 kgf, their assembly is made on places of
difficult access, there is not any concentration of people in their vicinity, their mec hanical
resistance to breaking exceeds the resulting of the forces acting on the pole in conditions
of lower temperature and maximum wind, and that it is certified for environmental
conditions similar to the ones of the place of installation.
g. Installation of concrete poles or metallic turrets is permitted in non interconnected areas

an places of difficult access, constructed or assembled onsite or in nearby places.
Conformity of these poles or turrets with this regulation shall be made through statement
of the provider, using the criterion of the ISO/IEC/NTC 17050 standard parts 1 and 2. The
manufacturer shall sigh such statement and it must be accompanied by the designs,
technical description of materials and constructive techniques that ensure compliance
with mechanical and corrosion protection requirements set forth in this General Annex.
Similarly, the use of wooden posts is permitted, provided that they had been duly
immunized for a useful life not less than 15 years and that they withstand the mechan ical
loads to which they will be subject.
h. In urban or semi urban areas likely to have public lighting, structures shall be installed
taking into account the height and distances appropriate for a public lighting system that
complies with the purposes and requirements of the TRGSL.
25.5 FITTINGS
This designation covers all elements used for fastening insulators to the structure, support of
conductors, insulators, or return cable to the structure, electric protection elements of insulators
and accessories of the conductor such as spacers and buffers, which must comply with the
a. Fittings used in distribution shall prove compliance with the TREI by means of the
CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE issued by a body accredited by ONAC.
b. Fittings used in medium voltage circuits shall have a design appropriate to their
mechanical and electrical function, and they must withstand corrosive action during their
useful life. For these purposes, prevailing environmental characteristics of the are a where
they are required to be installed shall be taken into consideration.
c. Fittings subject to mechanical tension by conductors and return cables or by insulators

shall have a mechanical safety quotient of not less than 2.5 with regards to their work
load. When the minimum breaking load is verified by means of testing, the safety quotient
may be reduced to 2.
d. Retention clamps of the conductor shall withstand mechanical strain on the conductor not
less than 80% of the breaking load thereof, without producing sliding.
157
25.6 INSULATION
Distribution grids shall comply with the requirements of insulation of energized pieces in order to
avoid contact, both due to decrease in safety distances when air is the insulating media, or by
deficiencies or insufficiencies of insulating materials.
25.6.1 Safety distances in distribution grids
a. For the purposes of this regulation, conductors of distribution circuits shall comply with
the safety distances established in section 13 and the ones set forth for substations in
chapter 6 of this General Annex, as applicable.
b. New projects or expansion of buildings that are submitted to municipal or urban planning
offices or other authorities issuing construction permits or licenses shall observe strict
compliance with the TREI especially with regards to minimum safety distances and areas
of easement. Without prejudice of legal actions, then the official or planning officer does
not comply with this requirement, the grid operator affected by the decision shall
denounce it to the Attorneys General Office since the license or permit is an action
pertaining to a public function.
c. Whoever detects that constructors of buildings do not comply with the minimum safety
distances in electric distribution grids may denounce the fact before the competent
authority (SIC or municipal planning office) of non compliance with technical regulations.
d. Land Zoning Plans shall take into account what is set forth in Act 388 of 1997 or
regulations modifying it, substituting it, or regulating it with regards to limitations in the
use of land, in the sense of appropriating and respecting spaces for public utilities
networks.
25.6.2 Insulators
Insulators used in distribution shall prove compliance with this regulation by means of a
CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE issued by a certification body accredited by ONAC.
Additionally, they must comply with the following requirements:
a. Have as minimum the following breaking loads:
Disc-type suspension insulators shall have at least 80% of breaking load of the conductor
used.
Spool type: minimum equivalent to 50% of the breaking load of the conductor used.
Slip-on type (or equivalent to line post): minimum equivalent to 10% of breaking load of
the conductor used.
Tensor type: it must be verified that breaking load exceeds the mechanical strains to
which it shall be subject by the structure and template under the most unfavorable
environmental conditions.
b. Maintenance. The criterion to determine the loss of function shall be rupture or loss of
insulating qualities when tested to electric voltage and mechanical tension in accordance
with the applicable standards.
25.7 CONDUCTORS, RETURN CABLES, AND HOLDING CABLES

Conductors, return cables, and holding cables used in distribution grids shall comply with electrical
and mechanical requirements for the conditions where they are installed.
25.7.1 Overhead conductors
a. Conductors shall not be subject to mechanical tensions above the specified ones, and
overhead laying of lines shall not exceed 25% of breaking tension.
158
b. They must be installed with fittings appropriate for the type, material, and caliber of the
conductor.
c. The design must take into account the criterion of technical losses in the selection of the
economical conductor.
d. In areas where it is not possible to guarantee safety distances, insulated or semi insulated
conductors shall be used with the restrictions set forth in section 13 of this General
Attachment.
e. Splices of overhead conductors shall ensure to operate at least to 90% of the mechanical
breaking tension without the conductor sliding.
f. Connectors or bonding with other conductors shall be of appropriate materials that do not
produce galvanic pairs, that may put the conductor at risk of breaking.
g. Conductors shall be replaced when there are signs of deterioration due to loss of threads,
effects of arcs and short circuits that decrease their breaking tension.
h. The owner or holder of an overhead line shall tense again the cables that have lost tension
over time and are in violation of the minimum safety height. If by applying that measure the
required height is not achieved, the height of support structures shall be increased, or use
insulated or semi insulated cables.
25.7.2 Underground conductors
For the purposes of this regulation, the following requirements for laying underground cables
adapted from the Argentinean Association of Electrical Engineering Regulations for Execution of
Electrical Installation in Constructions.
a. Cableways or ducts must be made of materials with the following characteristics:
- Non-hygroscopic.
- Maintain a protection grade appropriate to the type of use.
- Ensure that they do not tear or deteriorate the insulation of conductors.
b. The use of PVC dual-wall (TDP type) corrugated pipes or high density polyethylene is
accepted for the mechanical and thermal protection of medium and low voltage cables.
c. A minimum service distance of 0.20 m shall be kept between the external edge of the
conductor and any other utility (gas, water, heating, steam, compressed air, among
others). If this distance cannot be kept, the installations shall be effectively separated by
means of a closed row of bricks or other dielectric materials resistant to fir e and electric
arc, with a minimum thickness of 5 cm.
d. Conductors within the duct shall keep the same array along all of their run, ensuring that
separation of circuits is maintained.
e. The installation of cables above the level of finished floor is not permitted. Finished soil is
understood as the one people frequently walk on.
f. Burying depth for underground distribution grids ducts, taken from the upper surface of
the finished floor until the upper portion of the conductor or duct shall not be less tha n
the values of Table 25.1. Exception: when there are conflicts with other existing
159
underground installations below pedestrian areas for less than 150 V, they may be buried
at a depth not less than 0.45 m.
Depth of direct burying

Phase phase voltage (V) Depth of duct (m)
conductor (m)
Public lighting 0.50 0.50
0 to 600 0.60 0.60
601 to 34500 0.75 0.95
34501 to 57500 1.00 1.20
Table 25.1. Minimum depths for burying underground distribution networks
g. Ducts will be placed with a minimum slope of 0.1% towards the inspection chambers, in a
trench of sufficient depth which allows coverage of filling over the duct.
h. Underground cables installed below constructions shall be housed in a duct that comes
out at least 0.30 m from the perimeter of the construction.
i. All conductors of a line circuit, either single phase or polyphase, shall be installed with
their neutral and grounding conductor in the same duct. If due to the dimensions of the
duct not all of the conductors fit, parallel ducts must be used provided tha t they are
nearby and that they are not made in electric conductive materials. In metallic or
conductive ducts, all of the circuit must go in the same duct since incomplete circuits
induce currents that heat the duct, compromising safety.
j. Underground cableways based on ducts shall have inspection chambers. They must be
installed in straight runs, at distances not exceeding 80 m, except when there are causes
duly justified in pulling tension calculations that demand a different distance (for example,
crossing large avenues). In this case, there should be a note in the calculation record or
technical specification of the project.
k. For direct burying cables, the bottom of the trench shall be a firm, smooth surface free of
unevenness and without any obstacles. Cable shall be laid with a protective barrier against
mechanical deterioration, for which bricks or other type of mechanical cover may be used.
Identification or signaling tapes shall be installed at a distance between 20 and 30 cm
above the cable. They shall be non degradable in a time less than the useful life of the
buried cable.
l. All of the transitions between types of cables, bonding to loads or branches shall be made
in chambers or inspection boxes which allow to keep the applicable conditions an d
protection grades. The internal dimensions of the inspection boxes, branches, bonding, or
outlets shall be appropriate to the specific functions and allow laying the cable in function
of the conductors section.
m. Boxes and caps for underground grids may be prefabricated provided that they are made
of corrosion-resistant materials. They must also withstand impact and crushing, depending
on the environment and use of soil where they are installed. This must be proved by
means of the compliance with a technical standard for this type of product such as
ANSI/STCE 77.
n. The circuit and its phases shall be duly identified in the inspection chambers.
o. Splices and branches of conductors shall be accessible.
p. Conductors bonding shall ensure maximum tightness possible and they shall not alter their
internal transversal section. When metallic ducts are used, they must be hot dip
galvanized and be electrically grounded.
160
q. The use of aluminum conductors is permitted in low and medium voltage underground
grids provided that the cable is certified for its use underground. It shall be installed by
qualified professionals and it shall comply with an international standard, a standard
recognized internationally, or NTC both for the product and the installation.
25.8 MAINTENANCE
The grid operator or whoever manages the grid must ensure appropriate maintenance of its grids
and distribution substations to minimize and eliminate risks both of electrical and mechanical
nature associated to the distribution infrastructure, and it shall provide evidences by means of
records of the activities developed in such maintenances.
SECTION 26. SAFETY INFORMATION FOR THE USER AND GENERAL PUBLIC
Those responsible for the operation of electrical distribution systems shall maintain the population
informed about the risks associated to electricity. The Superintendence of Domestic utilities may
verify the compliance with this requirement.
26.1 SAFETY BROCHURE

The Grid Operator shall produce and divulge a brochure intended for household, commercial, and
industrial users where emphasis is made on safety conditions and proper use of electric power,
taking into account the following considerations as minimum:
a. It must be written in a clear, concise, and practical manner; if possible it should have
illustrations of relevant text.
b. It must be addressed to end-user and potential users. It must be handed when an

electrical installation is commissioned. Similarly, it must be available for consultation in
customer service points.
c. It shall indicate the procedures to be followed in order to get information and illustration
with regards to the electric energy service, including procedures related to requests for
service expansion, identification and communication with the service providing company.
d. It shall inform how and where to report emergencies that may occur inside or outside the
domicile.
e. It shall summarize the main first aid actions in case of electrical contact.
f. It shall contain practical recommendations about handling electric devices.
26.2 PERIODIC INFORMATION
The Grid Operator or trader, as the case may be, shall instruct the user of the energy service at
least every six months about safety recommendations. These can be printed on the invoice or on
fliers attached to it, with a font type of at least 8 points. Similarly, warning campaigns about risks
associated to the grids shall be carried out, especially for those adjacent to houses.
When there is preventive or corrective maintenance on the grid, the GO shall inform the residents
living near the maintenance job site (in urban grids, minimum one side of the block where
maintenance is conducted) about the risks of electrical nature that may b e caused by inadequate
practices that break the minimum safety distances or the areas of easement, and evidence thereof
shall be recorded. Similar treatment shall be given to the processes of grids revision and
supervision in those places that pose greater vulnerability to electric risks as per the GO opinion.
161
162
CHAPTER 8
REQUIREMENTS FOR END-USE INSTALLATIONS
This chapter of the regulation is applicable to electrical installations intended for the connection of
equipment or devices, or for end-use of electricity in all types of construction, either public or
private. As in other chapters of the regulation, the requirements set forth apply to normal and
nominal conditions of the installation.
In general, the chapter comprises electrical systems ranging from the limit with the general service
grid including the service line or branches which deliver energy to the user inlet equipment to the
interior of a building or to the connection point for equipment or consuming elements. In the
cases of installations owned by the Grid Operator that include substations for service of several
users, the service line and the substation are considered as part of the distribution grid
installation.
Installations for end-use of electricity, commonly known as indoor, household, or receiving
installations, are the ones fed by a distribution grid or by an own power source. Their purpose is to
allow delivery of electric energy to the user. Any receiving installation falls within this concept,
although all or some of its parts are located outdoors.
For the purposes of this regulation, the requirements contained in this chapter shall be taken as
complementary for requirements in the other chapters.
SECTION 27. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR END-USE INSTALLATIONS

If an end-use electrical installation integrates circuits and elements in which the voltages used are
greater than the limit set for low voltage and for which this chapter does not provide a specific
requirement, the technical and safety provisions for medium or high vo ltage shall be met in such
installation.
Safety measures shall be adopted in end-use installations for the protection of both the users and
the grids and assets connected to them. These measures shall be specified in accordance with the
electrical characteristics of the receiving devices.
The high number of fires caused by deficiencies in installation, especially with regards to sizing of
conductors and protections, wrong connections, damages on insulation of conductors and splices,
use of inappropriate equipment, devices, and materials, use of lamps and lighting without room
for heat dissipation, makes mandatory the strict compliance with the regulations for constructing
the installation and observe the guidelines from other technical regulations, such as the one for
General and Street Lighting.
27.1 APPLICATION OF TECHNICAL STANDARDS

Since the content of NTC 2050 First Update (Colombian Electrical Code, November 25, 1998)
based on the NFPA 70 (1996) technical standard, falls within the approach a technical regulation
shall have, and considering it has full application in installations for the use of electric energy
including the ones of buildings used by companies providing the electricity service, the first seven
chapters and their related tables are declared of mandatory compliance (as they were published in
the Official Gazette No. 45592 of June 27, 2004), including the tables on chapter 9 NTC 2050 and
the introduction in aspects that do not contradict this regulation. Consequently, those items from
the aforementioned standard are integral part of the Technical Regulation for Electrical
Installations TREI.
The chapters of mandatory compliance are:
1. Definitions and general requirements for electrical installations.
2. Requirements of wiring and protections.
3. Installations methods and materials.
4. Installation requirements for equipment and general purpose elements.
163
5. Requirements for special environments.

6. Requirements for special pieces of equipment.
7. Special conditions of installations.
Considerations established in section 90 (introduction) shall be taken for the appropriate

application of these chapters. The qualified person who uses the standard must take into account
all considerations and exceptions applicable to each case.
In the event that there are differences between this General Annex and NTC 2050 or IEC 60364,
the provisions of the General Annex shall prevail and the authority to settle any conflict arising
from interpretation of the regulation is the Ministry of Mines and Energy.
Similarly, end-use installations which comply with international technical standards from the IEC
60364 series shall be accepted. In such installations these standards shall be of mandatory
compliance.
Installations where norms of NTC 2050 are combined with the ones from IEC 60364 shall not be
accepted because this may generate high safety risks, thus contravening the purpose of the
regulation.
The person who designs and construct the electrical installation shall mention clearly the standard
used.
27.2 EARTHING SCHEMES (ES)
Earthing schemes (ES), often referred to as neutral schemes have an internationally agreed
classification for low voltage electrical systems which are considered equivalent with regards to
safety of people in case of indirect contacts. Each scheme has its advantages. Th e most widely
known are TN and TT, whose letter designation code is accepted in the international standards.
Subject to the exceptions established in this General Annex and in NTC 2050, solid connection
earthing schemes (TN-C-S or TN-S) or TN limiting impedance are the only ones accepted for low
voltage grids for household or similar use. This means that the neutral point of the transformer
shall be solidly grounded and the user shall connect chassis ground to the grounded connector
(almost always the neutral connector). The letter S means that the neutral (N) and protection (P)
functions are combined into a single conductor (PEN). The grounding scheme where the neutral
and protection functions are carried out by the same conductor (TN -C) is expressly prohibited.
Figure 27.1 below illustrate the TN-C-S connection scheme.
Figure 27.1 TN-C-S earthing scheme

The IT scheme shall be applied to some specific areas or processes, not to the connection of one
service line. It requires a ground fault detection systems and insulation monitoring.
164
27.3 SERVICE LINES
The service line of an end-use electrical installation shall comply with the construction
requirements defined in section 230 of NTC 2050; its sizing shall take into account section 220. In
case that the installation is designed and constructed under the parameters of IEC, the service line
shall comply with the requirements of that standard. Additionally, they must comply with the
following:
a. Service lines going across vehicle roads shall comply with the following requirements:
cables shall be solidly fastened both to the supporting structure of the general purpose
mains and to the construction to be fed. Height may not be lower than 5.5 m or the one
that exceeds the maximum authorized height for vehicles using that road. In case that the
height of the building does not allow to reach such dimension, heavy galvanized steel
piping shall be used. It shall be of appropriate diameter and mechanical resistance; and if
it is necessary a pole or turret to lift the conductors at the crossroad, the piping shall have
a cap or element which avoids entry of water. The pipe or pole shall allow anchorage of a
hanger or fastening hook for service lines and it must be mechanically stabilized by means
of templates or embedded supports that do not generate risks of toppling or rupture.
Direct branching is permitted at any point on the span of a service line provided that
appropriate connectors are used and mechanical tensions are not caused on the general
purpose mains which may affect its stability.
b. Low voltage overhead service lines shall have antifraud features such as being concentric
or braided. They shall comply with a technical standard such as UL 854 or NTC 4564. They
must be fit for outdoor installations. Their material shall be copper, not less than 10 AWG
for one-phase installations of unstable capacity less than or equal to 3 kVA, and 8 AWG for
installations between 3 kVA and 10 kVA. For greater power, estimations shall be made in
accordance with section 220 of NTC 2050. In the event of using electric grade aluminum
conductors, they shall be of the AA8000 series, and the section shall be two calibers larger
than the copper conductor. Also, bimetallic connectors required to control corrosion due
to the galvanic pair effect, loosening, hot spots, or electric arc. The Grid Operator may
accept other types of cables fit for service lines provided that they meet the requirements
of installable capacity, use outdoors, and that they are certified for such purpose.
c. It must be ensured that voltage regulation on the service line does not exceed 3% in places
with low fraud level.
d. Use of bare conductors on facades or embedded directly is not permitted. Cables reaching
the meter box shall be enclosed in embedded metallic piping, and on places where due to
limitations of the wall materials the embedment is not possible, the raceway shall be
certified for use outdoors and impact test not less than the intermediate metallic piping.
Cables at sight shall be accepted only if the service cable is concentric, with jacketing in
XLPE or HDPE, that it does not have any loops that cause visual contamination on the
faade, nor they contravene municipal planning regulations or provisions of municipal
authorities with regards to faade and the situation is conveyed previously to the user.
Special agreements or provisions with the authorities or users shall not be necessary when
there is evidence of the users fraud or when losses attributable to the users exceed 10%
after subtracting the LV macro measurements values in the transformer subject to control
from energy billed to all users fed from that transformer and the technical losses of the LV
grid.
e. All necessary measures shall be taken in the installation of the service line in order to
avoid it becomes a means to carry rain water to the faade or the metering equipment.
f. Spliced service line conductors may be accepted provided that a technical proc edure
approved and accepted by the Grid Operator is used for the splice.
165
27.4 PROTECTION OF END-USE INSTALLATIONS
All installations for end-use of electricity must have protection elements and measures to avoid
the effects of over-current and overvoltage; to preserve the users from direct contacts with
energized pieces and annul the effects of indirect contacts. Similarly, they must have the
protections to avoid damages in the installation or in its surroundings.
In every end-use installation both the neutral and earthing conductor shall be independent,
and they must be connected with an equipotential bond in the general switchboard, where the
main protection is located and it connects to the installation grounding.
27.4.1 Protection measures against direct contact or basic protection
a. Proper insulation must be in place in accordance with the voltage level of the energized
piece.
b. Ensure proper distance of people from pieces subject to voltage.
c. Obstacles or barriers that avoid access of unauthorized people to energized pieces shall be
placed.
d. Very low voltage systems (< 50 V in dry locations, < 24 V in humid locations) shall be used
in some types of applications.
e. There must be automatic breaking devices for feed in each circuit.
f. In areas where installation generates greater vulnerability of persons to step current such
as wet areas, high sensitivity differential breakers (GFCI or RCD) shall be used.
g. Insulated power systems shall be used in some facilities as needed.
27.4.2 Protection measure against indirect contact or fault protection
a. Insulation must be appropriate for the voltage level of the equipment.
b. Every electrical installation shall have available a grounding system, unless this General
Annex or international technical standards specify otherwise.
c. Every carcasses or chassis of equipment shall have earthing connection to protect people
against leakage currents.
d. Simultaneous inaccessibility among conductors and grounding shall be sought.
e. Equipotential bonding shall be available.
f. Circuits protected by a differential leak breaker shall operate with a sensitivity curve that
exceeds the demand of curve C1 on Figure 9.1 herein.
g. Very low voltage systems shall be used in some installations.
h. Some installations shall have galvanically insulated circuits with safety transformers.
27.4.3 Protection against over-currents
166
a. Every end-use electrical installation shall have automatic over-current protection .
b. Each circuit shall have an automatic breaker to protect it from over-currents.
c. The breaker trip current shall not exceed the current to which the conductor insulation or
associated pieces of equipment reach the maximum allowed operation temperature. The
automatic breaker shall not be replaced by one of largest capacity which exceeds the load
capacity of the conductors on the circuit to be protected.
d. The switchboard where automatic breakers are housed shall be easily accessible, that is to
say, that neither additional elements nor removing obstacles is required in order to access
it. The board shall allow manual action of the breakers, and the work room where the
board is located shall have dimensions that allow mobility of the operator who requires to
remove the switchboard covers, open its doors, remove, repair or do maintenance on its
components.
27.5 MAINTENANCE AND PRESERVATION OF END-USE INSTALLATIONS
a. The owner or holder of any end-use electrical installation regardless of the construction
date, shall maintain it and preserve it in good condition in such way that it does not pose
risk or imminent hazard to the health or life of people, the environment, or the facility
itself and its surroundings. Consequently, the owner shall be responsible for t he effects
resulting from lack of maintenance or inappropriate operation of such installation.
b. In the event that an end-use electrical installation has high risk for health or life of people,
the owner or holder of the installation shall correct the deficiency in the least time
possible and notify the Grid Operator of such situation if necessary. In case that the owner
or holder does not correct the anomaly, any person aware of the situation must contact
the grid Operator or whoever provides the electric power service so that in accordance
with the Uniform Contract for Provision of Services, the former takes the necessary
measures. Whoever reports the situation shall identify himself and specify the address of
the place where high risk or imminent hazard occurs.
c. Maintenance and preservation works shall be carried out by qualified professionals who
shall inform the owner about the deficiencies of the installation, aid in their correction,
and shall be jointly responsible with the installation owner or holder for the effects caused
by any deficiency.
d. The owner or holder of an electrical installation where an accident of electr ical nature
takes place and causes severe injury or death to a person, shall report it to the competent
authority and the trader who provides the service. The name of the person having the
accident, type of accident, place, and date of the event shall be reported. If the owner fails
to do so, any person may denounce the fact.
27.6 CLASSIFICATION OF END-USE INSTALLATIONS

For the purposes of this regulation, installations for end-use of electricity are classified into:
a. Basic installations.
b. Provisional installations.
c. Special installations.
167
SECTION 28. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ACCORDING TO TYPE OF INSTALLATION
28.1 BASIC INSTALLATIONS
These are installations of low complexity and risk which adhere to the first four chapters of NTC
2050 First Update and external low voltage grids, both for private use and those intended for the
provision of public electricity service. Additionally, the following requirements shall be met:
a. In housing units with installable capacity less than or equal to 7 kW it is permitted that
outlets with ground fault current interrupters can be part of the circuit for small kitchen
appliances, power and lighting in bathrooms provided that there are not more than two
double-outlets on the kitchen counter and no more than one double outlet in the
bathroom.
b. In dormitories with areas less than or equal to 9 m 2 it may be accepted to have only two
double outlets, provided that they are located on opposite walls. For the rest of the house,
the provisions of article 210.52 of NTC 2050 shall be followed, considering the mobility
exceptions.
c. The installation of power outlets with ground protection shall be demanded in spaces and
conditions determined by NTC 2050, taking into account that the purpose is the protection
of people against indirect contacts with leakage currents, mainly for the frequent
connection and disconnection of equipment in conditions of greater vulnerability, for
instance in cases of wet or submerged skin.
d. In bathrooms that contain bathtubs, showers or washbasins and surrounding areas, the
risk of contact increases due to the reduction of the wet human body electrical resistance
and greater contact with earth; therefore, only electrical showers that comply with both
product and installation requirements set forth in subsection 20.15 of this Annex shall be
accepted. Power outlets shall be protected with a ground fault breaker and switches are
not installed in wet areas or less than 80 cm from the door of the shower area.
e. Electrical showers shall be installed in appropriate circuits with capacity not less than 30 A
for single phase installation at a tension less than 150 V and 20 A for 208/220/240 V
protected with an automatic breaker with fully identified neutral and ground conductors,
solidly grounded, or have a differential protection available.
f. Bathrooms of social areas in houses are exempted from the installation of power outlets
near washbasins, provided that electrical equipment of more than 25 volts are not used in
that room other than the fixed lighting systems, and the other bathrooms in the house
have power outlets with ground fault protection. Under no circumstance the use of
electrical extensions or power strips is permitted in the bathrooms unless they are derived
from a power outlet with ground fault protection.
g. Electrical installations in housing units with constructed area less than 50 m 2 and
installable capacity not exceeding 7 kVA shall be assembled with at least the following
circuits:
1. A circuit for small kitchen, counter top, and dining room appliances, with capacity not
less than 20 A. The bathroom load can be incorporated to this circuit.
2. One circuit for connecting the washing machine and iron, of capacity not less than 20
A.J
3. One circuit for lighting and general purpose outlets in the rest of the house, with a
capacity not less than 20 A.
4. Installations located at altitudes above 1500 m.a.s.l shall have an exclusive circuit for
the electrical shower unless that at the time of proving conformity with the TREI, the
bathroom already has another means to heat water for personal cleaning
168
Note 1: some of these particular requirements may deviate from NTC 2050.
Note 2: The number and capacity of the circuits for housing units of greater size and greater
installable power shall comply with the requirements of NTC 2050.
28.2 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS
For the purposes of complying with the TREI, a temporary installation shall be understood as the
one erected to provide energy service to a construction project with a time of validity until definite
energizing, completion of the construction, or temporary energy supply for transient facilities such
as fairs or shows, assembly of equipment, demolitions, and research projects such as s eismic tests
or exploratory drilling. The condition of temporality shall be granted for terms not exceeding six
months (extendable as per the criteria of the GO or whoever provides the service, upon prior
request of the user). The Grid Operator, and in ge neral whoever provides the temporary service
shall suspend energy supply to the temporary installation when it poses high risk or unsafe
practices are conducted in the operation which may jeopardize the health or life of people, the
environment, or integrity of the assets connected to the installation. 34
The temporary installation shall comply with what is specified in section 305 of the Colombian
Electric Code (NTC 2050, First Update) and with the following requirements:
a. It must have a provisional switchboard or distribution system with ground fault protection,
except for equipment which do not permit it because differential protection may cause a
greater risk.
b. Energy service to temporary installations shall be conditioned to the presentation of a

control procedure written by a qualified professional about the electrical risks of such
installation and the said professional is responsible for their compliance either directly or
through another qualified professional. The procedure, as well as the name and
professional license number of the person responsible, shall be available to the Grid
Operator and any other competent authority.
c. Certification is not required due to the transient nature and constant modifications this
type of installations have. Certification is replaced by the document of the procedure
established for control thereof, signed by qualified personnel responsible for its
compliance during the time the installation is in place.
d. Under no circumstance the temporary installation shall be left as definite.
e. For temporary electrical installations in fairs or shows, the local authorities responsible for
this type of activities shall demand and verify compliance with safety requirements in such
facilities. The Grid Operator may de-energize those installations that have imminent
hazard for people.
The following minimum requirements shall be met in temporary installations:

- Every circuit shall have an over-current protection, with appropriate enclosure against
direct or indirect contact of personnel.
- Direct installation of cables on the floor which may be tread by people or vehicles is
not permitted, unless they are certified for such application.
- The use of power outlets without appropriate enclosure is not permitted.
- Mobile conductors shall be cable-type, jacketed for such use.
28.3 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS

Installations that due to their location in environments classified as hazardous or for feeding
complex systems or pieces of equipment, have greater likelihood of risk than a basic installation ,
therefore requiring special measures to mitigate or eliminate such risks. The following special
34
Paragraph modified by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
169
installations shall comply with the requirements set forth both on the General Annex and in NTC
2050 for each one:
28.3.1 Electrical installations in places classified as hazardous.
Potentially explosive atmospheres may generate in areas classified as hazardous or of high risk due
to local and operational conditions which enable the continuance of a combustion process, after
ignition took place. Therefore the facilities must comply with the following requirements:
a. Both the pieces of equipment and the installations shall comply with applicable
international standards, standards of international recognition, or NTC, such as: IEC
60079-0/14; ANSI/NFPA 30; ANSI/NFPA 32; ANSI/NFPA 33; ANSI/NFPA 34; ANSI/NFPA
35; ANSI/NFPA 36; ANSI/NFPA 45; ANSI/NFPA 50A; ANSI/NFPA 50B; ANSI/NFPA 58;
ANSI/NFPA 59; ANSI/NFPA 325; ANSI/NFPA 496; ANSI/NFPA 497; ANSI/NFPA 499;
ANSI/NFPA 820; ANSI/NFPA 913; ANSI/UL 1203; ANSI/API 500; API RP 2003; API 545; UL
1604; ANSI/ISA-S12.10 and the certificate shall mention the permitted and non permitted
applications.
b. Since it is inevitable that during the preparation, processing, transport, and storage of
flammable substances, chemical products and petroleum derivates leaks occur that in
contact with oxygen in the atmosphere may produce mixtures of an explosive
concentration, places where there is presence of an electrical installation or piece of
equipment shall be classified. Classification shall be made depending on the properties of
flammable vapors, liquids, or gases, and combustible powders or fibers that may be in
them and the likelihood that flammable or combustible concentrations or quantities may
produce, generating a potentially explosive atmosphere. When the only materials used or
handled in those places are pyrophoric (materials which light upon contact with air) these
places shall not be classified.
c. For the classification of the area, the following factors shall be conside red at least: a)
ambient temperature, b) barometric pressure, c) humidity, d) ventilation, e) distance to
the gas or vapor source, and f) physic-chemical characteristics of the product handled
(density, pressure, flash point, ignition temperature, limits of explosion, etc.). Ignition
sources or risk factors such as: hot surface, flames, hot gases and particles, sparks of
mechanical origin, electric arc and sparks, eddy currents, static electricity, lightning,
electromagnetic waves, ionizing radiations, ultrasound, adiabatic compression and shock
waves, and exothermal reactions shall be considered. The following energy levels shall be
taken into account: Minimum Ignition Energy (MIE), Most Easily Ignited Concentration
(MEIC), Lower Explosive limit (LEL), and Upper Explosive Limit (UEL).
d. Areas classification, wiring, and selection of the equipment shall be supervised by an

engineer qualified in these procedures. This shall be provable by means of certified
experience or certificate of professional competency. All other areas designated as
hazardous places shall be properly documented. This documentation shall be available for
those who are authorized to design, install, inspect, maintain, or operate the electrical
equipment in the location.
e. Areas classification shall be made in accordance with the IEC methodology (Zones) or
NFPA (Classes, Divisions), and also with regards to groups and temperature codes, as
follows:
According to IEC, the classification is based on zones, to wit:

- Zone 0 comprises areas in which there is presence of an explosive gas atmosphere in
permanent manner or for extended periods.
- Zone 1 comprises areas in which it may be expected to have presence of an explosive
gas atmosphere in an occasional manner or rarely.
- Zone 2 comprises areas in which the presence of an explosive gas can only be
expected in a very rare manner. The atmosphere is composed of a mixture of air with
flammable substances in the form of gas, vapor, or mist, and if it is generated, it shall
exist only for brief periods.
170
IEC also has specified zones for medical assistance, combustible powders and flammable fibers,
and an independent classification for underground mining.
There are three groups in the zones classification system:
- Group IIC for hydrogen and acetylene.
- Group IIB for acetaldehyde and ethylene.
- Group IIA for methane, gasoline, and propane.
According to NFPA classes are associated to the type or form of substances existing in the
environment:
- Class I: Flammable gases, vapors, and liquids.
- Class II: Combustible powders.
- Class III: Combustible fibers and particles.
Divisions refer to the frequency in which there may be presence flammable gases or vapors,
combustible powders or fibers in the air, with a quantity sufficient for producing exp losive or
flammable mixtures in:
- Division 1: Normal operating or maintenance conditions.
- Division 2: Abnormal operation, or place adjacent to Division 1.
Groups refer to more precise classifications per explosive power and explosive limits of materials,
as follows:
- Class I is divided into four groups: A Acetylene, B Hydrogen, C Ethylene, and D
Propane.
- Class II, only in Division 1, is classified into three groups: E Metals, F Carbon, and G
organic grains.
- For Class III there is not a group classification.
Similar to the classification method per hazardous areas or Classes, the Zones method also groups
hazardous gases or vapors, and is based on the characteristics of those gases or vapors.
Temperature code. Both in the Classes and Zones methods require that the equipment is labeled
to show the operation temperature or temperature range. Temperature range is identified by
means of a number.
f. Every location, section, or area shall be considered individually for their classification.
Equipment shall be constructed and installed so that they ensure safe operation in
appropriate conditions of maintenance and use.
g. Service stations supplying gasoline and natural gas for vehicles shall have areas
classification drawings.
h. Presence of flammable materials (gas, vapor, mist, or powder) and air (oxygen) shall be
avoided in conditions and quantities appropriate to produce an explosive mixture. If this
condition cannot be guaranteed, special actions shall be taken to control energy of the
ignition sources.
i. Installations of petrochemical industries, natural gas plants, refineries, and others

indicated in chapter 5 of NTC 2050 standard, shall have available and in effect the areas
classification drawings, which shall be prepared and signed by an engineer expert in
classified areas and processes. These are very important safety documents on which the
designer of the electrical installations shall rely upon. These drawings shall be available in
the calculation records of the study conducted in order to classify these explosion risks.
j. The classification is active, i.e., it shall remain updated every time production processes or
magnitudes are modified, or every time the users measure explosive atmospheres outside
already classified sites.
k. Electrical equipment installed in hazardous areas shall be approved for the classification
parameters of the corresponding area. They must be labeled and they shall comply with
171
the requirements of an international standard, a standard of international recognition, or

NTC for the product and use.
l. Two risk control philosophies are accepted: those which avoid the explosive atmosphere,
substituting the explosive substance for another, limiting its concentration, or promoting
appropriate inerting or ventilation, or those which limit the effects of the explosion by
making the constructive elements take it to acceptable levels. One of these two
philosophies shall be applied in order to control risk. Some accepted protection
techniques are:
- Explosion proof equipment. They contain the explosion and allow gases to cool down
and escape from the enclosure through threaded, flat, or dentate joints. These metal
enclosures are drilled and threaded for the use of metallic piping or cable glands.
- Intrinsic safety. A type of protection in which the electrical device contains circuits
that do not have the possibility of causing an explosion in the surrounding
atmosphere. A circuit or one part of the system are intrinsically safe when a spark or
thermal effect on this circuit produced in normal or fault operation conditions cannot
cause ignition.
- Increased security. This type of protection is used for electrical devices that under
normal operation conditions do not cause ignition. Devices that produce arcs or sparks
during their normal operation or devices that generate excessive heat are not
appropriate in this type of protection. Therefore, this sort of protection is not used on
pieces of equipment such as breakers, startup/shutdown stations, or motors.
- Flameproof equipment. A type of protection in which the pieces, that can ignite an
explosive atmosphere, are placed in an airtight enclosure which may resist pressure
generated in an internal detonation of an explosive mixture and avoids the
propagation of the explosion to explosive atmospheres surrounding the enclosure.
Transmission of the explosion to the surrounding atmosphere is avoided.
- Pressurization. A type of protection in which the ingress of a surrounding atmosphere
into the enclosure of an electrical piece of equipment is avoided by means of
maintaining such enclosure with a protective gas (air, inert gas, or other appropriate)
at a pressure higher than the one of the surrounding atmosphere.
- Oil immersion. A type of protection in which the electrical equipment or part thereof
is immersed in oil in such a way that the explosive atmosphere that may be generated
above the oil or outside the protective enclosure may not be ignited.
- Powder filling. A type of protection in which the enclosure of ele ctrical equipment is
filled with a material in the shape of fine grains, which under expected operation
conditions will not ignite the surrounding atmosphere in case of having an electric arc.
- Molding. A type of protection in which the pieces that may ign ite an explosive
atmosphere are enclosed within a resin, with effective resistance to environmental
influences, so that this explosive atmosphere may not be ignited by sparks or heating
that may be caused within the enclosure.
Fuel gas detection systems and dust ignition proof units are also valid.
m. Electrical products selected to operate in an environment classified as hazardous, shall be
designed and manufactured for safe use, with appropriate installation and maintenance,
and they must prove such condition by means of a product certificate, stating the
application for which it is designed and the applicable standard. It must be taken into
account that most equipment may be placed in less hazardous or not hazardous locations,
thus reducing the number of special equipment necessary.
n. For the selection of the pieces of equipment, these shall be approved not only for the
Class, Division (or Zone), Group, and Temperature Classification (Code) of the place but
also based on explosive or combustible properties of the gas, vapor, powders, fibers, or
particles present. Additionally, heat produced by the equipment shall be considered. They
shall not operate on temperatures above the one indicated by the manufacturer, which
may be potentially a source of ignition.
172
o. In explosion proof equipment, the covers thereof shall contain and prevent the outward
propagation of flames through the joints or openings in order to avoid that surrounding
vapor mixtures ignite. The covers shall be sufficiently strong to resist the internal ignition
pressure without breaking or deforming severely. The temperature of the cover shall not
increase in a way that may ignite surrounding gases or vapors.
p. Electrical equipment shall be selected so that it is ensured that the Thermal Class indicated
in the equipment does not exceed the flash point of the explosive substance existing in the
location the equipment is installed.
q. Equipotential bonding shall be made by means of fittings or other means appropriate to

that purpose. Contact of locknut or double lock nut nozzles shall not be accepted as
equipotential bonding. The means for equipotential bonding shall be applied to all
cableways, fittings, boxes, cabinets, etc., involved between Class I, II, or III locations and
the grounding point of the service equipment or an independent derived system. When
flexible metal tubes or liquid tight metal tubes are used as only means of grounding,
equipotential bridges shall be installed internally in parallel to each conduit, complying
with the provisions of section 250-79 of NTC 2050.
28.3.2 Installations in medical assistance institutions
The main purpose of this subsection is the protection of patients and other people working or
visiting such buildings by reducing to the minimum the electrical risks that may cause
electrocution or burns on people, and fire or explosions in medical areas.
The importance of this type of installation lies on the fact that patients in critical areas may be
electrocuted with currents in the magnitude of microamperes that might not be detected or
measured, especially when an electric conductor is connected directly to the patients hear t
muscle. Therefore, it is necessary to have extreme safety measures.
The requirements for this type of installation apply both to constructions dedicated exclusively to
medical attention of patients and to those intended for other purposes but where ther e is at least
one area for health diagnostics and care either in permanent or ambulatory manner. This also
applies to dental clinics, health centers, and in general those places where the patient is subject to
invasive processes with electro-medical equipment.
These medical attention facilities besides complying with the general requirements of end-use
installations as applicable, shall comply with the following specific requirements:
a. Medical facilities shall comply with the provisions of NTC 2050 First U pdate, particularly
Section 517. Similarly, medical facilities that comply with IEC 60364 -7-710 are accepted.
Combination of standards shall not be accepted.
b. Design, construction, tests for commissioning, operation, and maintenance shall be given
to specialized professionals and exclusive standards for those facilities shall be followed.
c. An extraction system with sufficient ventilation shall be installed in laboratories in order to

evacuate gases, vapors, fumes, or others such as ethylene oxide (flammabl e and toxic
product).
d. Appropriate coordination shall be made of electrical protections with selectivity that

ensures continuity of the service. Breakers shall ensure that their trip power is equal to
the stated cutting current in service as per the IEC 60497-2 standard.
e. Clinics, hospitals, and health centers with medium voltage service line shall have available
an automatic transfer connected to other feed source.
f. Hospital facilities shall have installed an alternate electric power source which starts
operation within the 10 seconds following an outage of power from the normal system.
Besides, an automatic transfer system with grid commuting breaker (bypass) shall b e
available to permit in case of failure, switching electrical load to the normal system. In
173
critical areas covered by section 517-30 b) 4), for maximum demand of the essential
electrical system up to 150 kVA, a single transfer switch is permitted for one or more
branches or systems.
g. In critical medical areas, where continuity of power service is essential to preserve life, an
uninterruptible power source (UPS) shall be installed online for vital support electrical
equipment, medicinal gases control, and communications equipment. The feeding circuit
of these areas shall have cascaded protection against overvoltage and protective elements
shall be removable or possible to be unplugged to ensure a quick change in case of failure.
h. An insulated power or non-grounded system (called IT) shall be furnished in critical

medical areas, i.e., operating rooms, neonates units, ICU, special care units, coronary care
units, delivery rooms, cardiac catheter or angiography laboratories, intra-cardiac
procedures rooms, as well as areas where flammable anesthetics are handled (hazardous
areas) or where the patient is connected to pieces of equipment that may introduce
leakage currents in his body, and in other critical areas where deemed convenient . The
system shall be connected to derived circuits exclusive for the critical areas, which must be
assembled with electric conductors of very low leakage currents.
The insulated power system shall include an insulation transformer for critical hospital
area of very low leakage currents (microamperes), a line insulation monitor for 5 mA, and
conductors of non-grounded circuits. There shall be devices which allow to locate ground
faults as quickly as possible. All parts of the system shall be completely compatible. Each
one shall comply with technical standards for its application in medical centers, such as IEC
60364-7-7 10, UL 1047, NFPA 99 or equivalent standard, and prove compliance thereof by
means of certificate issued by an accredited certification body.
The insulated systems insulation transformer shall not have a nominal power of less than
0.5 kVA nor exceeding 10 kVA for critical care areas, or 25 kVA for x -ray switchboards.
Voltage in the secondary winding shall not exceed 250 V. The transformer shall be
assembled with an H or B type insulation, and it shall provide power at 150% of its
nominal capacity to supply large intermittent loads, ensuring that in case of an initial
ground fault a value as low as 5 mA can be maintained without interrupting power supply.
The insulation monitor shall give an alarm if the insulation resistance between phase and
ground is less than 5 k. Bipolar breakers of minimum 20 A shall be installed on the
transformers secondary winding, which shall open both the phase and the neutral of the
circuit only in case that a second power failure which generates short circuit occurs.
i. In wet areas where the interruption of electrical current under failure conditions may be
admitted, such as swimming pools, bathrooms, and therapeutic tubs, differential ground
fault breakers shall be installed for protecting people against electrocution, as well as next
to washbasins, regardless of whether or not these are inside a bathroom.
j. Conductive flooring shall be installed in medical areas where flammable anesthetics are
used, in hyperbaric chambers, or where applicable, to prevent that static electricity causes
sparks that generate explosion. Electrical equipment cannot be affixed less than 1.53 m
from the finished flooring (unless they are explosion proof), and medical staff shall use
conductive footwear.
k. Similarly, conductive flooring shall be installed on places where flammabl e anesthetics or

disinfectant products are stored. In this places, all electric equipment to be used at any
height shall be explosion proof.
l. The following shall be complied with in order to eliminate static electricity in medical
attention facilities:
174
- Maintain a constant electric potential on the floor of operating rooms and adjacent
areas by means of conductive flooring.
- Medical staff using the OR shall wear conductive shoes.
- Pieces of equipment to be used in environments with flammable anesthetics sha ll
have their casings and wheels made of a conductive material.
- The patients gowns shall be made of antistatic material.
m. Power outlets and fixed electrical equipment shall be connected to a redundant grounding
system in all patient care areas to provide protection against electrocution. The system
shall be comprised of:
- An insulated copper conductor, duly calculated, installed along with the corresponding
branch circuit supply conductors and connected both to the grounding terminal of the
outlet and to the grounding point of the distribution panel.
- A metallic raceway or cable assembled with jacket or metallic armor that hous es in its
interior the aforementioned branch circuit, connected on both ends to the grounding
terminal. Both the raceway and the assembled cable shall qualify as an equipment
grounding conductor (non-metallic raceways are not permitted).
n. Insulation boards for hospital use in operating rooms, intensive care units, coronary care
units, shall be certified for hospital use and they must comply with the requirements of an
applicable international standard, standard of international recognition or NTC, such as
UL1047.
o. The length of conductors and quality of their insulation in operating rooms and critical
care areas shall be such that leakage current in excess of 10 A are not generated as well
as voltages capable of producing currents in the patient exceeding 10 mA, considering that
the average resistance of the human body with exposed skin is 500 .
p. Distribution boards or panels of normal and emergency systems feeding the same patient
bed shall have equipotential bonding among them by means of an insulated cop per
conductor of caliber not less than 10 AWG. Every circuit in the emergency grid shall be
mechanically protected by means of non flexible mechanical raceway.
q. Power outlets which feed general or critical patients areas shall be designed to feed the
maximum number of equipment that need to operate simultaneously, and they must be
branched from at least two different power sources or from the replacement power
source (emergency plant) by means of two automatic transfers. Such outlets shall be dual,
with hospital grade earthing. In general patient areas, a minimum of four outlets must be
installed, and in critical patients areas, a minimum of six outlets; all of them grounded to
earth by means of an insulated copper conductor.
r. There shall not be power outlets in psychiatric areas. In pediatric areas, 125 V power
outlets of 15 or 20 A shall be tamper resistant or be protected by a cover of that type
(other receptacles or covers shall not be accepted in these areas).
s. All power outlets of the emergency system shall be of red color and be fully identified with
the number of the branch circuit and the name of the corresponding distribution board
The use of outlets with insulated grounding terminal (orange triangle) is not permitted in
areas of patient care.
t. Under no circumstance power strips shall be used in surgery rooms or critical care units.
u. Automatic breakers shall not be used as controls for turning on or off lighting in medical
attention center.
v. In areas where electric showers are used, they must be fed through a dedicated circuit,
protected by means of ground fault protection circuit breakers, and their connection shall
be water proof.
w. Conductors of normal, emergency, and non-grounded insulation systems may not share
the same raceways.
x. The necessary number of lighting power outlets must be provided to ensure safe access
for each area for patients, equipment, and supplies. Emergency battery -powered lighting
175
units shall be furnished where convenient for safety of people and where their installation
does not cause any risks.
y. Automatically operated doors used in buildings exits shall be included in the vital branch,
i.e., the subsystem of an emergency system.
z. An insulation coordination study shall be provided. This shall consider the use of cascaded
overvoltage protections in the most critical circuits to ensure continuity of the service in
events of transient surges caused by atmospheric discharges or maneuvers on the grid.
aa. Main distribution and transfer boards shall provide rapid service mechanisms in case of
failure. For instance, they shall incorporate removable modules or pluggable components.
28.3.3 Places with high concentration of people.
This section applies to electrical installations in places with high concentration of people, that is to
say, those places where at any time more than 50 people may gather simultaneously such as
public meeting places, large supermarkets, entertainment places such as theaters, cinemas,
carnivals, circuses, fairs and similar spectacles, auditoriums, bowling alleys, public canteens,
military quarters, gymnasiums, churches, museums, skate rinks, restaurants or food courts,
conference halls, waiting areas in airports, ports and mass transport stations, exhibit halls,
arcades, conference rooms, visitation rooms, ballrooms, and in general those considered in
sections 518, 520, 525, and 530 0f the Colombian Electric Code (NTC 2050 First Update). These
facilities shall comply with the general requirements of end-use installations set forth in the
applicable sections, as well as the following:
a. These installations shall be provided with an emergency power system intended to supply
automatically electric energy within 10 seconds after the power outage to lighting and
power systems for previously defined area and equipment, and in case of failure of the
system set to feed essential circuits for safety and human life.
b. Emergency systems shall supply energy to exit signs, ventilation, fire alarm, fire fighting
pumps, elevators, communication systems, industrial processes, and other systems in
which a power outage may produce serious hazards for safety of human lives. In places
where power backup source is required, the system shall provide autonomy for at least 60
minutes at full capacity without voltage decreasing 87.5% of its nominal value. When the
emergency system uses sets of batteries, they shall be provided with automatic charger.
When a generator set is used, there shall be outlets in the room for preheating, the
battery chargers, and any other necessary use.
c. Substations for service of places with high concentration of people or where fire produced
by transformers oil may be propagated in all of the building shall not have transformers
with insulation in oil unless they are confined in a vault with fire resistance of at least
three hours or the conditions set forth in subsections 450-42 and 450-43 of NTC 2050.
d. Electrical installations shall be operated and maintained by qualified professionals, who

shall ensure that under no circumstance the installation causes imminent hazard. Records
must be kept of the maintenance. These facilities shall be inspected by an accredited body
in periods not exceeding five years.
28.3.4 Prefabricated constructions.
Prefabricated buildings or houses and prefabricated components that incorporate electrical

installations shall comply with the requirements set forth in section 545 of NTC 2050.
28.3.5 Buildings for agricultural or livestock uses.
176
Electrical installations in buildings with high content of humidity, dust, dust with water or
corrosive atmospheres, such as the present in stables, agricultural, chicken, or hogs farms shall
comply with the requirements set forth in section 547 of NTC 2050.
28.3.6 Mobile homes, recreational vehicles, parked trailers.
Mobile homes, recreational vehicles, and trailers adapted as housing or similar applications, shall
comply with the applicable requirements of sections 550, 551, and 552 of NTC 2050.
28.3.7 Houseboats and stilt houses.
Houseboats and stilt houses subject to periodic flooding shall comply with the requirements of
section 553 of NTC 2050.
28.3.8 Special equipment installations.
The following are considered special equipment: luminous signs and contour lighting,
prefabricated wiring systems, prewired furniture and office partitions, gantry cranes and load
lifters, elevators, electrical escalators and mechanical walkways, wheel chairs elevators, electric
vehicles charging equipment, electric welding equipment, sound recording equipment and similar,
information technology or computing equipment, pipe organs, x-ray equipment, induction heating
and electrode loss equipment, electrolytic cells, plating equipment, industrial machines,
electrically driven or controlled irrigation equipment (including electrically driven motor pumps).
Installations associated to these pieces of equipment shall comply with the applicable
requirements established in sections 600 to 675 of NTC 2050.
28.3.9 Swimming pools, fountains, and similar facilities.
As pointed out in subsection 9.1 of this Annex, the capability of the human body to withstand an
electric current when the skin is wet or immersed is much less than in conditions of dry skin.
Therefore, it is required that electrical installations in swimming pools, fountains, and similar
facilities are executed by qualified persons and that they comply fully with the following
requirements:
a. Construction of electrical installations (conductors and equipment) located within or near

sports, recreational, therapeutic and decorative swimming pools, fountains, thermal
baths, permanent and portable hydro massage tubs, as well as their ancillary equipment
such as pumps, filters, and similar, shall comply with the requirement s set forth in section
680 of NTC 2050.
b. Lighting installations in the swimming pool must be fed from a non -grounded insulation
transformer of 12 V output, with electrostatic screen between the windings, which must
be certified for this particular use and whose primary winding shall work at a vol tage less
than or equal to 150 V. Similarly the swimming pool electrical installation may be fed
directly from branch protected by a ground fault differential breaker for lights operating at
more than 15 V but not exceeding 150 V.
28.3.10 Integrated systems and solar photovoltaic systems.
a. Installations of integrated systems in which it is necessary to have a scheduled shutdown

in order to get a safe operation shall comply with the requirements of section 685 of NTC
2050.
b. Installation of electric power generation photovoltaic systems, including their voltage

regulators, chargers, and inverters shall comply with the provisions of section 690 of NTC
177
2050. In housing or similar units the connection of solar systems at more than 220 V is
not permitted. When the accumulation charge in the batteries exceeds 100 A/h, they
must be installed in a ventilated room, independent from the place where the other
equipment of the photovoltaic system are housed.
28.3.11 Firefighting systems.
This is a type of special installation due to the importance of the pumps, and in general of all fire
fighting systems as means of safety in buildings. They must comply with the following
requirements besides the ones established in sections 695 and 670 of NTC 2050.
a. When the pumps require external electric feed this shall be provided independently from
the general service line, that is to say, from other service line dedicated for this purpose
and independent from the rest of the installation or from an emergency gene ration set,
thus avoiding a fire in the service line or in the substation may affect the installations of
the fire fighting pump. To do that, fire barriers shall be placed on the wiring.
b. The pump control shall be made by means of a controller certified for fire -fighting pumps.
It shall have a protection element only against short-circuits, not against overvoltage.
c. The power source shall be reliable and have the appropriate capacity to t ransport the
blocked rotor currents of the motor pump and ancillary equipment.
d. In order to ensure continuity of the energy service in the fire fighting system,
measurement of energy associated exclusively to the fire fighting system shall be made
with an indirect metering equipment, that is to say, using current transformers.
e. In order to avoid burns and achieve fire protection, materials connected in a stable
manner, likely to produce arcs or sparks under normal conditions shall comply at least
with one of the following conditions:
- They must be completely enclosed in arc-resistant materials. Materials of casings set

around electrical materials shall withstand the highest temperatures likely to be
produced by the electrical material.
- They shall be separated from the construction elements by means of arc-resistant
screens.
- They shall be installed at a sufficient distance from construction elements, on which
arcs and sparks may have detrimental effects, allowing a safe extinction thereof.
- Accessible parts of electrical equipment shall not reach temperatures likely to cause
burns on people, and they must meet the limits set forth on Table 28.1.
Accessible parts Materials of the Maximum

accessible parts temperature (C)
Manual control elements Metallic 55
Non-metallic 65
Pieces expected to be touched but not intended Metallic 70
to be grabbed with the hand Non-metallic 80
Not intended to be touched in normal service Metallic 80
Non-metallic 90
Table 28.1. Limits of temperature Electrical equipment
28.3.12 Emergency systems.
Those are the systems intended to provide electric power automatically to lighting, power, or both
types of systems for determined areas and equipment in the event of failure of normal supply or
178
failure in the components of a system set for supplying, distributing, or controlling essential power
or lighting for safety of human lives. These systems shall comply with the requirements
established in section 700 of NTC 2050.
Additional to the sources mentioned in NTC 2050 to prov ide energy for emergency systems, total
load may be kept for at least two hours with fuel cells or other power sources.
28.3.13 Other supply systems.
Systems of legal reserve, optional reserves, and interconnected electric power generation sources
are the equipment and circuits intended for the supply, distribution, and control of electricity for
lighting or power require to ensure continuity of service. These installations and equipment shall
comply with the requirements of NTC 2050, particularly sections 701, 702, and 705 respectively.
SECTION 29. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN MINES

For the purposes of this regulation and in order to ensure safety of people and equipment against
risks of electrical nature, electrical installations in mines shall comply with the following
requirements adapted from IEC 61557-8, DIN VDE 0118-1, NEMA 2C-58, or the Peruvian technical
standard on the use of electricity in mines.
29.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Every mine shall be assessed as a special facility and its areas shall be classified according
to the components present as set forth in this General Ann ex and in chapter 5 of NTC
2050. This requirement may be excepted only if after conducting a thorough study it is
proved that there is not and there will not be the presence of gases, liquids, or powders
that may cause a fire or explosion.
b. Every open pit or underground mine where electricity is used shall have available drawings
or diagrams showing updated information about the electrical system for the operation,
maintenance, or upon requirement of the competent authority.
c. Repairs, expansions, and modifications in electrical installations shall be made only by

qualified professionals, and they shall be recorded in the drawings or schemes.
d. Breakers shall be installed at the supply point of every temporary installation. To this
purpose, it is considered that temporary electrical installations are those intended for
maintenance and repair of equipment and structures, or moving of equipment exclusively
for the duration of the activity.
e. Every overhead grid shall comply with the safety distances set forth in section 13 of this
General Annex, increased in accordance with the maximum heights reachable by transport
and extraction equipment. Decommissioned lines shall be disconnected from the ir feed
source, insulated, and grounded.
f. Means for disconnection of a circuit shall be tagged and locked out in open position while
works are being conducted on a machine or piece of equipment.
g. Every area with electrical equipment shall have at least one fire extinguisher available.
h. Portable power cables not exceeding 750 V shall be certified for their use in mining such as
SCH-GC or similar, insulated at least for 2000 V.
i. Al cables installed within a mine or its escape routes shall not be flame propagators, and
they shall have low fumes emission. Portable power cables that operate at voltages
exceeding 750 V shall be grounded, screened power conductors, such as SHD type or
179
individually screened power conductors, ground conductors, and a grounding monitoring

conductor such as SHD-GC or similar; insulated at least for 25000 V. These cables shall be
flame proof and include this condition on their labeling.
j. When a mine is abandoned or ceases to be operated, all circuits shall be de-energized in

order to avoid hazard conditions for people.
k. Every electrical piece of equipment installed in places for storage of explosive, detonators,
or where in general there are environments with explosive gases or vapors shall comply
with the requirements corresponding to Class II, Division 2 classification as per NTC 2050
or its IEC equivalent.
l. Surface powder magazines shall be located minimum at 60 m from overhead lines and 100
m from electric substations.
m. Disconnecting means shall be installed in all circuits operating at voltages exceeding 300 V.
These must be of visible opening type or others indicating that the contacts are open and
located as close as possible to the supply point. The use of automatic b reakers of molded
box without visible opening is permitted provided that measures are taken to ensure that
all phases are open.
n. There must be an emergency lighting system when there is possibility of hazard for
personnel due to failure of the lighting system.
o. Every accessible section of an electrically driven conveyor belt shall have a safety cord that
runs along it, set in such way that it shutdowns the belt in case of emergency. The breaker
operated by the safety cord shall be of manual reposition. A conveyor belt used in an
underground mine or a conveyor belt exceeding 15 m long installed in a building or
enclosed structure shall have a detection device to shut down the motor in case that the
belt is obstructed or deviated.
p. When permanent splices are made on pull cables, these shall be mechanically strong, with
appropriate electrical conductivity, insulated and sealed in an effective manner to avoid
ingress of moisture. Their continuity and insulation shall be tested by qualified
professionals before commissioning.
q. Couplers used to join portable power cables operating at voltages exceeding 300 V shall
have a mechanical fastening device to join the cable coupler, with traction resistance
greater than the one of portable power cables; stress relief devices appropriate for the
portable power cable, and means to prevent ingress of moisture.
29.2 GROUNDING SYSTEM IN MINING INSTALLATIONS.

a. For the purpose of more protection and reducing arc in case of ground fault, supply
circuits shall be grounded through a limiting impedance (IT system) which requires a grid
insulation monitoring system that enables to indicate permanently continuity of the
grounding circuit and protects the installation by means of disconnection which must take
place maximum in 1.5 seconds or by activating an alarm system. Monitoring shall be
installed in a fault-proof circuit.
b. Limiting impedance shall be sized for continuous operation except when there is a
grounding trip device available, monitored in a way that it de -energizes the source if the
impedance opens, and connected to the neutral as close as possible to the source.
c. There must be an intermittent light lamp on grids with nominal tensions up to 1000 V in
areas of permanence of people, which shall turn on if the insulation resistance of the grid
180
falls below 50 per every volt of phase-ground nominal voltage. When a visible alarm is
used to indicate ground fault, this alarm shall be continuous until the fault is eliminated.
In case that both audible and visible alarms are used, the audible alarm may be cancelled
and replaced by the visible alarm until the fault is eliminated.
d. When there are non-grounded systems, a ground fault indicator device shall be installed
coupled to the circuit protection, In those cases, a ground fault shall be investigated and
eliminated as soon as possible.
29.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
29.3.1 Movable equipment. Movable equipment operating at low voltage exceeding 300 V and
connected to a voltage source with a portable power cable shall:
a. Use multiconductor portable power cables with ground conductors, ground check
conductor, and total screening for 2000 V or more, such as SHC-GC or similar ones.
b. Have ground fault protection and monitoring of the ground conductor on the side of the
source or connect to equipotential grid of the movable equipment grounding system using
an additional conductor of capacity equivalent to the ground conductors of the portable
power cable.
29.3.2 Mobile equipment. Portable power cables used to feed electrical mobile equipment shall
be SHC-GC, SHD-GC or similar, and be certified for use in mining. They shall have cable inlet
connectors that avoid ingress of water, dust, and other environmental elements to the splice box
and breakers box.
29.3.3 Mining vehicles. Every electric locomotive or vehicle on rails shall be equipped with lamps
that shall remain energized if the switch is in the on position.
a. Every moving locomotive shall emit a light in the direction of travel, which shall provide
lighting to make people and objects clearly visible at a minimum distance of 30 meters.
b. Every locomotive or electric vehicle on rails shall be equipped with some s ort of dead
man switch that must cut off power automatically when the operator abandons his
compartment.
29.3.4 Substations. Substations consisting of a set of electrical equipment assembled on a self -

supporting movable structure shall comply with the following:
a. The self supporting structure shall be fit for movement across irregular terrain, or have the
lifting means to enable lifting over a transport medium.
b. The power transformer and other substation components shall be within a completely
closed cover or enclosing chain link fence or equivalent barrier, with a minimum height of
two meters.
c. The transformer feeding power to a mobile electric equipment with more than 300 V a.c.
shall have a nominal power of at least 125% of the nominal power of the mobile electric
equipment it feeds.
d. Connection of the limiting impedance shall be made as close as possible to the neutral
point of the transformer. If the cable that connects the neutral of the transformer and the
181
grounding device is more than two meters long, it shall be protected against physical
damage.
e. Resistance of the movable substation grounding with electrodes shall be measured and
tested for ground fault after each installation or change of location. Changes shall be
made as necessary, until ensuring that the maximum elevation of grounding potential is
less than or equal to 100 V.
29.4 LIGHTING AND SIGNALLING.
a. Unloading areas where activities are carried out for exploitation or that may involve
several people and the intervention of a group may be expected shall be lighted, for
instance conveyor belts or chains, unloading on main and secondary headers, long strips,
areas of tensing and return of conveyors, etc.
b. Cabinets or boards dedicated to lighting control shall be provided.
c. Lighting circuits shall not have a voltage exceeding 240 V a.c. Therefore, if necessary for
regulation purposes, ancillary transformers shall be used, also called lighting transformers
or lighting trunks.
SECTION 30. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGROUND MINES.

Electrical installations of underground mines shall comply with the following requirements,
besides the applicable general requirements for mines.
30.1 CLASSIFICATION OF AREAS IN UNDERGROUND MINES.

Every underground mine shall be considered as an environment classified as hazardous due to the
proven or likely presence of explosive gas and powder. It shall be classified accordingly.
An underground exploitation where historically there is presence of potentially explosive gases

shall be classified as an explosion risk, whereas in a place where the risk of explosion has not been
detected, the potential risk may only be ruled out after h aving conducted a series of thorough,
exhaustive measurements that allow to conclude that the place shall not have presence of
explosive gases.
30.2 USE OF APPROPRIATE EQUIPMENT.

Equipment with appropriate grades of protection shall be used in undergroun d mines, both
against the penetration of solid bodies, gases or water, and against impact, considering the
IP Protection grade or its NEMA equivalent refer to the level of seal against dust and water
penetration within any enclosure. The identification of the protection level is made by means of
the letters IP followed by two figures. The first one indicates the seal level with regards to dust,
and the second one to water. In underground mines, at least the following IP grades or th eir
NEMA equivalents shall be used:
IP 20: Often referred to as finger safe protection. It is mainly intended to pieces of devices
contained in other enclosures, for instance disconnectors or ancillary transformers located in
the same compartment as the rest of devices.
IP 23: Demanded for enclosures of equipment without protection mode intended to be
installed within closed locations or rooms (i.e. without free access for personnel).
IP 54: For enclosures of equipment without protection mode when they are installed with
direct access for personnel (open places or locations). Also for equipment with flame retardant
enclosure protection.
IP 55: For enclosures of intrinsically safe equipment and those of increased security, or both,
as protection mode.
182
The IK grade of mechanical protection against impacts or its NEMA equivalent refers to
the grade of the enclosure protection, or part thereof, against impacts. It must be used on
any type of underground installation equipment, both in classified and in unclassified areas.
Indoor electrical equipment shall have high mechanical resistance in order to be able to
ensure electric supply with required safety for unclassified underground environments or
with risk of explosion. The minimum required IK grades are: I K09 for electrical equipment
intended to startup, commissioning, and in general any indoor works which imply proximity
to heavy machinery, and IK07 for other electrical equipment, general lighting, signaling,
control, gas metering, etc.
TRANSFORMERS ENCLOSURE: A transformer installed in an underground mine shall be

protected against physical damage. It must be preserved in a way that access of unqualified,
unauthorized personnel is not permitted. There must be spacing around the transfor mer to
allow safe access for inspection, maintenance, and repair. It must be mounted on a fire -
proof base and in a location that minimizes fire propagation. It shall not be used where
there is a flood hazard unless it is certified to work immersed, and it must be provided with
a cover that meets the requirements of NTC 2050.
TRANSFORMERS INSULATION: When a dry type or nitrogen filled transformer is installed in

an underground mine, it shall have insulating materials equal or superior to Class H as per
IEC 85, and it shall be at a minimum distance of three meters from areas of work or transit
of people.
ELECTRIC PANELS: Machines to perform works for startup, repair, and transport which have
low or medium voltage electric motors for the activation of mac hines intended for works
particular to exploitation or commissioning fronts shall be protected and monitored from
electrical panels fit for this purpose. These shall be robust pieces of equipment, assembled
with electro welded metallic enclosure, and they must have a Certificate of Conformity with
the applicable standard. When they are going to be used in mines classified with explosion
risk, they shall be certified and labeled as IECEx, ATEX, or similar. They shall have an open-
close system to facilitate access which shall be ensured by means of mechanical interlocks.
30.3 USE OF APPROPRIATE ELECTRIC CABLES

Cables used in underground mines shall comply with the following requirements:
a. Power conductors or cables feeding fixed equipment, with ground volt ages exceeding 150
V, shall be approved for the type of required classification; be constructed so that the
three phases are in a single block or duct, so that when protecting them with armors, rigid
tubes or other similar mechanical means, currents capable of producing hazardous heating
are not induced. These cables are:
- Armored cables: They are specially indicated for fixed installations, assembled in one
single block with three insulated conductors for three-phase system, a plastic material
filling, a metallic armor, and a external PVC cover.
- Flexible or semi-flexible armored cables: They are used in facilities of low mobility. In
general these are cables with a wide range of application in all kinds of underground
installations. They are made with three insulated conductors for three-phase system, a
filling in plastic material, a metallic armor, and an external cover of high resistance to
abrasion.
- Flexible cables: They are indicated for mobile installations. They are cables of more
complex construction and treatment. They require a special electrical protection
called flexible cable protection and are composed of three insulated conductors for
three-phase system, a central plastic fill, a metallic screen, and an external cover of
high resistance to abrasion.
183
b. When splices are made on cables or conductors exceeding 750 V, they shall have
mechanical and electrical characteristics similar to the ones of the cable; they shall be
made by a competent person; they shall have insulation equal to or higher than the
original cable, and be sealed against humidity.
c. In order to use any electrical piece of equipment legally in an underground mining

exploitation, it shall have a specific labeling and a written certification which shall be
coherent with the labeling, ensuring that the equipment is designed for use in
underground mining.
184
CHAPTER 9
PROHIBITIONS
SECTION 31. PROHIBITIONS
Commercialization of the products listed below is prohibited since it is contrary to the principles
and objectives of this regulation.
31.1 PERSISTENT COMPOUNDS
It is forbidden that products used in electrical installations subject to this regulation contain
persistent organic components, including polychlorinated and polybrominated biphenyls and
terphenyls (PCB and PCT), besides asbestos in all of its forms, in concentrations or proportions
regulated by the environmental or healthcare authority.
In case of using electric insulation technologies with products such as SF 6, the leaks percentage
shall be controlled in compliance with international standards for such purpose.
31.2 RADIOACTIVE LIGHTNING RODS
The installation, manufacture, and import of lightning rods or terminals made with radioactive
material was prohibited as of May 1st, 2005.
31.3 REUSED MATERIALS IN END-USE INSTALLATIONS
The use of reused or remanufactured materials or devices in end-use installations was prohibited
as of May 1st, 2005.
The restriction applies to pieces of equipment that for their use may lose their original
characteristics and operating properties exposing the users to risks, such as automatic breakers,
differential relays, ground fault protection switches, and in general those which do not prove
preservation of their technical characteristics. Therefore, used or remanufactured products may
be used in electrical installations only if they prove conformity with this regulation by means of
approval of test types conducted by accredited laboratories or in their absence by laboratories
evaluated by product certification bodies.
The use of equipment and materials in an installation that is removed from one place is limited to
the fact that the results of functionality and insulation tests are satisfactory. There shall be
records of such tests and results, which shall be reviewed in the certification of the installation, as
replacement documents for the CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCEs.
31.4 USE OF GROUNDING AS UNIQUE RETURN CONDUCTOR
The construction of electrical installations where grounding is used as a unique return condu ctor
was prohibited as of May 1st, 2005; that is to say, one-line systems are not accepted save for those
which connect the signal output for electric fencing pushbuttons.
Replacement of equipment in one-line systems is not permitted even if they were co nstructed
prior to the entry into force of the TREI. These systems shall be fully refurbished, complying with
the requirements of this regulation.
Those one-line systems where grounding systems have deficiencies, shall be considered as high -
risk electrical installations; consequently the owner, operator, or holder of such installations shall
correct deficiencies thereof.
185
CHAPTER 10
PROOF OF CONFORMITY
SECTION 32. MECHANISMS FOR ASSESSMENT OF CONFORMITY

Instances established in the National Quality Subsystem are used as mechanism of verification of
compliance with this regulation as well as support to control and surveillance of the State using
conformity duly accredited assessment bodies. These include mechanisms such as product
certification, people qualification, realization of tests and assays in laboratories, and inspection of
installations.
In accordance with section 73 of Act 1480, 2011, conformity assessment bodies shall be
responsible for the assessment services they provide within the scope of the certificate or
document assessing conformity they have issued. Without prejudice to the fines that may arise,
the assessor of conformity (qualified professional, laboratory, certification body, and in spection
body) shall be liable before the consumer (users of the product or the installation) for the
assessment service. The conformity assessor shall not be liable when the assessed party had
modified the elements, processes, systems, or other assessed conditions, and there is a causal link
between such variations and the damage caused.
Paragraph: Every piece of advertisement or information in which it is advised that a product or
process has been certified or assessed shall indicate the scope of the as sessment, the conformity
assessment body, and the entity which accredited the assessment body, under the terms of Act
1480.
32.1 ACCREDITATION AND CONFORMITY ASSESSMENT BODIES
Calibration laboratories, tests and assays laboratories, certification bodies, and inspection bodies
intervening in the process of proving conformity with this regulation shall be accredited by the
National Accreditation Body (ONAC, Spanish acronym) in accordance with Decree 2124 of 2012,
and they shall comply with the regulations used by this accreditation body and other applicable
regulations on the subject.
For the purposes of this regulation, accredited bodies for assessment of conformity shall comply
with the following requirements:
32.1.1 TESTS AND ASSAYS LABORATORIES
Save the exceptions defined herein, assays and tests required for issuing the CERTIFICATE OF
PRODUCT COMPLIANCEs subject to this regulation shall be carried out in laboratories accredited
by ONAC.
Certification bodies shall request the accredited laboratory the realization of required tests and
assays, and the latter shall communicate the certification body the maximum time in which the
results of test or essays may be delivered in a term not exceeding 15 calendar days after receiving
the request with sufficient precision of the service required.
Only in case of not existing accredited laboratories to carry out the assays, or that accredited
laboratories have expressed in written form the inability to process the request in a term less than
30 days, assays or tests may be conducted in laboratories previously assessed by the certification
body; in this case the assessed laboratory shall begin its accreditation process within the year
following the provision of the first service under this condition. If upon expiration of the term of
186
two years counted from the first service provided, this laboratory has not obtained its
corresponding accreditation, its services may not be used any longer.
When there are not laboratories in Colombia to perform any of the tests or assays required to
prove conformity of a given product with this regulation, the certification body accredited in
Colombia may accept assays and tests conducted overseas, provided that they a re made by
accredited laboratories, preferably by accreditation bodies recognized by ILAC or IAF, or of
international recognition, without leaving aside the responsibility pertaining to the certifying body
in the assessment of product conformity.
32.1.2 PRODUCTS CERTIFICATION BODIES
For the purposes of proving conformity with this regulation, only products conformity certificates
shall be accepted when issued by product certification bodies accredited by ONAC, validated by
SIC.
Accreditation of a product certification body shall address the requirements of ISO/IEC 17065
standards35, the regulations issued by ONAC, and requirements set forth in this regulation.
Certification bodies shall conduct tests and assays in accredited laboratories. Tests in non -
accredited laboratories or overseas shall only be accepted in the exceptions mentioned in this
regulation.
32.1.3 CERTIFICATION BODY OF INDIVIDUALS
The professional competence of the technical director or professional who signs expert opinion
and of the inspectors, shall be verified by means of a certificate of professional competence issued
by a certification body of individuals accredited by ONAC, under the criteria of ISO / IEC / NTC
17024 standards. Professional competence shall be understood as defined b y the International
Labor Organization (ILO), that is to say, the fitness to perform efficiently a specific task due to
having the qualifications required for it.
Suitability and specific technical competence of the inspector shall be proved by means of
knowledge test and due interpretation of the requirements established in the TREI (General Annex
and NTC 2050) applicable to the type of installation to be inspected. Certification of professional
competence shall be made on certain scopes which shall be s pecified in the certificate, and the
certified person cannot inspect installations of scopes different to the certified ones.
This type of certification shall be enforceable as of March 30, 2015. After that date, expert
opinions of inspectors who do not meet the requirement shall not be valid.
Transient paragraph: Until there are in the territory of Colombia at least two (2) accredited bodies
for the certification of professional competence, technical competence for both inspectors and
technical directors of inspection bodies, as well as other professional competenc es required for the
purposes of this regulation, a university which has an approved Electrical Engineering program
may certify it, and the certificate thus issued shall have a validity for two (2) years. The university
interested in this type of certification shall request a technical concept on the project of
certification of competences from the Direction of Electric Energy of the Ministry of Mines and
Energy, at least two (2) months prior to the presentation of the assessment, attaching the proposal
with the content and scope of the tests for different types of competence certification they intend
to issue.
32.1.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS INSPECTION BODIES
35
Changed from guideline to standard by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
187
Inspection bodies for installations subject to this regulation shall comply with the following
requirements:
a. Inspection bodies accredited for electrical installations subject to TREI shall be Type A as
per criteria of the ISO/IEC 17020 standard.
b. Additional to the requirements of the ISO/IEC 17020 standard for the accreditation
process, the organization seeking to be accredited shall submit the procedures it intends
to apply in the inspection, which must be appropriate for the verification of the
compliance of all requirements set forth in the TREI applicable to the installation subject
to inspection. The procedures, methods and measurement equipment presented in the
accreditation proceeding before ONAC shall meet the test requirements of diverse items
set forth in the verification forms established in this regulation and they must keep and
apply such conditions during the effect of the accreditation.
c. Both the technical director or who signs the expert opinions, and the inspectors, shall
prove their technical and legal competence in the branch of electrical engineering subject
to inspections, and wide knowledge of the requirements set forth in this regulation. This
must be proved by means of a professional competence certificate issued by a
certification body accredited by ONAC in accordance with the NTC -ISO-IEC 17024
standard; certificates of job experience in activities of the process to be inspected as well
as suitability to issue a professional opinion about the determination of conformity of the
installation inspected. Additionally, they shall be available to support such opinion before
any requirement of the authorities or clients requesting to do so. Legal competence is
granted by the professional license which authorizes the practice of the profession and
issuing the inspection opinion as a opinion particular to professional expertise in the
subject matters associated to the type of installation being inspected. The professional
experience certificate shall be enforceable as of July 1st, 2014.
d. The inspection body shall have human resources with technical capabilities, required
measuring, testing, and assays equipment for the type of installation to inspect, as well as
qualified personnel to execute such tests and measurements. SIC or ONAC may verify at
any time compliance with this requirement.
e. The inspection bodies that inspect substations of power equal to or greater than 20 MVA,
transmission lines of voltages exceeding 110 kV, generation centrals with power equal to
or greater than 20 MVA, facilities where there is high concentration of people, medical
facilities, installations in environments classified as hazardous, and installations in mines,
shall have the appropriate procedures and equipment, and duly trained professional
personnel for this type of installations. This condition shall be evaluated in the
accreditation process and the accreditation shall refer expressly to the scope in that type
of installations.
f. The inspection body may request in the accreditation process the possibility of inspecting
the construction stages. In this case, it must ensure that partial in spection does not
become a technical audit or advice which affects the principle of independence and
impartiality in the final opinion.
g. The inspection body shall attach the rsums, copies of certificates of experience, and
current professional certificate of qualification of the technical director or whoever signs
the expert opinions and the inspectors in the accreditation process. Withdrawals of
inspectors shall be notified to ONAC, as well as their replacements. Before using the
professional services of an inspector, the inspection body shall verify its suitability, valid
certificate of competence, and effect of the professional license. The technical director or
whoever signs expert opinions and the inspectors shall have a degree in any of the
professions related directly to the installations to be inspected; they may not give expert
188
opinions about activities that surpass or are alien to the scope granted by the legislation or
norms regulating the professional practice.
SECTION 33. CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE

Save the exceptions established herein, the manufacturers or importers of all products covered by
the scope and field of application of this regulation shall prove that the comply with the
requirements set forth herein, prior to their commercialization in the country or prior to customs
clearance in the case of imported products, by means of a CERTIFICATE OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE
issued by a certification body accredited by ONAC.
33.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTIFICATION OF PRODUCTS
Conformity of the products subject to this regulation shall be proved by meeting these
requirements:
a. The Certificate of Product Compliance issued by a Certification Body accredited by ONAC

shall comply with the requirements and procedures set forth in sections 7 and 8 of Decree
2269 of 1993 which organizes the National System of Normalization, Certificati on, and
Metrology, or those which modify, add, or substitute it, and the accreditation criteria of
the ISO/IEC 17065 standard and the product certification systems established in the
ISO/IEC 17067 standard, in its most updated version. 36
b. Products listed on Table 2.1 which do not correspond to its exclusions require certification
of compliance with the TREI. Products that although having the same custom tariff but are
not subject to the TREI or are intended for installations excluded from this regulation d o
not require to prove compliance with the TREI.
c. Products with requirements set forth in this General Annex shall be certified, proving each
one of such requirements.
d. The accredited body must take into account the type of application of the product and
refer to it in an express manner in the certificate during the certification process. This
requirement is essential in the certification of products for special installations.
e. Products for which this General Annex requests a certificate of compliance with an
applicable technical international standard, a standard of international recognition or NTC
due to their particular condition, shall be proved with the requirements of said standard
and the certificate shall mention compliance with both the standard an d the TREI. If
additional requirements are requested, each one of them must be proved, and compliance
with labeling and traceability shall be verified.
f. The products certification body must rely on the results of laboratories accredited by
ONAC. In their absence, certification bodies may support their certifications in assays
conducted in laboratories accredited by members of ILAC, and in the exceptional cases
already mentioned, in assessed laboratories. Acceptance or recognition of assays results
is responsibility of the certification body, pursuant to the ISO/IEC 17065 standard.37
g. Each one of the parameters related to the items established in labeling and marking shall
be proved in the certifications process. To do so, the procedures established in the
product standard applied for the certification shall be used.
36
37
189
Paragraph 1: Samples for tests or assays do not require to prove compliance with the TREI prior to
their clearance.
Paragraph 2: Neither commercialization nor commissioning of the products that comply with the
provisions of this regulation may be prohibited, limited, or hindered.
33.2 CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS OF ACCEPTED PRODUCTS

For the purpose of compliance with this regulation, only certificates issued under the following
systems established in the ISO/IEC 17067 standard38 shall be accepted:
33.2.1 Sample certification System 1A
This system includes the assay/test and evaluates compliance on samples of the product. The
results only cover the sample assessed. This certification system includes the following:
- Samples provided to the certification body by the client.
- Performing inspection by means attributes and assays/tests, in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable reference.
- Evaluation of compliance in accordance with the results of inspection by means of
attributes and assays/tests.
- Revision and issuing the results of the assessment process.
- Decision
Note: When tests are destructive, results of tests may be accepted for samples from the same
batches where the sample to certify was taken.
Validity: For this system the certificates issued do not have a validity, and are only applicable to
evaluated samples.
33.2.2 Batches certification System 1B
This system includes the assay/test; compliance is assessed on samples of the product. Sampling
is statistically significant on the total of the batch, taking into account that samples to be
evaluated during the process are taken by means of standardized techniques.
This certification system includes the following:
- Samples taken from the factory or the market by the certification body, depending on
the type of product.
- Decision
Validity: For this system, certificates issued do not have a validity, and are applicable to the total
of the evaluated batch.
33.2.3 System 4
This system includes the assay/test and surveillance of samples taken in the factory or the
market, or from both. It is focused on those domestic products that do not have a quality
management system, and for those importers whose manufacturer does not have a quality
management system.
This certification system includes the following:
38
190
- Samples taken from the factory or the market by the certificatio n body, depending on
the type of product.
- Authorization (license) for the use of the certificate during the validity time.
- Surveillance by means of inspection of the manufacturers production process.
- Surveillance by means of assays/tests or inspection of samples taken from the factory
or the market by the certification body, depending on the type of product.
For manufacturers overseas, where the client is the domestic importer:

- Samples taken from the factory or the importer or traders warehouse, or from the
market by the certification body, depending on the type of product.
- Initial inspection of the production process to evaluate the manufacturers capability
to manufacture the products.
- Authorization (license) for the use of the certificate during the validity time.
- Surveillance by means of inspection of the manufacturers production process.
Validity: A certificate of compliance is granted, valid for one year with a biannual follow-up.
33.2.4 Seal of Certification of product System 5.
This system includes assays or tests on the product and the audit on the quality management
system.
For domestic manufacturers:
- An audit on the quality management system issued by an accredited body or the
validation of the productive system by means of evaluation on-site in the factory 39
shall be conducted for granting and renewal of the certificate.
attributes, assays/tests, and audit on the quality management system.
- Authorization (license) for the use of the seal of certification during the validity time of
the certificate.
- Surveillance by means of audit on the quality management system or validation of
surveillance to certification granted by an accredited body by means of documental
revision. Samples shall be taken from the market, the production point, or from both,
and shall be assessed in order to determine continuity of compliance.
For overseas manufacturers, where the client is the domestic importer:

- Samples taken from the factory or the importer or traders warehouse, or from the
market by the certification body, depending on the type of product.
39
Bullet point modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
191
- An audit on the quality management system issued by an accredited body or th e

validation of the productive system by means of evaluation on-site in the factory 40
shall be conducted for granting and renewal of the certificate.
attributes, assays/tests, and audit on the quality management system.
- Authorization (license) for the use of the seal of certification during the validity time of
the certificate.
- Surveillance by means of audit on the quality management system or validation of
surveillance to certification granted by an accredited body by means of documental
revision.
- Surveillance by means of inspection of the storage process in Colombia to verify the
product compliance during its storage.
- Additionally, an inspection shall be made of the storage process in Colombia to verify
the product compliance during its storage.
Validity: A certificate of compliance is issued, valid for three years with annual follow -ups. The
surveillance or re-certification assessments shall always b conducted in a maximum term of 12
months following the prior evaluation (initial, surveillance, or re-certification).
33.3 FOLLOW-UP OF THE CERTIFICATION.
Follow-up activities on the certification, as set forth in the ISO/IEC 17067 standard41 are of
mandatory compliance for all modes of certification issued with some validity over time, and such
validity is conditioned to the realization of follow-up activities and their positive outcomes.
33.4 EXCEPTIONAL FORMS OF PRODUCT CERTIFICATION.
33.4.1 CERTIFICATES OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE ISSUED OVERSEAS42
Proof of compliance with the TREI can be accepted for products certified overseas provided that i)
the certificate is issued by a certification body accredited by a member of IAF, and ii) the
Superintendence of Industry and Commerce SIC, pursuant to control and surveillance evaluates
and recognized these certificates of compliance through the Single Scheme for Foreign Trade
(VUCE for its acronym in Spanish) as part of the import process. For the evalu ation and
recognition of the certificate, the superintendence shall verify that the standard or regulation base
for the certificate has equivalence with the TREI.
SIC shall recognize overseas certificates issued under certification schemes defined in this
regulation, and it may recognize other systems or schemes provided that each certificate is
accompanied by its own supports issued by the same certification body. Such supports shall point
out the certification scheme and its characteristics. In case that the certificate had been issued
more than one year before, documental evidence (such as record of the last follow -up audit,
certificate or other document from the certification body) shall be attached, where there is
mention of the validity of the certificate of compliance in question.
Whoever is responsible for importing or trading shall verify that the imported product corresponds
to the product certified; in any case the superintendence may verify compliance with the
requirements certified and sanction those which have deviations, regardless of having had
40
Bullet point modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
41
42
Sub-section modified by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
192
previously the endorsements in VUCE and DIAN (Translators note: Spanish acronym of the
Colombian tax authority).
33.4.2 CONCEPT OF EQUIVALENCE OF STANDARD OR TECHNICAL REGULATION WITH THE TREI
For the purposes of type approval of certificates issued overseas, concepts of equivalence may be
issued about those standards or technical regulations from other countries which keep similarities
to the mandatory requirements for certain product set forth in the TREI. Under such condition the
equivalence concept of a foreign technical regulation or standard with the TREI is a matter of
interpretation of the regulation; consequently they shall be granted only by the Ministry of Mines
and Energy, or whoever it delegates. In order to grant the concept of equivalence of standard or
technical regulation, the interested party shall make a request to the Direction of Electric Power,
specifying the standard seeking concept of equivalence, adding a matrix that contains each one of
the product requirements established in the TREI, comparing them to the item corresponding in
the foreign standard or regulation with which an equivalence is intended. Additionally, a full copy
of the standard or regulation shall be provided in order to verify authenticity of the requisites and
their application context. This proceeding may be made in electronic form.
Under no circumstance the concept of equivalence is a certificate of product, nor does it replace
the certificate issued by the certification body, and it does not oblige the superintendence to
validate the certificate.
33.4.3 SUBSTITION OF SHORT CIRCUIT AND ELECTRIC ARC TESTS
In a term not exceeding five years counted from the publication of this Annex or before if there is
a laboratory to conduct the tests mentioned above, these tests may be substituted by simulations
which shall be validated by a laboratory that has accredited tes ts or that is assisted by a well-
known university laboratory which has an approved electrical engineering program.
33.4.4 STATEMENT OF THE SUPPLIER
In case that there is not any laboratory in Colombia for conducting the tests on a product subject
to this regulation and not having laboratories overseas accredited for that test, the statement of
the supplier may be accepted pursuant to the criteria of Parts 1 and 2 of IEC/ISO 17050 standard
attaching the supporting evidence (results of assays conducted, calculations, simulations or other
tests which allow to prove compliance), as well as the standards met by such product.
The statement of the supplier shall also be accepted for those products that because of low
turnover and high cost of laboratories, there are not any accredited laboratories other than the
ones of the producer which may be evaluated by the certifying body. These products are: motors,
generators and transformers of power greater than 800 kVA, DPS, capacitors banks, insulators and
cables with insulation for voltages exceeding 66 kV. The statement of the supplier shall be
accompanied by the results of the tests conducted in the producers laboratories and they must
specify the technical standards they meet. Additionally, single manufacture pro ducts (not
repeated) may prove compliance with this Regulation by means of a statement of the provider,
however, evidence shall be given to support the statement pursuant to the guidelines of ISO -IEC-
NTC 17050. The statement of the supplier shall be valid ated with the signature and license
number of a professional in electrical or electro-mechanical engineering.43
Without prejudice of what is set forth by the competent authorities in order to accept the import
and trading of products already used or remanufactured, the statement of the supplier may be
accepted in installations subject to this regulation as a mechanism to prove compliance with the
TREI for the following used or remanufactured products: electric motors or generators with power
greater than 150 kVA, transformers of powers greater than 1000 kVA free of PCB, and medium or
high voltage cells. The statement shall be signed by the importer or remanufacturer and it shall be
supported with the results of the type or routine tests conducted on these pie ces of equipment,
43
193
including energy losses in the case of motors and transformers. Under no circumstance the
commercialization of reused breakers, DPS, and cables shall be accepted, and in general of those
reused products for which the compliance of the objectives of this regulation cannot be
guaranteed, especially the ones regarding safety or inducement of error to the user.
Paragraph: The statement of the supplier shall be signed by the domestic producer or the legal
representative of the importer, and it shall be endorsed by an electrical or electro-mechanical
engineer by signing the declaration and recording its professional license number. The installer and
the inspection body shall verify this condition.
33.5 REGULATIONS FOR THE PROCEEDINGS OF PRODUCT CERTIFICATION

For the purposes of this regulation, the following legal provisions issued by the Colombian
authorities with regards to the Certificate of Product Compliance shall be met, or those which
modify them, add them, or substitute them, among others:
a. Act 155 of 1959 and Act 1480 of 2011.

b. Circular Letter from the Superintendence of Industry and Commerce, published on the
Official Gazette 44511 on August 6, 2001, which is a single regulating body of SIC.
c. Decree 2269 of 1993, which organizes the National Quality Subsystem, with its
modifications.
d. Decree 3273 of 2008, or the one that substitutes or modifies it , which establishes the
procedure to verify compliance of imported products with the official mandatory
Colombian technical standards and technical regulations.
e. Decree 4738 of 2008, which dictates norms about economic intervention for the practice
of accreditation functions of compliance evaluation bodies that are part of the National
Quality Subsystem, and modifies the structure of the Superintendence of Industry and
Commerce.
f. Decree 2124 of 2012, which designates the National Accreditation Body.
g. Decision 506 of 2001 of the Andean Community of Nations with regards to Certificates of
Product Compliance.
h. Decision 562 of 2003 of the Andean Community of Nations.
SECTION 34. DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLIANCE OF ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS
34.1 GENERAL ASPECTS OF THE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION
Every electrical installation assembled after the 1 st of May, 2005, in accordance with the
provisions of section 2 FIELD OF APPLICATION herein, shall have the Certificate of Compliance
with this regulation. Similar condition is applicable to expansions or renovations.
For the purposes of this regulation and as per Act 1480 of 2011, the e lectrical installation, as a
whole, is deemed to be a product. Consequently, and as per Decision 506 of 2001 from the
Andean Community of Nations, the statement of the supplier or manufacturer is accepted as
certification of compliance, which for the case shall be the statement of compliance signed by the
competent professional responsible for the direct construction or supervision of construction of
the electrical installation.
In order to ensure a certification issued under principles of suitability, inde pendence, and
impartiality for the installations that imply greater risk, the statement of compliance shall be
endorsed by means of an Inspection Opinion issued by an inspection body accredited by ONAC. In
This case, the certification is deemed to be full.
The certification is an individual requirement for each installation. Consequently every bill of the
electric power public service in end-use installation and every electrical installation which
constitutes individual constructive units subject to recognition in the assignment of fees required
194
for the provision of the electric power service, shall have their corresponding certification of
compliance with this regulation.
For electrical installations in constructions for several clients such as warehouses, shopping
centers, offices, medical offices, apartments, education centers, among others, where the builder
hands over the electrical installation only until a general or distribution switchboard, in order to
energize such installation the builder shall hand it over certified up to that point, noting a
clarification in the certificate about the scope of the certified installation. In these cases the
service shall have a provisional character, and it shall only become definite when the owners or
users finish the construction and obtain the corresponding inspection opinions. The constructor of
the builder shall be responsible for the compliance with the TREI during the term in which the
service has the character of provisional. This responsibility shall be transferred to the person
responsible for the partial installation at the time such partial installation is certified and legalized.
In order to provide the electrical power service, the trader providing the service shall request the
certificate of compliance with this regulation from each client for the end-use installation to which
service will be provided, and a copy of the certificate shall be submitted to the Grid Operator.
For expansion or renovation of installations, the expanded or renewed portion shall comply with
the TREI and prove compliance thereof by means of the Statement of Compliance and the
Inspection Opinion in the applicable cases. In the event that the renovation exceeds 80%, all the
installation shall be conditioned to this regulation and it shall be treated as a new installation.
34.2 STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
For the purposes of certification of compliance with this regulation, in all cases the competent
professional directly responsible for the construction or for the direction of the construction of the
electrical installation regardless of the type, as well as the renovation or expansion, shall state the
compliance with the TREI by filling out and signing the form Statement of Compliance with the
Technical Regulation of Electrical Installations.
This statement is deemed to be a first-party certificate, document issued under oath and
constitutes the fundamental requirement of the certification process. Whoever signs it acquires
the condition of supplier and certifier of compliance, consequently, assuming the greater
responsibility of the installation effects. That is why it shall be numbered and assigned safety
conditions to avoid its adulteration or forgery.
If the person responsible for the construction, expansion, or renovation of the installation does
not issue the statement, or issues it without complying with all the requirements applicable to that
installation, it shall be considered a breach of this regulation and the superintendence or the
corresponding surveillance entity may sanction it in accordance with Act 1480 of 2011 and other
applicable regulations.
34.3 INSPECTION WITH CERTIFICATION PURPOSES
Inspection of the electrical installation is the examination and verification of its functionality and
determining its compliance with the requirements set forth in the TREI. It shall be made on the
basis of a professional opinion, therefore requiring that the person conducting it has the highest
competences on the matter to be inspected and proves so with its certificate of professional
competence. The design is a support tool of the inspection but it is not the object of compliance.
Inspection carried out by an independent body is the mechanism to validate the statement of
compliance. It shall be made on the installations that require full certification and it must comply
with the following requirements.
a. Both the inspection body and its technical directors and inspectors must comply fully with
this regulation; non compliance thereof shall be subject to investigation and applicable
sanctions by SIC.
195
b. Inspection in order to prove compliance with the TREI shall be hired by the constructor or
owner or legal representative of the project where the electrical installation is
incorporated, who shall be the owner of the certificate. The installations owner or
responsible for its construction shall submit to the inspection body the complete
documentation applicable to the installation. Likewise, it shall allow the development and
performance of the tests and measures necessary for the verification of compliance with
the TREI. Since the inspection process is a validation of the statement of compliance, the
person responsible for the electrical installation shall be present during the inspection,
that is, whoever signs such statement. Delegation of this activity is only permitted by
means of a written document signed by the delegating party and the delegate; the latter
shall be a professional with the same technical and legal competence of the responsible
for the construction. A record of this fact shall be noted in the opinion. 44
c. During all of the inspection process the accredited body is obliged to perform the
measures, tests, and electrical assays which allow to determine the compliance of the
electrical installation. Records shall be left of the values measured and inspection activities
fundamental for the decision.
d. The procedures, method, and equipment approved in the accreditation process are of
mandatory compliance by the accredited body.
e. The traceability of diverse stages of the electrical installation shall be looked for in the
inspection process. To do this, it is necessary to take into account what is done and
documented by qualified persons who participated in the design, construction direction,
technical auditing when applicable. In all cases there will be a record in the inspection
form of the professional license of the person responsible for each stage . The designs are
elements which aid to define conformity of the installation with the regulation but they
are not the purpose of the opinion.
f. The inspection procedures shall be in accordance with the ISO 17020 standard. The
inspection shall be conducted on the site of the installation, and evidence thereof shall be
recorded. To ensure that the electrical installation is safe and fit for the expected use, the
inspection shall be made both visually and performing the required tests and measures.
Results thereof shall be recorded in the opinion forms established in this General Annex.
g. Certificates of compliance of the products used in the electrical installation, which in

accordance with the TREI require to meet that requirement, shall be verified; however, if
non conformities are detected in the product, even if it is certified, it shall be rejected and
it shall be reported to SIC and the inspection body shall not be required to keep files of all
of the certificates of the product.
h. The type of installation shall be recorded in the opinion forms in all cases, whether it is
construction, expansion, or renovation; the identity of the owner, location of the facility,
names and professional licenses of qualified personnel who participated in the diverse
stages of the installation (designer, constructor or construction director, and technical
auditor). Similarly, the name and professional license number of the inspector, and the
name, address and telephone number of the accredited body responsible for the
inspection shall be recorded.
i. The results of the inspection and tests of the electrical installation shall determine
compliance with the applicable requirements as referenced in the inspection form.
j. On-site inspections of a domestic installation, with a duration less than the time
established by the inspection body, which shall not be less than 40 minutes in any case, in
44
Paragraph modified by means of Resolution 40492 of April 24, 2015.
196
the accreditation process shall not be accepted. These inspections shall be made with
inspectors certified and registered in ONAC.
k. If the inspected installation is not approved, the inspector shall report in writing the non
conformities, and the accredited body shall determine with the user the schedule of a new
inspection visit in order to close the non conformity of the inspection with the regulation.
In any case, the inspection body shall close the inspection issuing the approval or not
approval opinion, and it must be reported to the database.
l. The inspection opinion is an individual document for each account. The inspection body
shall issue a opinion for each inspected installation and deliver it to its owner. In cases of
buildings that involve several owners, each one will be given their opinion and he shall be
responsible for its custody, and will present it when the grid operator or the authority
demands so. Opinions corresponding to common areas or installations such as
substations, feed networks, elevators, and in general those installations common to the
condominium shall be managed and be in the custody of the building administration.
m. The accredited body shall keep a reserve on the procedures, drawings, letters, reports, or
any other document or information classified as confidential related to the installation to
be inspected. However, it shall be provided in the event of requirement by judicial
authorities, both the Superintendence of Public Utilities and Industry and Commerce shall
provide the information.
n. The inspector must leave note of the scope and actual status of the installation at the time
of the inspection, with mechanisms such as photography, one line diagram, and electric
drawings or schemes.
o. Inspection opinions shall be of public knowledge, posted on the website of the inspection
body. Additionally, the inspection body shall report the opinions to the central database
coordinated by the MME or ONAC in the forms agreed upon. Grid operators or energy
traders shall consult said base to verify the authenticity of the opinions submitted in the
requests for provision of the electric energy service. The Superintendence of Industry and
Commerce may request that Grid Operators upload to SUI the opinions used to support
the service requests.
p. The validity for the provision of inspection service on electrical installations shall begin
with the signature of the agreement, contract, or covenant between the organization and
its client, and its termination shall be given with the delivery of the expert opinion, either
approved or not approved.
q. Inspection bodies shall report to SIC within the 10 business days following the termination
of the term given to close the non conformities those inspected installations that were not
approved, reporting the reasons of not approval along with the name of the project,
address, name of constructor and people in charge, and inspection date. This information
shall be provided in digital medium on PDF form. It shall be mentioned whether the
installation was energized.
r. In installations whose only purpose is to feed the end-use installation subject to

inspection, and its feed has other associated processes constructed at the cost of the
owners of the end-use installation, the inspection process shall verify each one of the
components of the installation from the limits with a general purpose grid, by filling out
the corresponding forms for each process involved. These shall have the condition of
annex to the form for end-use which shall be the one with the consecutive control number
of the expert opinion. Partial certifications are not accepted. If the installation is for
several accounts, the forms of processes upstream the partial service lines feeding each
197
meter shall be associated to the account of the administrative area or common uses of the
building.
s. The inspection to verify the safety conditions of installations energized before the
enforcement of the TREI or the renewal of the conformity expert opinion, do not require
the statement of the responsible for the construction, nor the product certificates. This
condition shall be recorded in the expert opinion. 45
t. The owner or administrator of an electrical installation in a commercial, industrial, official,

residential building or intended for the provision of energy as a public utility, shall have
available a copy of the inspection expert opinion on the electrical installation in order to
facilitate its consultation when the responsible for the provision of the service or the
administrative, legal, police, or surveillance and control authorities require to do so. If
accounts of several owners are associated to the installation, the building manager shall
be the one who keeps the expert opinions on the installations of common areas and
facilities from the metering panels to the limits with the grid operator. Each one of the
owners shall be responsible for the other certificates.
Paragraph: Exceptional cases of installation certifications. When there are not inspectors with
technical competence certified by a certification body accredited to inspect installations of
generation centrals of power exceeding 20 MVA, substations of high and extra high voltage
substations of power exceeding 20 MVA or transmission lines, the expert opinion shall be signed by
the professional responsible for the technical audit of said project.
34.4 INSTALLATIONS THAT REQUIRE INSPECTION OPINION
The following installations constructed, expanded or renovated during the validity of the TREI
shall require Full Certification, and therefore Statement of Compliance and Inspection Opinion:
34.4.1 New constructions
a. Each special installation such as medical assistance institutions, installations in special or

hazardous environments, aircraft hangars, gas and service stations, fuel storage, paints
processes, places of public gathering, milling industries, silos, buildings where dust
accumulates with water or that have corrosive environments, elevators, cranes, escalators
and mechanical walkways, installations of more than 24 V in mobile housing or commerce,
recreational vehicles, floating homes, special equipment, furnaces or induction heating
equipment, electrolytic and plating cells, irrigation equipment and machinery, swimming
pools and fountains of similar installations, firefighting pump systems, and emergency
systems.
b. Multi-family housing or commercial installations which are part of a single construction

project where five (5) or more energy accounts are involved, corresponding to the same
construction permit or license, even if their individual capacity is less than 10 kVA.
c. Residential facilities with installable capacity equal to or greater than 10 kVA.
d. Industrial facilities with installable capacity equal to or greater than 20 kVA.
e. Commercial facilities with installable capacity equal to or greater than 10 kVA.
f. Installations in mines.
45
Paragraph corrected by means of Resolution 90907 of October 25, 2013
198
g. End-use installations constructed with aluminum conductors, whichever installable power

they have.
h. New distribution circuits or branches in general purpose grids when the new portion
exceeds 5 km, adding both the primary and the secondary grid or when the new power
installed in transformation is equal to or greater than 300 kVA.
i. If the grid or substation provides for buildings subject to a single construction license, the
installations that derive from the general service grid shall be inspected associated to the
end-use installations, using the forms associated to each process which shall be attached to
the opinion about the end-use installation of common areas in the building or buildings,
regardless of who owns such grids or substations of exclusive use of the service users in
buildings subject to the same construction license.
j. Transmission lines above 57.5 kV, whatever their power and length.
k. Common areas in buildings with five energy accounts or more.
l. New constructions or renovations of service lines that involve substations feeding

buildings, regardless of who owns the infrastructure.
m. Packed or preassembled equipment which constitute functional systems similar to an end -

use installation or substation which usually incorporate power transformation along with
control and protection systems, and connection devices that as a set may deliver 20 kVA or
more. These pieces of equipment shall be treated as transformation and end -use
installations, and the products comprising the system which are subject to the TREI shall
have the Certificate of Compliance.
34.4.2 Expansions and renovations
Similarly, the following expansions and renovations require full certification:
a. In residential installations: when the expansion exceeds 10 kVA of installable power, or

more than 50% of the devices or conductors are renovated in an installation in which the
renovated portion exceeds 10 KVA of installable capacity, or when special equipment or
installations are added.
b. In commercial facilities with installed power less than 100 kVA when the expansion or
renovated portion exceeds 10 kVA. For installations that exceed 100 kVA of installed
power, when more than 30% is renovated or expanded, or when special equipment or
installations are added or used in the renovation.46
c. In industrial facilities with installed power less than or equal to 50 kVA when the
renovation or expansion exceeds 20 kVA. In industrial facilities of installed capacity of
more than 50 kVA when the expansion or renovation exceeds 30% of the installed
capacity. In any industrial installation of installed capacity of more than 20 kVA when
more than 50% of the devices or more than 50% of the wiring are replaced. In
46
Paragraph corrected by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
199
installations of environments classified as hazardous, hospital, and mining installations,

when any type of expansion or renovation is made. 47
d. When the expansion exceeds 30% of the installed capacity or 30% of the intervened circuit
length in general purpose grids, and with the expansion(s) or renovation(s) carried out on
the same circuit during a year the renovated or expanded portions exceed 30 0 kVA and 5
km of grid. In the event that the distribution grid is for the exclusive use of one building, it
shall be treated as an end-use installation regardless of who owns it.
e. In a generation plant when the expansion exceeds 30% of the installed cap acity and it is
due to the assembly of new electrical equipment in the same engine house. In a
substation when the expansion exceeds 30% of the initial cost recognized by the CREG for
each constructive unit or 30% of the installed capacity.
f. When the expansion increases the nominal operating voltage of a transmission line or its
installed capacity.
g. When the expansion exceeds 30% of the cost recognized by the CREG for each
constructive unit in a general purpose substation serving users of different buildin gs, or
30% of its installed capacity, and the expansion or renovation exceeds 300 kVA.
Paragraph: The mere replacement of a transformer and its protections is not deemed to be a
renovation or expansion.
34.4.3 Criteria to define percentages in expansions or renovations.
For expanded or renovated installations, the percentage shall be determined considering the
following criteria:
a. For end-use installations, the number of outlets or connection points in each tension level
shall be taken.
b. For distribution installations owned by the grid operators, the percentage shall refer to the
inventory of all the constructive units of the same type existing on the circuit or to the
components of the constructive unit where renovation is carried out. In low voltage grid s,
the percentage shall refer to the total length of the grid associated to the transformer.
c. Renovation of substations. In transforming substations not associated to the end -use

installation, the percentage shall refer to the number of items of the cons tructive unit or
set of constructive units where the renovation takes place. Full certification shall be
applied to the renovated construction unit or units.
d. In generation plants, percentages shall refer to the component where the renovation
works are carried out by assimilating them to a process, as follows: engine house to end -
use and substations to transformation.
34.5 COMPONENTS OF THE INSPECTION OPINION
a. Full identification of the inspection body and inspector(s) who participated in the
inspection, as well as the documents which determine the scope of inspection.
b. Full identification of the installation (type and location) and people who intervened.
c. Aspects to evaluate, with their results and observations.
47
Paragraph corrected by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
200
d. Ultimate result of compliance.
e. The inspection opinion shall be signed by both the technical director of the inspection
body or whoever takes its functions and the inspector responsible for the inspection. Both
of them shall be qualified professionals, experts in inspection processes in accordanc e
with the ISO 17020 standard, and they shall be the ones to assume the general
responsibility of the opinion.
f. The sole opinion on the substation or general grid of the project shall not be accepted as
inspection opinion in order to energize an end-use installation. Similarly, it shall not be
accepted to energize an end-use installation if the substation and general grid of the
project do not comply with the TREI.
g. Upon completion of the inspection, the opinion forms shall be duly signed both by the
inspector who performed the inspection and the person assigned by the organization as
responsible for the approval of the opinion results.
h. For the purposes of proving compliance with the TREI, the inspection opinion of an
electrical installation is a professional judgment that shall have the character of Expert
Opinion, therefore the competence to issue it corresponds to an engineering professional
whose specialty corresponds to the subject matter of opinion as per sections 12, Act 51 of
1986 and 19, Act 842 of 2003. Notwithstanding this, the general competence endorsed by
the professional degree is not sufficient to prove specific knowledge and expertise in the
assessment of the compliance with the TREI for the installation subject to inspection. 48
34.6 VALIDITY OF THE INSPECTION OPINIONS

Inspection opinions shall have a validity of five years for special installations, 10 years for basic and
distribution grids installations, and 15 years for power generation plants, lines and substations
associated to transmission.
Pursuant to Section 4, Act 143 of 1994 with regards to safety of the installation, those responsible
for the provision of electric power service shall ensure the operation and maintain the safety
levels established in this regulation and other provisions on the matter, and request the user the
verification that the safety conditions are kept by means of revision of the installation and
renovation of the certification of compliance with the TREI, including inspection opinions when full
certification is required.
The inspector shall verify the compliance with the TREI in the sense that the installation does not
pose risks to the health of life of people, animals, and vegetables; risks to the environment, to the
installation itself, or adjacent assets. Therefore, the opinion shall be based on the result of the
physical inspection, the relevant measures and tests on the installation without the need to
deepen in the documental review, and the forms indicated in this General Annex shall be used
making the observation that it is a review inspection.
34.7 VALIDITY OF CERTIFICATES AND OPINIONS ISSUED UNDER OTHER

RESOLUTIONS AND UPDATE OF THE ACCREDITATIONS49
Product certificates and inspection opinions of compliance with the TREI issued by accredited
bodies under Resolutions 181294 of 2008 or 180195 of 2009 shall be valid until the end of their
effect.
48
49
Subsection modified by means of Resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014.
201
The documents that prove compliance with the TREI issued after September 5, 2013, by
laboratories, certification bodies, and inspection bodies accredited under Resolutions 181294 of
2008 or 180195 of 2009, shall have validity only if the organization began its process of updating
the accreditation within the eight (8) months following the enforcement of Resolution 90708 of
August 30, 2013. Documents proving compliance with the TREI issued from November 5, 2014 by
Organizations or laboratories that have not obtained accreditation pursuant to Resolution 90708
of 2013 by ONAC shall not be valid , or the ones issued after the date in which ONAC has refused
accreditation.
Once the accreditation is updated with the Resolution 90708 of 2013 by which the TREI is issued,
the documents that prove compliance with the TREIC shall adhere to the procedures and forms of
such resolution. When there are applicable requirements of Resolutions 181294 of 2008 or
180195 of 2009 accepted by the transience defined in subsection 38.3 of the General Annex to
Resolution 90708 of 2013, the forms thereof shall be used.
34.8 EXCEPTIONS OF THE INSPECTION OPINION
The following installations are excepted from the inspection opinion:
a. Those not included in subsection 34.4 of this General Annex.
b. Electrical installations in military or police quarters, and in general those which demand
reservation due to National Security concerns. For these installations, it shall be
demanded that the corresponding inspection form is filled out and signed by the
competent professional responsible for the technical audit or supervision of the
construction of the electrical installation and the commanding officer.
c. Provisional installations.
These exceptions do not exclude them of the certification by means of the Statement of
Compliance signed by the competent professional responsible for the direct construction or
supervision of the electrical installation construction.
Both the Statement of Compliance and the Inspection Opinion shall have the character of public
documents, and their reservation may not be argued when their consultation is required.
34.9 STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE FORMS
The statement of compliance shall be filled out and signed in the following format:
MINISTRY OF MINES AND ENERGY
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE TECHNICAL REGULATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS No. _____
The undersigned _________________________________ , of legal age, identified with ID No. ____________ , acting in
my capacity of ____________________________ (engineer, technologist, or technician), holder of the professional
license No. ____________________________, solemnly declare under oath that the installation
_____________________________________________________________________________ (description) located in
____________________________________________________ (address) in the municipality of
__________________________________________, owned by __________________________________________, ID
or Tax Identification Document (NIT) No. ____________________________________________ whose construction was
under my charge complies with each and every one of the applicable requirements set forth in the Technical Regulation
of Electrical Installations TREI, including the product requirements that I verified with the certificates of compliance I
examined and the visual analysis of the product relevant aspects.
202
(1) Similarly, I hereby declare that the construction of the electrical installation adheres to the designed made by
engineer(s) (only if detailed designed is required): ______________________________________
_____________________________ _______________________________ holder(s) of professional license(s)
number___________________________, _____________________________. The design is part of the installation
record and they are reflected in the construction of the installation and final drawings that I sign and are integral
part of this declaration.
OR
(2) (does not apply when detailed design is required) I declare hereby that the installation does not require detailed
design, and I was based for the construction on th e general specifications of this type of installations, which I
summarize in the scheme and construction report on which I set my signature and attach to this declaration.
In witness thereof, this is signed in the city of __________________________ on _____________ (date)

Signature ____________________________
Address _________________________________________ Phone number ______________________
Observations: Include technical justification of deviation of any requirement of the standard or design, provide d the
deviation does not affect safety.
List of documents attached, including definite drawings or scheme:
Form 34.1 Statement of compliance signed by the constructor
Note: The person responsible for signing the statement of compliance shall indicate only one
option with regards to the type of design.
34.10 INSPECTION OPINION FORMS
The corresponding form shall be filled out for the inspection opinion. Its content may not b e
altered and only the name, logo or brand or the inspection and accreditation bodies may be
added, as well as their corresponding number. Additionally, the following requirements must be
taken into account:
a. The inspection body shall apply the form corresponding to the relevant process for the
installation, and it shall fill out each one of the items with concrete answers, specifying
whether the item applies or not, and whether or not it complies with the related
requisites.
b. The document shall have the security media that do not facilitate its deterioration or that
it is altered.
c. The inspection opinion form shall have an original which must be kept by the owner or
holder of the installation, one copy for the Grid Operator, and one copy to be kept by the
inspection body issuing the opinion.
d. Each inspection body shall assign a continuous numbering to the forms in order to
facilitate their control. The SIC or ONAC may investigate and sanction when this
requirement is unfulfilled or when the issue dates of the opinion are inconsistent with the
numbering order.
e. In projects with end-use installation which incorporate substations, grids, or runs of lines,
the inspection opinion for the end-use installation shall be complemented with the results
of the other compliance verifications by attaching to the end-use form the results in
formats similar to the corresponding ones for substation, grid or run of line but assigning
the same number of the end-use form, unless the opinion had been issued previously in
203
which case the observation shall be recorded in the end-use opinion format by noting the
numbers of the substation and grid opinions.
f. In installations for several users, the substation and the general grid opinion forms shall be
attached to the one of the common areas installation.
g. Since technical auditing is not mandatory for private works, the name of the person
responsible for the technical audit shall be recorded in the opinion form only if it was
carried out.
h. The values of parameters that require measurement shall be recorded in the opinion
document, and they may be verified by the surveillance and control entity when the latter
considers it convenient.
204
REPUBLIC OF COLOMBIA
EXPERT OPINION OF INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE TREI
A. IDENTIFICATION OF THE INSPECTION BODY
City and date__________________________________ Opinion Inspection No.
Name of inspection body: ________________________ Accreditation Resolution: ________________
NIT of inspection body: __________________________
Address: ______________________________________ Phone number: _______________________
B. IDENTIFICATION OF LINE SUBJECT TO OPINION
Name of line ___________________________________ General service Exclusive service
Area Urban Rural ISIN isolated Service: Commercial Industrial Residential
Configuration type: ____________________ Length of line (km) _____ Type of conductors ___________
Structures material: ________________________________ No. of supports or strucures: ___________
Installed capacity [kVA or kW] Voltage [kV] Completion year

C. IDENTIFICATION OF COMPETENT PROFESSIONALS IN CHARGE.
Designer ___________________________ Professional license No. ____________
Auditor (if any) ___________________________ Professional license No. ____________
Constructor ___________________________ Professional license No. ____________
D. ASSESSMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Item ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENT ASPECT TO BE ASSESSED APPLIES COMPLIES DOES NOT
COMPLY
1 Drawings, diagrams, and schemes
2 Design Analysis of electrical risk
3 Technical specifications, calculation records
4 Design conditions of structures and fittings
5 Fields Values of electromagnetic fields
6 Insulators
7 Insulation
Distances
8 Safety distances
9 Easement area or strip
10 Disconnection and control devices
11 Operation of automatic feed cut-off
12 Protections Selection of conductors
13 Selection of over-current protection devices.
14 Selection of overvoltage protection devices.
15 Risk level assessment
Lightning protection
16 Implementation of protection
17 Earthing resistance
18 Earthing system Step and contact voltages
19 Verification of step, contact, and transferred voltages.
20 Signaling Safety warnings and signs (Air navigation)
21 Identification of conductors
22 Records of the project
23 Final documentation As-built drawing(s).
24 Products certifications
25 Structures in accordance with mechanical requirements.
26 Corrosion protection.
27 Execution of connections.
Others
28 Functional tests.
29 Materials in accordance with environmental conditions.
30 Mechanical fastening of items in the installation.
E. OBSERVATIONS, MODIFICATIONS, AND SPECIAL WARNINGS
F. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
G. RESULT OF THE INSPECTION

RESULT: Approved Not approved
Name of Technical Director, Inspection body: ___________________________Professional license No: ___________ Signature and seal: ______________
Full name of the inspector: _________________________________________ Professional license No: ___________ Signature: ______________________
Form 34.2 Inspection and verification opinion for Transmission Lines
205
B. IDENTIFICATION OF SUBSTATION SUBJECT TO OPINION

Type of associated process: Generation Transformation Distribution End-use
Type of substation: HV or EHV MV Pole MV- indoors Pad mount MV
Type of installation: Residential Commercial Industrial General use
Installed capacity [kVA or kW] Voltage [kV] No. of transformers Completion year

COMPLY
2 Electric design Analysis of electrical risk
4 Professional licenses of qualified personnel
5 Fields Values of electromagnetic fields in permanent work areas.
6 Safety distances
7 Distances Access barriers
8 Enclosure of equipment (fencing, rooms, vaults).
9 Accessibility to all of protection and control devices.
10 Disconnection and control devices
13 Response time of fault clearance protections
14 Selection of over voltage protection devices.
17 Continuity of grounding conductors and equipotential connections.
18 Currents in the earthing system.
19 Earthing system Equipotential
20 Earthing resistance.
21 Estimation of touch, step, and transferred voltage.
22 Verification of touch, step, and transferred voltage.
23 Field signaling Identification of circuits, neutral conductors, and grounding.
24 Safety diagrams, schemes, warnings, and signs.
25 Mimic schemes
29 Interlocks
30 Dielectric assays
31 Structures and fittings
32 Thermal compatibility of equipment and materials
33 Execution of the connections.
35 Materials in accordance with environmental conditions
36 Assembly
Others
37 Protection against internal arcs.
38 Protection against electrocution by direct contact.
39 Protection against electrocution by indirect contract.
40 Insulation resistance
41 Fire fighting system
42 Materials resistance to fire.
43 Mechanical fastening of elements in the installation.
44 Equipment ventilation

Form 34.3 Inspection and verification opinion for substations
206
B. IDENTIFICATION OF THE DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO OPINION
Location: _______________________________Voltage kv Capacity KVA
Area Urban Rural SIN isolated Service: Commercial Industrial Residential
Configuration type: 1-phase 3-phase Length (km) _____ Type of conductors and caliber _______
Structures material: _________ No. of supports or strucures: _____ Completion year


COMPLY
2 Electric design Analysis of electrical risk
5 Fields Values of electromagnetic fields.
6 Distances Safety distances
7 Accessibility to all of protection and control devices.
8 Operation of the automatic feed cut-off.
14 Continuity of grounding conductors and equipotential connections.
15 Currents in the earthing system.
Earthing system
16 Earthing resistance.
17 Touch and step voltages.
18 Signaling Identification of circuits.
19 Identification of raceways.
20 Safety diagrams, schemes, warnings, and signs.
24 Supports and structures.
25 Appropriate chambers and raceways.
26 Disconnection and command devices.
27 Execution of the connections.
29 Others Fittings
30 Materials in accordance with environmental conditions
31 Corrosion protection.
32 Insulation resistance.
34 Equipment ventilation.

Form 34.4 Inspection opinion for distribution
207
B. IDENTIFICATION OF THE END-USE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO OPINION
Location: Municipality ____________ Address _________________ Neighborhood: _____________
Type of service : Public Residential Commercial Industrial Special
Installed capacity [kVA or KW] Voltage [kv] Phases Completion year


COMPLY
1 Drawings, diagrams, and schemes*
2 Electric design Analysis of electrical risk*
3 Technical specifications, calculation records*
5 Fields Values of electromagnetic fields.
6 Distances Safety distances
7 Lighting Lighting that requires TRGSL
8 Accessibility to all of protection and control devices*
9 Operation of the automatic feed cut-off*
10 Protections Selection of conductors*
11 Selection of over-current protection devices*
13 Risk level assessment*
15 Continuity of grounding conductors and equipotential connections*
16 Earthing system Currents in the earthing system*
17 Earthing resistance*
18 Identification of panels and circuits*
19 Identification of raceways*
Signaling
20 Identification of phase, neutral, and grounding conductors*
21 Diagrams, schemes, warnings, and signs.
24 Products certifications*
25 Fire pump
26 Thermal compatibility of equipment and materials.
27 Execution of the connections*
28 Functional tests*
29 Materials in accordance with environmental conditions*
30 Others Protection against electric arcs.
31 Protection against electrocution by direct contact*
32 Protection against electrocution by indirect contact*
33 Insulation resistance*
34 Emergency systems
36 Equipment ventilation.
Note: * Items to be verified in household and small businesses installations.

Form 34.5. Inspection and verification opinion for end-use installations
208
SECTION 35. REVISION OF THE INSTALLATIONS
The following requirements shall be met in order to ensure that the installations maintain safety
during their useful life:
a. Absence of high risk shall be verified in all installations subject to this regulation by means
of technical inspections conducted by inspections bodies accredited for such purpose.
Periodicity of the revision of end-use installations shall be maximum ten years for basic
installations, and five years for installations classified as special.
b. In case that due to deficiencies of the electrical installation there is high risk or imminent
hazard for health or life, immediate notice shall be given to the Grid O perator so that it
takes the necessary measures in the compromised installation. If the owner of the
electrical installation or the person causing imminent hazard condition for health or
human life do not correct such situation, whoever considers this affects them in any way
may request the action of the applicable administrative or legal instances. If the conditions
that generate imminent hazard are caused by people other than the owner or holder of
the electrical installation, the former shall request the competent authority to force the
offender to eliminate the factors generating imminent hazard.50
c. When modifications are made on electrical installations intended for end-use of

electricity, the owner or manager thereof shall ensure that the works are mad e by
qualified persons. Such modifications shall be documented and be available so that their
consultation is facilitated, if necessary.
d. Modifications on grids carried out directly by personnel of the Grid Operator or by

qualified professionals working for third parties under delegation of the GO, shall be
adapted to the safety conditions established in this regulations. Said modifications shall be
documented and be available in a facility of the Grid Operator so that their consultation is
facilitated, if necessary.
e. In installations existing upon the entry into effect of the TREI, the owner or holder of the
installation shall verify that it does not have high risk or imminent threat to the life of
people. To do so, the owner shall rely on diagnostics or revisions carr ied out by qualified
personnel. In the event that the installation has imminent hazards, notice shall be given to
the people about the possible risks, and the necessary measures shall be taken in order to
minimize them.
f. For transmission lines, distribution grids, substations, and generation centrals, the owner
or holder of the installation shall ensure that the conditions of compliance with this
regulation are maintained and that the installation does not pose imminent hazard.
Controversies on the compliance with these conditions shall be solved based on an
opinion issued by an inspection body accredited by ONAC or an expert opinion.
50
Paragraph corrected by means of resolution 90907 of October 25, 2013
209
CHAPTER 11
SURVEILLANCE, CONTROL, AND SANCTIONS SCHEME
SECTION 36. SURVEILLANCE AND CONTROL ENTITIES
Surveillance and control of the compliance with this regulation corresponds to the
Superintendence of Domestic utilities, the Superintendence of Industry and Commerce, municipal
or district mayors, the National Direction of Taxes and Customs, and the profe ssional councils in
accordance with the competences granted to each one of these entities in the following legal or
regulatory provisions, and those which modify, complement, or substitute them:
a. In accordance with the provisions of section 79, Act 142 of 1994, it is the function of the
Superintendence of Domestic utilities (SSPD for its acronym in Spanish) to monitor and
control compliance with the laws and administrative actions of those who provide public
utilities services, since the service affects users directly and immediately, and to sanction
breaches of compliance provided that this function is not the competence of another
authority. Consequently, this Superintendence shall watch compliance with the TREI with
regards to electrical installations for the provision of the public electricity service.
b. In accordance with Act 1480 of 2011, decrees 2269 of 1993 and its modifying decrees
3144 of 2008, 3257 of 2008, 3273 of 2008, 3735 of 2009, and 4886 of 2011, the
Superintendence of Commerce SIC in the performance of its duties of surveillance and
controls shall monitor the compliance with the provisions for customer protection, carry
out activities of verification of technical regulations subject to its control, supervise,
monitor, and sanction certification and inspection bodies as well as test laboratories and
metrology assays which provide service of assessment of compliance related to this
regulation. Since the objectives of the TREI are closely related to the protection of the
consumer, it is the duty of the SIC to monitor and control compliance with this regulation,
except with regards to installations intended for the provision of the public utility service
and investigate and sanction their non compliance. 51
c. In accordance with section 2 of Decree 3273 of 2008, the SIC shall conduct the first control
on imported products subject to this regulation at the time of the proceedings for
approval of import registry or license through the Single Scheme for Foreign Trade (VUCE).
d. Producers and importers of goods and services subject to the compliance with technical
regulations and constructors of the installation, whose control corresponds to the
Superintendence of Industry and Commerce, shall be registered in the unique database of
producers and importers (RUPI, acronym in Spanish) and update their information.
e. The Superintendence of Industry and Commerce is enabled within the faculties of

supervision and control granted by Act 1480 of 2011 and Decree 3735 of 2009 regards to
the technical regulations to impose the measures and sanctions provided in this law on
the producers, assemblers, importers, constructors, and other responsible for the
products and installations subject to the TREI, as well as those who evalua te their
compliance when they violate the regulation.
f. In accordance to the provisions of section 62 of Act 1480 of 2011, mayors shall have in
their corresponding jurisdictions the same administrative competences of control and
surveillance than the SIC. Similarly, section 1 of Decree 3735 of 2009 points out that
according to their legal competences, mayors may proceed to administrative actions and
impose the sanctions set forth in that section within their jurisdiction, in case of non
51
Paragraph amended by means of resolution 90795 of July 25, 2014
210
compliance with the provisions related to labeling, content of technical regulations, for
which they shall adhere to the applicable provisions of the Code of Administrative
Litigation.
g. As per the provisions of Decrees 2685 of 1999 and 3273 of 2008, the DIAN has the
obligation to perform documental revision of the import registry or license, save when the
import of the products is exempted from license or registry by the National Government.
In this case, the control and surveillance shall take place by DIAN at the time of th e
request of custom clearance for the products.
h. Surveillance and control of the professional practice of engineers, technologists, and

technicians in electrical engineering who intervene in the installations shall correspond to
the Professional Councils in accordance with the laws that regulate the practice of such
professions (Act 842 of 2003 and Act 1264 of 2008), without prejudice of the sanctions for
non compliance with this regulation that the SIC or the city mayors may impose pursuant
to Act 1480 of 2011 with regards to the responsibility these professionals have for the
design, construction, inspection, operation, or maintenance of electrical installations.
SECTION 37. SANCTIONS SCHEME

Without prejudice of civil or penal liability as the case may be, non compliance with the
requirements set forth in this regulation shall be sanctioned in accordance to the provisions of the
Colombian Legislation in effect, as follows:
a. Public utilities companies as per the scheme established in Acts 142 and 143 of 1994, and
other regulations that may add, modify, or substitute them, and other applicable legal
provisions.
b. Qualified persons responsible for the design, construction, supervision, inspection,

operation, and maintenance of installations subject to the TREI, under the laws that
regulate the practice of professions related to electrical technology, Act 1480 with regards
to consumer protection, and other applicable legal provisions. Likewise, disciplinary
sanctions set forth by the professional councils for violations with regards to the code of
professional ethics, adopted by Acts 842 of 2003 and 1264 of 2008, and other regulations
that add, modify, or substitute them.
c. Users, in accordance with what is established in Decree 1842 of 1992 National Statute of
the Users of Domestic utilities , Act 142 of 1994, Resolution 108 of 1997 from CREG and
other applicable regulations.
d. Producers, importers, traders, constructors of buildings or infrastructure that incorporate

installations subject to the TREI, as per Decree 3466 of 1982, Act 1480 of 2011, and other
applicable legal provisions.
e. Tests and assays laboratories, certification bodies of products and individuals, and
inspection bodies accredited as per the provisions of Decrees 2152 of 1992 and 2269 of
1993, Act 1480 of 2011, and other applicable legal provisions which modify, add, or
substitute them.
f. Qualified professionals who issue the statement of compliance of the installation as per
Act 1480 of 2011, with regards to the certification of compliance, and Acts 842 of 2003
and 1264 of 2008 with regards to the professional practice.
211
CHAPTER 12
TRANSIENT PROVISIONS
Pursuant to the compliance of commercial agreements and particular conditions of certain

requirements, transient terms are established in the following cases:
SECTION 38. TRANSIENT REQUIREMENTS

For the purposes of this General Annex, the following transient provisions shall be taken into
account.
38.1 CERTIFICATES OF COMPETENCES FOR INDIVIDUALS.
The universities who offer approved programs of electrical engineering may certify the
professional competence of people interested in performing activities related with this regulation
who require such certification, until there are at least two (2) organizations in the national
territory accredited for certification of professional competences. These certificates shall have a
validity of two (2) years and may be renewed in case that there are not at least two (2)
organizations accredited by the ONAC. The certificates issued during the transient term shall have
full validity. The certificate of professional competence shall be enforceable as of March 30,
2015.52
38.2 CERTIFICATES OF PRODUCT COMPLIANCE
Demonstration of compliance with the TREI shall have the following transient conditions:
a. The Certificate of Product Compliance with the TREI for electric vehicles battery chargers,
electric showers or electric tankless water heaters, automatic transfers, thermal relays for
overcharges protection, medium voltage reclosers, crossheads for use in supporting
structures of electrical grids, and requirements of products additional to the ones set forth
in the General Annex of Resolution 181294 of 2008, shall be enforceable within six (6)
months after the publication of this General Annex. Products that had been manufactured
or imported prior to six months from the publication of this General Annex shall be
accepted provided that they comply with the requirements of Resolution 181294 of 2008
and have their product certificates in effect.
b. For those products subject to the TREI included for the first time on Table 2.1 herein,
which were not considered in prior Resolutions and which are not considered within the
scope of certification of at least two (2) accredited bodies, may demonstrate compliance
with the statement of the supplier until there is accreditation from the second body and
three (3) months more. The statement shall declare compliance with this regulation, the
tests supporting the statement, and meet the requirements of the ISO/IEC 17050 standard
parts 1 and 2. After the three months, shall there be at least two (2) product certification
bodies accredited by ONAC, the statement of the provider shall not be valid any longer.53
38.3 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLIANCE OF INSTALLATIONS
Installations that prove they began their construction process during the effect of Resolution
181294 of 2008 or within the first six (6) months of the validity of Resolution 90708 of 2013, may
be completed and demonstrate compliance with the requirements set forth in the General Annex
of Resolution 181294. In any case, the compliance shall use the criteria and formats of the
52
53
212
General Annex of Resolution 90708 of 2013, and leave a clarification on the observations that it
was assessed with the requirements of Resolution 181294 of 2008.54
The full certification, that is to say, the statement of the person responsible for the construction
endorsed by the opinion of the inspection body in order to prove compliance of the electrical
installations for generation, transmission, and substations of high and extra high voltage, are
enforceable from the time five (5) inspection bodies were accredited for this type of installations.
The certificates of compliance or opinions issued by certification or inspection bodies accredited

under Resolution 181294 of 2008 shall remain to be valid until their expiration, and may continue
being issued for a term not exceeding six months counted from the publication of this Annex.
38.4 UPDATING OF THE REGULATIONS OF GRID OPERATORS, TRANSMITTERS,

AND GENERATORS
In a term not exceeding six months counted from the publication of this Annex, the grid operators,
owner or operators of transmission lines, substations, and generation centrals shall make the
adjustments to internal technical rules those companies apply, ensuring that they do not
contravene this regulation, that they are of public knowledge, that they are not discriminatory nor
contravene the general principles of domestic utilities established in the Law.
After the expiry of the time set forth, this Ministry or the Superintendence of Domestic Utilities
may request such regulations at any moment, and the companies shall submit them free of
charge, in order to verify their compliance with this regulation.
The Superintendence of Domestic Utilities shall sanction the non compliance with these
requirements.
54
213
CHAPTER 13
REVISION AND UPDATE
SECTION 39. INTERPRETATION, REVISION, AND UPDATE OF THE REGULATION
The content of this regulation, issued by the Ministry of Mines and Energy, complies with the
procedures and methodologies accepted by the Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade, and it
is the result of a wide discussion with democratic participation of different stakeholders.
The Ministry of Mines and Energy of Colombia is the competent authority for the preparation,
revision, update, interpretation, and modification of the TREI, which may be done ex -officio or
upon request of third parties.
In view of the technological development and in exceptional cases or objective situations

sufficiently justified, the Ministry of Mines and Energy may authorize technical requirements
different to the ones included in the TREI; to do so, it shall review and evaluate them so that said
requirements do not contravene the purposes of the TREI.
When the designer of an installation foresees the use or application of new technologies, or
circumstances unforeseen in this regulation arise, the introduction of said innovation s may be
justified by pointing out the objectives, as well as the regulations and provisions that support the
innovation, provided that such modifications do not affect safety. The Ministry of Mines and
Energy may accept or refuse the project depending whether or not the innovations are justified,
and in accordance with the legitimate purposes.
Companies in the electric sector may submit complementary proposals, without deviating from
the principles of efficiency and adaptability addressed in Act 143 of 2004, highlighting the concrete
technical conditions that are essential in order to get greater safety in the electrical installations.
In any case these conditions may not contradict the general principles of public utilities. These
proposals shall be based on international technical standards, standards recognized
internationally, and they fit to the provisions established herein. They shall be submitted to the
Direction of Electrical Power of the Ministry of Mines and Energy for its approval in order to be
implemented.
TO BE PUBLISHED AND ENFORCED
Issued in Bogota, D.C., AUGUST 30, 2013
(ILLEGIBLE SIGNATURE)
MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY
214

RETIE en Ingles

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

RETIE en Ingles

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

GENERAL ANNEX OF TREI RESOLUTION 90708 OF AUGUST 30, 2013 WITH AMENDMENTS

TECHNICAL REGULATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS (TREI)

20.4.2 FIRE DOORS...................................................................................................... 95

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE GENERATION PROCESS .................................................................. 136

SECTION 25. GENERAL PROVISIONS................................................................................. 155

PROOF OF CONFORMITY ....................................................................................................... 186

General Annex of Technical Regulations of Electrical Installations TREI

Protection of human life and health.

SECTION 2. FIELD OF APPLICATION

Motors of less than 375 W are excluded

electrical installations under NTC 2050

elements for telecommunications signals,

b. Installations pertaining to the following equipment: electro-medical, radio signals,

b. Raw materials or components for the manufacture, assembly, or repair of machines,

c. Products used as samples for certification or research.

d. Non-commercial samples, used in trade fairs or demonstrative events.

e. Products for assembly or contract manufacturing.

INDUCTION: Phenomenon in which an energized body transmits by means of its electric or

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: Set of phenomena associated to electromagnetic

Deficiencies in the electrical installation.

LIGHTNING: The atmospheric discharge commonly known as lightning is a physical phenomenon

VULNERABILITY: Physical, economical, social, environmental, or institutional susceptibility or

SECTION 4. ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS OF COMMON USE

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

SECTION 5. UNITS SYSTEM

a. Magnitude must not be confused with unit.

SECTION 6. SYMBOLISM AND SIGNALLING

6.1 ELECTRIC SYMBOLS

Table 6.1. Main graphic symbols

6.2 SAFETY SIGNALLING

6.2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF SAFETY SIGNS

Type of Geometric Color

Table 6.3. Classification and colors for safety signs

Toxic materials Skull with two shin bones

Corrosive materials Decayed hand

Radioactive materials A conventional clover-like shape

Electrical risk Lightning or arc

Mandatory use of foot Boots with symbol of electrical

Entrance forbidden Walking human figure, with a

Mandatory use of Head of a person wearing

Mandatory use of eye Head of person wearing goggles

Mandatory use of Head of person wearing

Mandatory use of Glove

Table 6.4 Main safety signs.

6.3 COLOR CODING FOR CONDUCTORS

DC System With mid conductor Without mid conductor

SECTION 7. COMMUNICATIONS FOR COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORKS

QRI HOW IS THE TONE OF MY QUA HAVE YOU NEWS OF?

SECTION 8. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAM

f. Establish and execute the modifications in processes or operations, substitution of

h. Setup and develop an emergency plan considering the following aspects:

ESSENTIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 9. ANALYSIS OF RISKS OF ELECTRICAL ORIGIN

TRIP CURRENT 6 mA (rms) 10 mA (rms) 20 mA (rms) 30 mA (rms)

Biegelmeier established the relation between l 2t (specific energy) and physiological

SPECIFIC ENERGY l2t PHYSIOLOGICAL PERCEPTIONS AND REACTIONS

The conditions with regards to the

Figure 9.2 Impedance of the human

9.2 EVALUATION OF RISK LEVEL

b. Define whether the risk is potential or actual.

g. Make de decisions or take actions as indicated on Table 9.4.

Table 9.3 Risk Assessment Matrix